Home

Denon AVR-5805CI User's Manual

1. Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the video convert mode settings of MAIN ZONE Video convert input signals MONITOR OUT HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x x x x x x x x x x x O VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO x x O x S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO x x O O S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO x 1080p x x x x O 480p 720p x x COMPONENT x O 480 576 x x COMPONENT x O 1080p x O VIDEO x O 480p 720p x O COMPONEN x O 480 576 x O COMPONEN x 1080p O x S VIDEO x O 480p 720p O x COMPONEN x O 480 576 O x COMPONEN x 1080p O O S VIDEO x O 480p 720p O O COMPONEN ON x O 480i 576i O O COMPONENT O x x x HDMI x x x O x x O HDMI VIDEO 2 VIDEO VIDEO O x O x HDMI S VIDEO 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO O x O O HDMI S VIDEO 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO O O 1080p x x HDMI O O 480p 720p x x HDMI O 480i 576i x x HDMI O O 1080p x O HD Kal O O 480p 720p x O HD Kal O O 480i 576i x O HD Kal O O 1080p O x HD 2 S VIDEO O O 480p 720p O x HD 2 S VIDEO O O 480i 576i O x HD ES S VIDEO S VIDEO O O 1080p O O HD 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO O 480p 720p O O HD Ka S VIDEO S VIDEO O O 480i 576i O O HD 2 S VIDEO S VIDEO O Signal input x Not output X N
2. MAIN ZONE Mam SEN ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 9 1 CH 1 SP 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 2 SP STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 3 SP STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 7 1 CH 1 SP 7 1 CH 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 2 SP 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 3 SP 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 5 1 CH 1 SP 7 1 CH 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO 2 SP 7 1 CH 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO SSP 7 1 CH 5 1 CH STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO NOTE e The channel settings that can be selected for ZONE2 depend on the channel settings for the MAIN ZONE E The subwoofer output composition is as shown below Subwoofer Output Composition 1 SP Select this when only one subwoofer is connected 2 SP L R Select this when subwoofers are installed on the left and right F B Select this when subwoofers are installed at the front and rear LFE M Select this to use the subwoofer for both the main channel s low frequencies and for LFE low frequencies 3 SP Select this when subwoofers are installed on the left and right and you are using a L R LFE io subwoofer specifically for the LFE Select this when subwoofers are installed at the front and rear and you are using a F B LFE E subwoofer specifically for the LFE 127 Advanced
3. INFRARED RETRANSMITTER INFRARED SENSOR D FRONT P L Extension terminals for future use Oo ein cl R NOTE e For the AUDIO output use high quality pin plug cables and wire in such a way that there is no humming or noise e For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices refer to the devices operating instructions 41 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the pre out terminals e Use these terminals if you wish to connect external power amplifier s to increase the power of the front center surround and surround back sound channels or for connection to powered loudspeakers e When using only one surround back speaker connect it to left channel Power amplifier a D 9 1ch AUDIO IN o 0 gt A R D Hds a E CENTER D EE ome IF R FRONT Debt S SURROUND JR BACK ell R D St ei or ell ell R D oT EE WA P e By changing the MAIN ZONE channel settings up to three subwoofers can be connected to the AVR 5BOBCI For more information about Setting the Channel Setup IGS page 126 128 Connecting the power supply cord AC outlet wall ge Power supply cord AC 120 V 60 Hz ac S Supplied CH S AC OUTLETS tS e SWITCHED total capacity 120 W 1 AN The power to these outlets is turned on and off in
4. Advanced Playback Default settings Page 2ch The speaker settings can be changed specifically for Basic 116 Direct Stereo playing in the 2 channel direct or stereo mode Dolby Digital Turn the audio compression on or off when down mixing OFF 117 Setup Dolby Digital signals Auto Surround Set the Auto surround mode function Auto Surround Mode ON 117 Mode Manual EQ This parameter is for optimizing the Room EQ with which Setup the audio signals are produced from the speakers ph Chanheisiand EECH A Zone Setup Zone Setup Default settings Page Speaker Set the presence absence of speaker combinations and Front Sp Center Sp Subwoofer Surround Sp Gr uration he size in function of the low frequency reproduction 120 9 capabilities when playing surround sound in ZONE2 Small Small Yes Small Subwoofer This selects the subwoofer used in ZONE2 for playing the LFE 120 Mode low base sound This parameter is for optimizing the timing of the sound Front L amp R Center Subwoofer Surround L amp R Delay Time produced from the various speakers and subwoofer 121 according to the listening position in ZONE2 12 0 ft 3 6 m 12 0 ft 3 6 m 12 0 ft 3 6 m 10 0 ft 3 0 m Channel This adjusts the volume of the signal output from the Front WEEN Center SE E Ee 122 123 Level various speakers and subwoofer used in ZONE2 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB 0 0 dB Crossover Set the frequency in Hz below which deep bass Freguenc ap
5. Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to move the cursor E to the character number symbol or punctuation mark you wish to input and press the CURSOR A or V button to select that character ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy z0123456789 I amp lt gt Space X Up to 8 characters can be input 106 4 Repeat step 3 to input the input function name Advanced Setup Part 1 Xx To reset the input function name to the default value Setting the IEEE1394 Assignment press the CURSOR lt or gt button to highlight the input function display then press the CURSOR V button e Assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default input function name 3 4 Function Rename 3 4 Function Rename 4DVD 5910 gt D 4DVD 5910 Default Default Yes4 p Once all the characters have been input press the ENTER button e The Function Rename screen reappears Use the same procedure to change other input function names as well Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears e When the input function is selected the display is as shown below Example When the name has been changed to DVD 5910
6. Getting Started Operating range of the remote control unit e Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor on the main unit as shown on the diagram e The remote control unit can be used from a straight distance of approximately 23 feet 7 meters from the main unit but this distance will be shorter if there are obstacles in the way or if the remote control unit is not pointed directly at the remote sensor e The remote control unit can be operated at a horizontal angle of up to 30 degrees with respect to the remote sensor NOTE e t may be difficult to operate the remote control unit if the remote sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light e Do not press buttons on the main unit and remote control unit simultaneously Doing so may result in malfunction e Neon signs or other devices emitting pulse type noise x nearby may result in malfunction so keep the set as far Approx 23 feet 7 m NI away from such devices as possible Getting Started art names and Front panel e For details on the functions of these parts refer to the pages given in parentheses dU d DENON ADVANCED 9 24 PROCESSING MASTER VOLUME FUNCTION ZONE 374 REC SELECT TUNING ZONE PRESET SELECT SOURCE SURROUND MODE De Cer system SYSTEM SURROUND SURROUND STANDARD THXCINEMA 9CHSTE
7. L Exit p Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the adjustment mode then press the ENTER button All CH All channels can be adjusted simultaneously L R CH The left and right channels of the pair of speakers can be adjusted simultaneously Each CH The channels can be adjusted separately 3 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the speaker to be set Example When L R CH is selected Manual EQ FR4Front L R gt 6 3Hz 0 OB 125hz 0 OB 25 0Hz 0 OB 5 0 0Hz 0 048 1 kHz 0 OB 2 kHz 0 OB 4 kHz 0 OB 8 kHz 0 OB 16kHz 0 O x The display changes as follows Select the L R CH FL FR LC gt SLAISRA Lee SLB SRB y D 118 DH 2 Select the Each CH gt FL ra FR gt C mSLAM SRA SBR SBL SRB SLB bi SB ke X When the surround back speaker setting is set to Ispkr at Speaker Configuration this is set to SB 3 Select the All CH In this case speaker selection is not performed Xx Ifa value is already set for the FL channel the data stored for the FL channel is displayed Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the frequency then press the CURSOR lt or E button to adjust the gain level Each frequency can be adjusted the range from 20 0 dB to 6
8. P Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the frequency VARIABLE 40 60 80 100 120 150 200 250 Hz Set as desired according to your speakers bass playback ability Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Zone Setup menu reappears I e For the majority of home theater speaker systems we recommend that the crossover frequency be set to 80 Hz When using very compact speakers however it may be advantageous to select a higher crossover frequency Check the specified low frequency limit of each speaker usually published in the specifications tables in speaker owner s manuals e The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to Yes and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL as described in section Setting the type of speakers for ZONE2 ES page 120 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Video Setup for ZONE2 E Video Convert Mode ZONE2 e This sets whether or not to use the video conversion function 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Video Setup at the Zone Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Video Setup screen appears Zone Setup 6 6 Video Setup Zoe Speaker Config Subwoofer Mode Delay Time Channel Level 1 2 g FVideo Convert Mode 5 Crossover Frequenc 6 7 E Video Setup GER pe tay Zone3 4 Tone Ch Le Zb Exit Press the CUR
9. 10247 10264 10487 10072 10516 10264 10087 10512 r 10102 0282 0487 10032 10072 10105 10191 10216 10287 10859 10516 10817 10817 10247 10411 11037 10753 10264 10361 10374 10610 10102 10512 10163 10163 10370 10035 10073 10108 10193 10217 10290 10361 10535 10848 10455 10849 10371 10370 10412 10714 a TOZI 10200 10217 10377 10036 0087 0109 0194 0226 029 0363 0556 10621 10865 10556 10418 10661 10247 10247 10218 10394 10037 0093 0146 0195 0235 02925 0370 rradio RT sukai TC Ts TT TT Nokia TV Janeil JBL JCB Jean Jensen Jiahua JiaLiCai Jinfeng Jinhai Jinque Jinta Jinxing JNL Jocel Jubilee Juhua Kaige Kaisui Kambrook Kamp Kangchong Kangli Kangy Kapsch Karcher Kathrein Kawa Kawasho Kaypan KB Aristocrat KEC 10218 10451 10037 10217 10216 10163 10361 10163 10363 10037 10046 10054 10000 10003 10179 10698 10051 10009 10051 10848 10009 10009 10009 10556 10443 10698 10712 10556 10264 0036 10418 10683 10009 0009 10455 10217 10216 10848 10001 10009 10104 10037 10610 10556 10371 10216 10052 10163 10180 10247 10628 10218 10320 10264 10179 10473 ON 10473 10264 100
10. 59 USER MODE function e The AVR 5805Cl is equipped with a function for storing the selected input source the auto surround mode and input mode in the memory and selecting these settings when you want to use them e Three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory pressing the USER MODE buttons E Storing the settings in the memory The following are stored in the memory Currently set input source 2 Currently set auto surround mode 3 Currently set input mode Press and hold the USER MODE button until the USER MODE indicator lights E Calling the settings out Press the USER MODE button at which the settings you want to call out are stored e The user mode indicator lights X The indicator turns off if you perform any operations that change the settings stored at the USER MODE buttons Basic Operation DENON original surround modes e The AVR 5805Cl is equipped with a high performance DSP Digital Signal Processor which uses digital signal processing to synthetically recreate the sound field One of ten preset surround modes can be selected according to the program source and the parameters can be adjusted according to the conditions in the listening room to achieve a more realistic powerful sound Surround modes and their features Select this to achieve an atmosphere like that of a movie theater with a large screen In this mode all signal sources are played in the 7 1 chann
11. Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Setup Lock at the Setup Memory Lock screen then press the ENTER button e Switch to the Setup Lock screen 7 6 Setup Memory Lock 7 6 Setup Lock User Memory Setup Lock Exit Press the CURSOR lt button to select ON to lock the system setup settings then press the ENTER button P e When the setup lock function is activated the settings listed below cannot be changed and SETUP LOCKED is displayed when related buttons are operated e System setup settings e Surround parameter settings e Tone control settings e Channel level settings including test tones e Room EQ e To unlock press the SYSTEM SETUP button again and display the Setup Lock screen then select OFF and press the ENTER button 137 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Network Setup e f you are using a broadband router DHCP function there is no need to make the settings at Setting the IP Address and Setting the Proxy since the DHCP function is set to ON in the AVR 5805CI s default settings e f the AVR 5805CI is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function the network settings must be made In this case some knowledge of networks is required E Setting the IP Address Set this when OFF is set for DHCP 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to s
12. Input DVD 5910 Mode STEREO 107 source The power of the device to be assigned must be turned on ahead of time 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select TEEE1394 Assign at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The IEEE1394 Assign screen appears 3 Audio Input Setup 3 5 EEE1394 Assign Digital In Assign EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename 1 2 3 4 5 1EEE1394 Assign 6 7 E DG DVD 3910 4 gt 11 l2 DVD 5900 1EEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets Press the CURSOR or V button to select the device to be assigned to the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the input source 3 5 EEE1394 Assign r DVD 3910 4 1 2 DVD 5900 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears AUTO P If you do not wish to assign the device connected by IEEE1394 cable to an input source the IEEE1394 input can be selected by turning the FUNCTION knob In this case the connection information is cleared when the power of the connected device or the AVR 5805CI is turned off so the selection procedure must be performed again By default if no device has been connected using an IEEE1394 cable in the past No Connection is displayed Connection Change is displayed if there is a
13. L2 C R2 Z3M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L4 SLB R4 SR B L4 Z3L R4 Z3R L4 R4 L4 Z3L R4 Z3R L4 RA L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 R5 I5 IR5 e Amp Assign mode ZONE4 MAIN ZONE 9 1 CH 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup gt ZONE4 MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR L2 C R2 Z4M L2 C R2 L2 C R2IZ4M L2 C R2 L2 C R2 Z4M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L4 SLB R4 SRB L4 Z4L R4 Z4R L4 REM RR ICC HOENEN L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 R5 L5 IR5 131 Advanced Setup Part 1 e Amp Assign mode ZONE2 3 MAIN ZONE 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup ZONE2 STEREO MONO MONO STEREO STEREO MONO MONO ZONE3 MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR JLT FL YR1 FR LT FL BIR YLT FL RI FR ET FL PREJ FR JLT FL RI FR YLT FL YR FR 12 C R2 Z3MjL2 C R2 Z2M L2 C R2 Z3M L2 C R2 L2 C R2 Z3M L2 C R2 Z2M L2 C R2
14. otorola Movie Time r Zap Mr Zap Multichoice ultitech MultiVision yrio NEC okia Noos SC NTL Oak Ono Optimus Optus Pace Panasonic Panther PRESET CODE 00019 00451 00276 01376 00063 01112 01112 00015 00019 00883 00012 01602 01496 01569 00817 00063 00003 00007 01068 00021 00276 00008 00000 01488 00637 00797 00011 00014 00015 00276 00476 00797 01110 00144 00020 00034 00259 00273 00014 00153 00315 00011 00012 00014 00015 00276 00810 00144 00443 00476 00810 01106 01187 01254 01483 00443 00250 00277 01060 01068 00019 01060 00237 01060 01068 01368 01877 00008 00021 00040 00107 00443 Paragon 00000 TS 00003 Philips 00013 00153 00317 00619 00817 01305 Tusa 00015 Pioneer 00144 00533 00877 01500 01877 TV86 00063 Popular Mechanics 00400 Unika 00022 00153 Pulsar 00000 United Artists 00007 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix United Cable 00003 00003 Universal 00022 00153 00191 Quasar 00000 US Electronics 00276 Quiero 00817 V2 00883 RadioShack 00015 00315 00797 00883 Videotron 00250 RCA 00021 01256 Videoway 00250 Recoton 00400 Viewmaster 00883 Regal 00020 00259 00273 00279 Viewstar 00063 00258 Regency 00002 Vision 00883 Rembrandt 00011 Visionetics 01064 Runco 00000 Visiopass 00451 Sagem 00817 01089 01112 Vortex View 00883 Salora 00000 Zenith 00000
15. 10630 10768 Haiyan Halifax Hallmark Hammerstein Hampton Hanimex Hankook Hanseatic Hantarex Hantor Harley Davidson Harman Kardon Harsper Harvard Harwa Harwood Havermy HCM Helios Hello Kitty Hema Hemmermann Hher Higashi Hikona Himitsu H inari Hisawa E isense Hit Hitachi Hitachi Fujian Hitsu HMV 10264 10217 10178 10060 10216 10218 11137 10037 10179 10054 10865 10180 10773 10009 10093 10009 10412 10865 10451 10009 10544 10714 10216 10218 10180 10009 10264 10218 10009 10508 10753 10087 10009 10036 10072 10151 10179 10361 10492 10576 10884 11156 10037 10009 10087 0019 0009 10320 10544 0009 10412 10817 10264 10217 0030 10056 0037 10087 10361 10377 10556 10634 0037 10102 10418 10606 10217 10628 10779 10036 10037 10355 10282 10455 10037 10145 10512 10556 10780 10821 10016 10019 10037 10092 10156 10186 10363 10499 10578 11037 11170 10108 10145 10218 10455 10193 10038 10105 10157 10194 10381 10508 10629 11045 11226 10178 10180 10628 10195 10217 10282 10394 10428 10499 10661 10714 10808 10238 10516 10865 a MOA 10610 lU E 10696 10848 10027 10039 10108 10163 10217 10473 10512 10634 ile 11256 10150 10610 10032
16. IGE page 141 142 is displayed at the top right of the screen 2 5 Crossover Frequency SW LFE Main EK Fixed IHN e Please set all THX Certified speakers to small and the crossover to 80 Hz e We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to FIXED THX but depending on the speaker setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency e The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to Yes and when one or more speakers are set to SMALL as described in section Speaker Configuration settings ES page 140 141 E Setting the crossover frequency individually for the different channels Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select Advanced at the Crossover Frequency screen 2 5 Crossover Frequency ELI Advanced 8 Front Small 4 8QOHz gt Center Small 4 8OHz gt Surround A Small 4 80OHz gt Surround B Small 4 80Hz S Back Small 4 8OHz gt L LEE 80Hz j Press the CURSOR or V button to select the speaker to be set 2 5 Crossover Frequency 4 Advanced gt Front Small 4 80Hz Center Small 4 80Hz Surround A Small 4 80Hz Surround B Smal 4 80Hz S Back Small 4 8 OHz LFE 80Hz j Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the frequency 2 5 Crossover Frequency
17. Power Amp Assign at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Power Amp Assign screen appears Option Setup 7 2 Power Amp Assign Channel Setup Power Amp Assign FA A 7 Volume Control a eee Trigger Out AC Outlet Assign j iz FL Ri F Setup Memory Lock L2 S R2 ee L3 SLA R3 SRA L4 SL B R4 SR B L5 SBL R5 SBR_ J 2 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the Amp Assign mode according to the speaker system you want to achieve Normal This is the recommended amplifier assignment mode Normally select this when not conducting the power amplifier assignment By default this is set to Normal Advanced With this mode the power amplifiers can be assigned freely to the desired channels according to the speaker system you are using Adv Front B With this mode the power amplifiers can be assigned freely to the desired channels and front B x The following modes can be selected when there are power amplifiers that are free with respect to the recommended amplifier assignment mode Normal Zone2 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 output channel Zone3 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE3 output channel Zoned4 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE4 out
18. Watching the display press the CURSOR lt or gt button to call out the desired program type cr N RDS PTY 1 Select category by 4 gt button INFORM SPORTS TALK ROCK CLS ROCK ADLT HIT SOFT RCK TOP 40 Next 2 Tune by preset Up Down CHB5 M105 50Mbz Press the CHANNEL button e Automatically begin the PTY search operation E WM RDS PT Y Sm 1 Select category by 4 gt button INFORM SPORTS TALK ROCK CLS ROCK ADLT HIT SOFT RCK TOP 40 Next 2 Tune by preset Up Down XN J x If there is no station broadcasting the designated program type with above operation all the reception bands are searched x The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops 69 Basic Operation To continue searching repeat step 3 X If no other station broadcasting the designated program type is found when all the frequencies are searched NO PROGRAMME is displayed cr RDS PTY 1 Select category by 4 gt button NEWS INFORM TALK ROCK ADLT HIT TOP 40 SPORTS CLS ROCK SOFT RCK Next Up 2 Tune by preset Down CHBS FM105 50MHz TP search e Use this function to find RDS SEARCH stations broadcasting traffic program TP stations Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION A O Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to s
19. AVR 5805Cl gt Use the internal test tones for mic amp calibration Microphone Pressure level with SPL meter at the microphone point Adjust AVR volume SPL meter 80 dB C Check the parameter e The results of the measured items can be checked e The EQ parameters that were set in Auto Setup can be checked e This item is displayed after the measurement result of the Auto Setup Room EQ is decided 1 e The Parameter Check screen appears 1 Auto Setup Room EQ Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Parameter Check at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button Auto Setup Room EQ Setup Direct Mode Setup Mic Input Select Parameter Check Delay Time Check ce 2 3 4 Channel F5 Exit Yes 4 Restore Exit 1 5 Parameter Check Speaker Config Check Level Check Crossover Freq Check EQ Parameter Check S Press the CURSOR or Y button to select the items then press the ENTER button e The verification screen appears If the check ends press the ENTER button again 151 MIC AMP with mic power supply ex mixer amp Advanced Setup Part 2 Measure the output level and adjust the mic amp gain to 120 mVrms using a RMS volt meter Press the CURSOR or V button to select EQ Parameter Check button then press the ENTER e The EO Pa
20. RECOUT SOURCE appears on the display Press the INPUT MODE button to set the input mode according to the source to be played Press the DIRECT STEREO button to set the surround mode e The multichannel digital signals are down mixed and output to the TAPE and VCR output terminals 4 Set the recording mode NOTE e This function does not work when 5 2 ch 5 3 ch is set for the MAIN ZONE s channel setup 100 E Dolby Headphone recording e When REC OUT mode is set to SOURCE with the AVR 5805Cl it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder 7 The Dolby Headphone play mode is set when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack during playback in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS Surround mode e When this is done signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode are automatically output from the recording output terminals analog and digital and can be recorded Select the parameters and set the desired mode e Start recording x Refer to the Dolby Headphone IGS page 59 NOTE e Do not disconnect the headphones during recording Last Function Memory e This unit is equipped with a last function memory which stores the input and output setting conditions as they were immediately before the power is switched off This function eliminates the need to perform complica
21. Teac 30053 30000 31208 30420 30888 20029 20283 20076 20029 20076 20074 20308 20439 20353 20029 20029 20070 20244 21309 20070 20375 20308 20029 20009 20099 20283 20029 20135 20027 20308 20229 20029 20337 20027 20029 20029 20027 20029 20009 20074 20231 20337 20029 20375 20170 20439 20109 20280 30420 30100 31292 20197 20439 20371 20309 20375 20229 20182 20071 20273 20071 20309 20029 20439 20136 20220 20309 20229 20099 20220 20190 20029 20371 20234 20243 20291 21313 20283 31364 20200 21315 21311 21471 20375 20439 20375 21314 20337 20282 20337 20439 20353 20289 20308 20309 20274 20303 20304 20310 20092 20233 20234 21364 20220 21306 21312 34 Technics Thorens Universum Victor Wards Wharfedale Yamaha PVR x1 ABS Alienware CyberPower Dell DirecTV Gateway Hewlett Packard Howard Computers HP 20229 20353 20029 20375 20439 20244 20273 20274 20027 20029 20439 20094 20097 21972 21972 21972 Hughes Network Systems Humax Hush iBUYPOWER Linksys edia Center PC Microsoft ind Niveus Media orthgate Panasonic Philips RCA ReplayTV Sonic Blue Sony Stack 9 Systemax Tagar Systems Tivo Toshiba Touch Viewsonic Voodoo ZT Gro
22. Y Pe Pr DVI D OUT gt L HDMI D AUDIO OUT 0 gt Al R s C COAXIAL cm Sut x Audio signal flow is shown with white arrows video signal flow is shown with gray arrows 18 Easy Setup and Operation e For best picture quality especially with progressive DVD and other high definition sources choose the component video or HDMI connection to your monitor or TV S Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your TV does not have component video inputs 7 TV Monitor _ II D L or COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y AERCH Ps Pr D COMPONENT VIDEO OUT rf Let fill Ps zm OL TSN SVIDEO L Be IN NOTE e The component video input and or output terminals may be labeled differently on some TVs monitors or video components Y PB PR Y CB Cr Y B Y R Y Check the operating instructions for other components for further information e The COMPONENT MONITOR OUT and the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 2 can be used simultaneously Connect with a BNC cable when using the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 1 terminal a component video cable when using the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 2 terminal e The HDMI and DVI D monitor output terminals on the AVR 5805CI can only be used one at a time not simultaneously Audio signals are only output from the HDMI monitor out connector when audio signals are input to the HDMI input conn
23. ZONE3 SOURCE appears on the display 2 With ZONE3 SOURCE displayed turn the FUNCTION knob until RECOUT SOURCE appears on the display e The REC indicator lights X The function switches as shown below when the FUNCTION knob is turned ZONE3 SOURCE lt ZONE3 TUNER gt gt ZONE3 V AUX RECOUT V AUX lt RECOUT VCR 4 RECOUT SOURCE 3 With RECOUT SOURCE displayed turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source you wish to record 4 Set the recording mode e Start recording Xx For operating instructions refer to the manual of the component on which you want to record INPUT MODE DIRECT STEREO e To cancel turn the FUNCTION knob and select SOURCE e Recording sources other than digital inputs selected in the REC OUT mode are also output from the ZONE audio video terminals e When the REC OUT mode is selected the ZONE3 button on the remote control unit cannot be operated E Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel sources e With this set it is possible to record Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel signals converted into 2 channel analog signals e The recording signals are output to the TAPE and VCR output terminals e Down mixed analog signals converted into digital signals are output from the OPTICAL 3 4 and 5 digital output terminals at this time Press the ZONE3 4 REC SELECT button until
24. e Check that the remote control unit is set to AMP or TUNER Auto tuning Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION AA EN ICH Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER EN mode Remote control unit Watching the display press the BAND button to select the desired band AM FM or XM x When listening to the XM satellite Radio CS page 71 Press the MODE button to set the auto tuning mode e The AUTO indicator lights Press the TUNING button e Automatic searching begins then stops when a station is tuned in P e f tuning does not stop at the desired station use to the Manual tuning operation e When in the auto tuning mode on the FM band the STEREO indicator lights on the display when a stereo broadcast is tuned in At open frequencies the noise is muted and the TUNED and STEREO indicators turn off Basic Operation FUNCTION TUNING PRESET wa wl MEMORY fo BLOCK E MEMORY TUNING BAND memory Kei mm oO RDS mesa E ON SCREEN AMP mode CHANNEL A MODE BAND E CES NUMBER amp SCH AMP mode SHIFT Manual tuning Preset memory Use the Auto tuning or Manual tuning operation to tune in the station to be preset in the memory Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER EN mode 1 Set the inpu
25. fPProxy Address 000 000 000 000 Port 0000 x J Press the CURSOR or V button to select the desired setting item then press the CURSOR gt button and CURSOR or V button to input the character or number Proxy Input the proxy server domain name or address Port Input the proxy server port number Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Network Setup menu reappears E Setting the Network Option 1 Setting the Power Saving When not using the AVR 5805C1 connected in a network set ON to reduce the power consumption when in the standby mode Set OFF when using the AVR 5805CI connected in a network 139 Advanced Setup Part 1 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Network Option at the Network Setup screen then press the ENTER button e The Network Option screen appears 7 7 Network Setup E N IP Address 7 7 Network Option P FStandby Mode 40N gt Ra Power Saving FNetwork Option PC Language H eng gt Exit MAC Address C 0005cd 10d901 J Press the CURSOR lt 1 or button to select ON or OFF 7 7 Network Option Standby Mode 4OFF gt Power Saving PC Language 4 eng gt 2 Setting the PC Language Select according to the language of the computer being used The languages are indicated with three letters conforming to ISO639 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select PC
26. 01775 00853 01246 00856 00136 00345 00847 01335 01099 01298 01159 00299 00607 01111 00720 00879 01162 01173 00871 00501 00713 00794 00863 01209 00299 00369 00396 00417 01161 01214 00592 00692 00834 00853 01101 01111 01557 01284 00887 00417 00885 00455 00501 00571 00750 00853 00879 01150 01291 01435 01100 00369 00396 00397 00501 00668 00710 00882 01012 OMS Hitachi 00455 00489 00819 01250 01284 01518 Kathrein 00114 00115 00123 00173 00200 00249 01523 01525 00035 00331 00358 00442 00480 00553 00613 Hnsel amp Gretel 00132 00658 00713 00742 00818 00898 01057 Homecable 00238 01221 01561 01567 Homecast 01214 athrein Eurostar 00115 Houston 00396 00592 00668 enwood 00853 HTS 00775 01775 ey West 00132 00794 Hughes 00749 iton 00114 Hughes Network Syst lap 00668 00710 00749 olon 00421 Hughes Network Systems onig 00607 00749 01142 01442 01443 01444 01749 oscom 00834 01043 01334 01409 Humax 00863 01176 01225 01427 01568 osmos 00331 00442 Huth 00132 00243 00607 00692 00794 00829 R 00592 00613 01017 01075 reiling 00114 00249 00658 01461 01480 Hwalin 00885 reiselmeyer 00173 Hypson 00136 00417 yostar 00421 00613 Hyundai 01011 01075 01159 L amp S Electronic 00132 00369 01043 01334 iCan 01367 Labgear 01296 D Digital 01176 LaSAT 00115 00132 00157 00173 00243 00299 EE
27. 10374 10668 0036 10154 10544 10037 0009 0009 10206 0009 0171 10668 10145 10264 10817 10412 10817 10374 10053 10073 10335 10443 10163 10171 10363 10371 0072 10163 10363 10548 0070 10072 10179 10217 10492 10516 10631 10714 10236 0037 10072 10235 10238 10411 10531 10714 10808 0045 10047 OUER 10555 10072 10218 10087 10216 10320 10370 0037 10102 0163 10217 0037 10072 10217 10259 0163 10206 0179 10180 11977 10264 10412 10795 10361 10370 11756 10218 10374 10109 10548 10193 10412 10208 10087 10346 10556 10715 10163 10247 10544 11037 10072 10208 10264 10320 10370 10247 10163 10361 10217 10264 10817 10193 10560 10216 10512 10287 10102 0411 0606 0808 10208 0321 0556 10087 1027 10455 10421 10264 10179 10683 10683 10412 10238 10625 10264 10531 10346 10104 10473 10621 10216 10361 10587 10104 10370 10610 10499 10363 10186 10809 10556 14 GE GEC Geloso General General Technic Genesis Genexxa Gericom Giant Gibralter Gintai Go Video Goldfunk GoldHand GoldStar Gooding Goodmans Gorenje GPM Gradiente Graetz Gran Prix Granada Grandin Gronic Grundig Grunpy H amp B Haaz Haier Haihong PRESET CODE 10021
28. 10556 10714 11037 10363 10370 10714 11137 10217 10218 10698 10773 10320 10339 10473 10480 10287 10335 10820 10548 10826 10872 10433 10581 102957 10412 10556 10236 10443 10606 10218 10264 10157 10191 0361 10218 10217 10512 11137 10411 10418 10264 10779 10377 Panama Panashiba Panasonic Panavision Panda Pathe Cinema Pausa Peng Sheng Penney Perdio Phase Philco Philex Philips Phoenix Phonola Pilot Pioneer Pionier Plantron Playsonic Polaroid Polytron Polyvision Portland Powerpoint Prandoni Prince Premier Prima Princess Princeton Prinston 10037 10001 10037 10208 10516 11650 10037 10009 10508 10826 10163 10009 10891 10003 10032 10135 0037 10032 10486 10009 10037 10765 10282 10697 10019 10037 10361 10037 10009 10817 10698 10700 11037 0019 10056 10180 10463 10193 0000 10024 10054 10178 10238 10721 10037 0012 0019 0011 10170 10512 10217 10051 10226 10548 10411 10051 10698 10848 10216 10018 10039 10156 10072 0020 10087 10186 10628 10548 0009 10027 10056 10186 10361 10772 10087 0037 0030 0037 10287 10679 10217 10865 10697 10039 10487 10363 10264 10264 10717 10247 10264 10054 10055 10250 10361
29. Bestar BSR Burmester Bush Cairn California Audio Labs Cambridge Carrera Carver CCE CDC CEC Classic Condor Copland Crown Cyrus DAK 00123 00668 01075 00369 00123 01300 00887 00692 00114 00742 01334 00856 01173 00396 00243 30420 30018 30155 30032 30012 30156 30157 30194 30018 30437 30157 30170 30157 30157 30157 30164 30194 30420 30245 30157 30029 30157 30194 S067 30157 30420 30174 S1297 30164 30893 30122 30157 30245 00668 01412 01856 00613 00794 30234 30124 30766 30245 30303 30179 30420 30194 00832 00668 00713 00847 01214 01323 00115 00321 00331 00369 00520 00818 01075 01191 01232 01251 30157 31690 31688 30437 32 DBX Denon DKK DMX Electronics Dual Dynamic Bass EE Elektra Emerson Fisher Garrard GE Genexxa Goldmund GoldStar Goodmans GPX Grundig Harman Kardon Hitachi nkel ntegra ntersound R JVC enwood LH odak orsun Oss rell yocera LG Linn Loewe Luxman LXI agnavox Marantz ark Mark Levinson atsui Mclntosh CS Memorex eridian Micromega iro PRESET CODE 30018 30254 30003 30626 30766 30873 31234 31867 31868 30000 30157 30003 30179 30194 30437 301155 30088 30245 30009 30032 30157 30417 30245 31296 30157 30157 30032 30180 30101 30245 3000
30. are indicated on the speaker terminals on the AVR 5805Cl s rear panel e The channels for which the power amplifier can be assigned differ according to the channel settings made at Channel Setup IZ page 126 128 E Power amplifier assignment flow Determine what speaker system configuration you want a Signals are output from the speakers with priority for the MAIN ZONE channels b f Assign the power amplifier to the MAIN ZONE channels set at Channel Setup Selecting the speaker outputs freely Y Using front B t c U Select Advanced Select Adv Front B The number of free power amplifiers depends Y on the setting at b Set what channels to assign the power amplifier to X From a to c will be done automatically Decide what to output to the free power p amplifiers at c If you do not want to output anything f Select Normal Bi Amp output of Bi Amp output of Output ZONE2 Output ZONE3 Output ZONE4 Output ZONE2 3 4 MAIN ZONE front MAIN ZONE channel only channels Select Select Bi Amp Select Zone2 Select Zone3 Select Zone4 Select Bi Amp Front Zone2 3 4 129 Advanced Setup Part 1 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select
31. or V button to select Delay Time at the Zone Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Delay Time screen appears 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E Zone Setup Speaker Config 6 3 Delay Time Zone a ie Set The Distance To Channel Level Each Speakers igen Sotue Ten eee Zone3 4 Tone Ch Le In Meters In Feet xit Meters 4 gt Feet Press the CURSOR lt or button to select the desired unit Meters or Feet e The Delay Time screen appears automatically Example When Feet is selected r 6 3 Delay Time Zone 2 Set The Distance To Each Speakers Do You Prefer In Meters In Feet Meters 4 BAA 6 3 Delay Time Zone 2 Step 4 Pe gt GE Default Te 6 3 Delay Time Zone 2 COO Di ZE E TA SL 4 10 Oft Gi 12 0 GER SR 10 Oft gt c 12 0 gO 8 sw 12 0 D Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the speaker to be set 121 Advanced Setup Part 1 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to set the distance between the center speaker and listening position Example When the distance is set to 10 0 feet for the center speaker 6 3 Delay Time Zone 2 Step 4 1ft gt E Default Yes 4 au eb FL 12 Oft FR 12 Oft D LC 4 10 Of
32. s own volume control e When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode the channel level adjustments made will affect all surround modes for ZONE2 e After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments you can then activate the individual surround modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes Then whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within each surround mode IG page 95 96 e You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes for ZONE2 STEREO STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND 5 7 CH STEREO WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME MATRIX and VIRTUAL Setting the Crossover Frequency for ZONE2 e Set the frequency in Hz below which deep bass appearing in the main channels will be routed to the ZONE2 subwoofer 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Crossover Frequency at the Zone Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Crossover Frequency screen appears Zone Setup 6 5 Crossover Frequency Zone 2 ELI Variable YA 80Hz 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Mode 3 Delay Time 4 Channel Level g5 Crossover Frequenc 6 7 E Video Setup
33. screen appears on the on screen display Tuner Preset Stations ATF 87 5 0MHz A2FM 89 TOM A3FM 98 TOM A4FM107 90MHz A5FM 90 10MHz A6FM 90 10MHz ATM 90 10MHz A8FM 90 10MHz Recalling preset stations E Recalling preset stations from the remote control unit Press the MEMORY BLOCK A to G button to select the memory block A to G Watching the display press the CHANNEL button or NUMBER 1 to 8 button to select the desired preset channel E Recalling preset stations from the main unit s panel 7 Press the TUNING PRESET button Turn the FUNCTION knob and select the desired preset channel e RDS works only on the FM band is a broadcasting service which allows station to send additional information along with the regular radio program signal e The following three types of RDS information can be received on this unit NOTE e The operations described below pressing the RDS SEARCH button will not function in areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts E Program Type PTY e PTY identifies the type of RDS program e The program types and their displays are as follows E Traffic Program TP e TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements e This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area before you leaving home E Radio Text RT e RT allows the RDS station to send text messages that appear on the display
34. 00607 00515 01775 00369 00711 00675 00455 01194 01083 01170 01505 01205 01537 00269 00713 01170 01505 00421 00710 00421 00417 00863 00607 00132 00818 00613 00605 01291 00573 01293 BUI Om ES 01775 01283 01637 00280 00396 00454 00775 00853 00871 01200 01323 01409 01775 00501 00692 00713 00713 00882 00885 00243 00299 00369 00880 00898 00668 00713 27 Foxtel Fracarro Freecom Freesat Fresat FTEmaximal Fuba Fugionkyo Galaxis Galaxisat Gardiner Garnet GbSAT GE Gecco General Instrument GF GF Star Globo GOD Digital GOI Gold Box Goldbox Golden Interstar Goldvision Gooding Goodmans Gradiente Granada Grandin Grocos Grundig Hanseatic Hantor Hanuri Hauppauge HB HDT Helium Hinari Hirschmann Hisense PRESET CODE 00455 01176 00421 00173 00882 00885 00331 01449 00115 00421 01105 00115 00863 00321 00818 01075 01214 00566 Ol273 00869 00834 01043 01087 00200 00775 00853 00292 01283 01017 00571 00455 00099 00455 00084 00243 00173 00805 01330 00605 00421 00520 01294 01214 01011 00607 00421 00173 00573 01085 01535 00497 01356 00668 00421 00369 00173 00573 00369 00879 01412 01043 01251
35. 100 8 Multi Zone power indicators 111122 94 Input source indicators 2 00 00 cece 44 En MultEO XT indicator 2 0 0 0 ceseeeeeseees 48 STANDARD button 54 HOME THX CINEMA button 44 9CH STEREO button 62 DSP SIMULATION button 62 SYSTEM SETUP button 22 CH SELECT ENTER button 22 64 11 Getting Started SURROUND PARAMETER button 50 CINEMA button 56 MUSIC button 56 D GAME button 56 ROOM EQ button 48 PURE DIRECT button 50 VIDEO SELECT button 46 DIRECT STEREO button 50 MONITOR SELECT button 45 E INPUT MODE button 47 D SCALE button 45 E ANALOG button 47 DIMMER button 46 EXT IN button 47 VIDEO ON OFF button 46 CURSOR buttons n 22 MODE button 65 TONE CONTROL button 63 BAND button 65 TONE DEFEAT button 63 MEMORY button 66 SURROUND SPEAKER button 45 TUNING buttons ooo n 65 SURROUND BACK button 52 STATUS button 46 Gett ing Started Display TUNED STEREO AUTO RDS AUTO ANALOG Input signal indicator The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal Input signal channel indicator The channels included in the input source will light This lights when the digital signal is input Information display This displays the surround m
36. 10037 10412 10487 10218 10235 10714 10208 10264 10706 10748 10037 10217 10218 10264 10282 11156 11170 10030 10032 0056 0145 0178 0359 0481 0548 0744 10044 10109 10165 10356 10480 10516 Ovals 11145 11481 1 1576 10499 10828 15 Home Electronics Hongmei Hongyan Hornyphon Hoshai Hua Tun Huafa Huanghaimei Huanghe Huanglong Huangshan Huanyu Huaqgiang Huari Huodateji Hyper Hypson Hyundai beria CE Ces mperial mperial Crown ndiana nfinity nFocus ngelen ngersoll nno Hit nnova nnowert nteq nterbuy nterfunk nternal ntervision PRESET CODE 10606 10009 10264 10012 10282 10009 10009 10009 10009 10009 10009 10216 10264 10145 10051 10009 0037 10668 0037 10037 0216 10216 0037 10630 0001 10037 10054 10752 10163 10009 10009 10282 10037 10865 10017 10037 0012 10275 10037 0009 10247 10455 0011 10045 10102 10157 10200 10238 10320 10374 10093 10412 10037 10145 10817 10264 10264 10412 10264 10216 10264 10714 10698 10217 11028 10163 10009 10361 10037 10290 10247 10037 10361 10037 0264 0486 10012 10070 10104 10163 10206 10247 10356 10512 10264 10817 10848 10817 10412 10374 10412 10217 10282 10715 10706 10218
37. 10037 10753 10668 10037 10217 10037 10208 10037 10011 10102 10170 11505 10374 10179 10037 10051 10032 10418 10706 10516 10146 10157 T0525 10361 10648 10179 10361 10102 10163 10435 10548 10706 10773 10177 10206 10264 10696 10805 10817 10072 10163 10339 10370 10282 10282 10361 10370 10036 10037 10111 10145 10250 10353 11651 10180 10186 10320 10418 10060 10092 n OND IOI 10455 10715 10335 10362 10698 10706 10235 10516 10698 10727 10825 10361 10548 10548 10053 10080 POS 10158 10650 10834 10715 10156 10178 21 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S SS Stag aksonic andard arlite enway ern rato udio Experience unic Line unkai unstar unwood uperla uperscan upersonic uperTech upervision upra upre Macy upreme usumu VA vasa wissline ylvania ymphonic ynco ysline ytong T A Tacico Tai Yi Taishan Tandberg Tandy Targa Tashiko Tatung TCL CM PRESET CODE 10019 10032 10009 10009 11037 10009 10218 10163 10009 10843 10037 10037 10610 10009 10037 10516 10864 10009 10805 10009 10264 10009 10046 10000 10218 10587 10871 10455 10247 10020 10171 10000 10451 10037 10216 10447 10009 10
38. 10216 10320 10337 10463 10412 10698 10773 10779 10817 10650 10769 10833 10839 10455 10216 10217 10218 10247 10421 10363 10092 10178 10463 10779 CABLE ABC ADB Aichi Denshi Alcatel Allegro Americast Amstrad Antronix Archer Auna Austar Bell amp Howell Bell South 00003 00017 01063 01512 00896 00153 00899 01222 00022 00022 00277 00012 00014 00899 00237 01269 00315 00153 00797 01269 00276 Birmingham Cable Communications British Telecom Cable amp Wireless Cabletenna Cabletime Cableview Canal Plus Century Citizen Clearmaster ClearMax Comcrypt Comtronics Contec Coolmax Cryptovision Daeryung Digeo Digi Director Dumont DX Antenna Eastern Emerson Everquest Filmnet Focus Foxtel France Telecom Freebox Fujitsu Funai Galaxi Garrard 00276 00003 01068 00022 00448 00022 00443 00153 00153 00883 00883 00443 00040 00019 00883 00600 00008 01187 00637 00476 00637 01500 00002 00797 00015 00443 00400 01222 00451 01482 01497 00019 00008 00153 00665 00315 00277 00477 00877 01877 00040 00619 00817 00896 00007 00008 00011 00013 00014 24 GE Gehua Gemini General Instrument GMI Golden Channel GoldStar Goodmind Hamlin Hitachi HyperVision Hytex i3 Micro Jasco Jebsee Jerrold KNC Leon LG acab Magnavox aspro Memorex NET Moser
39. 10650 10036 10157 10217 10362 10480 10618 10885 10264 10363 10217 10018 10030 10060 10156 10186 10320 11037 10037 10163 10247 10370 10492 10631 10070 0170 0264 0411 0512 0668 10668 11037 10653 11755 10320 10418 10356 10418 10019 10020 10047 10051 10080 10096 10165 10166 10187 10866 10394 10579 23 Weipai Welltech Weltblick Westinghouse Weston Wharfedale White Westinghouse Windsor Windstar Windy Sam Wintel World of Vision Worldview Xenius Xiahua Xianghai Xiangyang Xiangyu Xihu Xinaghai Xingfu Xinghai Xinrisong XLogic XMS Xoceco Xrypton Xuelian Yamaha Yamishi Yapshe Yingge Yokan Yoko Yongbao Yonggu Yoshita Youlanasi Yousida Yuhang Zanela Zanussi Zenith Zenor ZhuHa Zonda ZX PRESET CODE 10009 10714 10217 10003 10037 10037 10037 10623 11037 10282 10556 10714 10880 10455 10634 10009 10817 10009 10264 10009 10264 10412 10009 10264 10848 10698 10698 10779 10037 10848 10019 10217 10250 10009 10037 10009 10264 10848 10009 10706 10817 10009 10009 10238 10206 10016 10208 10009 10003 10418 10320 10889 10264 10186 10337 10661 10264 10412 10412 10785 10030 10282 10109 10037 10339 10848 10264 10017 10339 10374 10698 10556 10706 10861
40. C SL A SR A SL B SR B SBL SBR Z2 L Z2 R Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R ONO L FR C SL A SR A SL B SR B SBL SBR Z2 M Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R 7 1CH 7 1CH L FR C SLA SRA SBL SBR 22 FL Z2 FR Z2 C 22 SL Z2 SR 22 SBL Z2 SBR Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L ZAR 5 1CH L FR C SLA SR A SBL SBR 22 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 SR Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R STEREO L FR C SL A SR A SBL SBR Z2 L Z2 R Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R ONO L FR C SL A SR A SBL SBR Z2 M Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R 5 1 CH 7 1CH L FR C SLA SRA Z2 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 SR Z2 SBL Z2 SBR Z3 L Z3 R Z4L Z4R 5 1C L FR C SLA SR A Z2 FL 22 FR 22 C Z2 SL 72 SR Z3 L Z3 R Za Z4 R STEREO L FR C SLA SRA Z2L 22 R 23 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R ONO L FR C SLA SRA Z2 M Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R e Amp Assign mode Adv Front B Channel Setup KEE SE ASSIGNABLE CHANNEL 9 1 CH SICH LA FR A FL B FR B C SL A SR A SLB SR B SBL SBR Z2 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 SR Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R STEREO LA FRA FL B FR B C SL A SR A SL B SR B SBL SBR Z2 L Z2 R Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R MONO LA FR A FL B FR B C SLA SR A SL B SR B SBL SBR Z2 M Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R 7 LECH 7 1CH LA FRA FL B FRB C SLA SRA SBL SBR Z2 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 SR Z2 SBL Z2 SBR Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R SICH LA FRA FL B FRB C SLA SRA SBL SBR Z2 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 S
41. ENTER P CURSOR SURROUND O S gt PARAMETER Tone control setting e Use the tone control setting to adjust the bass and treble as desired e The tone control function will not work in the PURE DIRECT DIRECT or Home THX Cinema mode E Adjusting the tone from the remote control unit Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears FROOM SIZE 4med ium EFFECT410 ROCK ARENA m al TONE 4 SB CH OUT N vor Default Yes4 mag De h X The screen selected surround mode appears Press the CURSOR or V button to select TONE ROCK ARENA ROOM SIZE u 4medium gt EFFECT410 gt Su 7 D a SB CH_OUT 4 48S ON gt OFF Default Yes4 Press the CURSOR lt button e Switch to the Total Control screen a Total Control N OFF Tone Defeat Press the CURSOR gt button to select Tone Defeat OFF Total Control Gm TET Ta Tone Defeat n gt Conter aa ae ee SCH ZE Surround A ee e e 1 taa Surround B E We Windividual Contro Treble 408 SurroundBack Bass Treble 408 Subwoofer Bass 608 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Bass or Treble Press the CURSOR lt i or gt bu
42. FULL his sets the volume level upon switching on Volume 3 the power of each zone 134 Control Mute Level ni This sets the amount of attenuation of the Zone3 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev FULL audio output when each zone is muted Volume Level This sets whether the output level of ZONE2 Zone4 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev FULL to 4 is fixed or variable ZONE MAIN All Surround Modes ON Trigger uwen phono co C2R ovo vop Tv oes ver 1 vcr 2 ver 3 ver 4 vaux Aux Out 1 TAPE OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ZONE 2 br TUNER PHONO CD Go DVD vop Tv ops veR 1 vcr 2 vcR 3 vcR 4 VAUX Aux This sets the Trigger Out output for the 4 Trigger Out different input sources ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 135 Setup If ZONE MAIN is selected settings can be ZONE 3 made for the individual surround modes Ti a rigger p i i R H Out 3 TUNER PHONO CD TAPE DVD VD TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VCR 4 V AUX ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ZONE 4 Trigger CDR Out 4 TUNER PHONO CD TAPE DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VCR 4 VAUX ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ZONE MAIN AC 5 AC Outlet This sets the AC outlet to on or off for the ougier runer pHono co 28 o vor tv oes ver 1 ver 2 ver 3 ver a vau
43. K et Power amplifier o gt SE 10 gt A R Advanced Operation ZONEA playback e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with pre out terminals for which the volume is adjustable as the ZONE4 output terminals E ZONE4 STEREO MONO system e Stereo and monaural sound can be enjoyed in ZONE4 By default STEREO is selected e When only one speaker is being used in ZONE4 select MONO for the ZONE4 channel setting at Channel Setup in the System Setup Menu MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable MAIN ZONE 9 1 channel system ZONE4 STEREO MONO system Monitor FL DVD player AVR 5805Cl Power amplifier ZONE4 AUDIO OUT lt 7 VARIABLE OUT sl AN SYSTEM REMOTE LY CONTROL UNIT RC 1036 SL SB SB B L R Power amplifier Al 40 gt w cht R 92 FUNCTION ZONE3 4 REC SELECT SE ZONE2 SELECT Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc in a ZONE2 room ZONE2 SELECT mode Press the ZONE2 SELECT button to display the ZONE2 SOURCE on the display Turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source you want to output appears on the display Start playing the source to be output Xx For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the respective components 93 Advanced Operation Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc in a ZONE3 or ZONE4 room ZONE3 ZONE4 SELECT mode 1 Pr
44. LEAD IN WIRE ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT NEC SECTION 810 20 ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT is gt lt GROUNDING CONDUCTORS NEC SECTION 810 21 Gei Ge GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING Z ELECTRODE SYSTEM NEC ART 250 PART H NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the product Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up static charges Article 810 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit size of grounding conductors location of antenna discharge unit connection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding electrode See Figure A Lightning For added protection for this product during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable
45. Mute Lev 4 FULL Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAS Mute Lev 4 FUL Main Zone2 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAS Mute Lev 4 FUL Zone4 Vol Lev lt 4 VAR gt Vol Limit4 OFF gt P On Lev LAST gt Mute Lev 4 FULL Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired setting then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the parameter Volume Limit Set the upper limit for the volume for the different zones e 20 dB 10 dB 0 dB The volume cannot be increased above the selected levels e OFF If you do not want to set a volume limit select OIF In this case the volume can be set to the AVR 5805Cl s maximum volume output level of 18 dB which is extremely loud Power On Level Set the volume that is set when the power is turned on for the different zones You can adjust the volume level within the range of 80 to 18 dB in steps of 1 0 cB e Mute The volume is always muted when the power is turned on e LAST The volume set when the AVR 5805CI1 was last used is stored in the memory and set when the power is turned on Mute Level Set the volume attenuation level when the mute mode is set for the different zones e FULL The volume is fully muted e 40 dB The volume is lowered 40 dB from the current level e 20 dB The volume is lowered 20 dB from the current level Volume Level Set whether to
46. O gP 0 O O x x 440 0 x I 91901 Odd 49100 x x VWANID O EALON O aP 0 O O x x 440 O Q XI 01901 OHd 49100 x x x x x Q NO O aP 0 O x CO 4919 VAWANIO XHL 3WOH x x O KO x x O x x x CO 497Z VAIANIO XHL JWOH OL NO O x x 440 O gP 0 O x gP 0 O 440 O O N3349S8 JAIM x x x x dP 0 O O NO O aP 0 O x O NI H IIN x x x x x x ya x x CO NI 1X4 x x x x aP 0 O x x ap 0 O 440 O x x x O 03 431S x x x x x NO O aP 0 O x 1938410 HO ILINW x x x x x O x gap 0 O x O 193419 IANN asa x x x x x x x aP 0 O x x X x 2010 Oe x x x x x x x AP 0 O 440 x x x O 193 41q 193410 2074 13447 ER 3q0003q 04 TOYLNOOD AG0W Cx Cx Lx YJ400M YA OVE YA DIN un INOS 193333 WOO JGOW VINANIO AJNOL 1NO HO 9S Wdav 331 dn 0 ANS GNNOYYNS GNNOYENS sesayjuaed u UMOYS 31e S NJLA jjNeyap Ja oWWeIeY yndjno j uueyo sapow Jusjajjip y U Ayigeysnipe pue sjeubis apo punong si9 awWeied pue sapow punong 168 Additional Information Bumes uoleinByuoo sexeeds Aq zo 10 UO pauni e aigeisnipe 40N eubls ON x aiqeisnipy ups O x Ba x Be x fe x Bae X lt Ba X lt Ba AY Be XX Be E E E ES GO Eg RS ES RS ECKE ES RG Rd RGO x X Bae E xX Ba E E XxX Es So op pa WA Ba Ka Es x x Bee E E E XB XX E
47. Part 1 Audio Input Setup e Make the audio related settings Setting the Digital In Assignment e This assigns the digital input terminals for the different input sources 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Audio Input Setup at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e The Audio Input Setup menu appears System Setup Menu 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 6 7 E 3 Audio Input Setup D Digital EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Fl In Assign 2 3 4 Function Rename 5 6 7 E Advanced Playback Zone Setup Option Setup xit EEE1394 Assign EEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Digital In Assign then press the ENTER button e The Digital In Assign screen appears 3 1 Digital In Assign CD uu Tare OPTS DVD COAX2 vAu OPT6 VDP COAX3 DI COAX4 DBS COAK5 WI OPTI VCR 2 OPT2 VCR 3 OPT3 VCR 4 OPT4 De fau l tel 3 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the digital input terminal X Select from among COAX 1 to 6 OPT 1 to 5 x If the same digital input terminal is selected the setting for the input source that was previously assig
48. Please place microphons at ear height at main listening positio Channel Setup Extra Setup Channel 9 1CH Start Cancel Power Amp Assign Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to choose the setting you want to change then press the ENTER button e Switch to the setting screen Xx For instructions on making the Channel Setup settings IS page 126 128 Xx For instructions on making the Power Amp Assign settings ES page 129 133 x The speakers measured with this Auto Setup procedure are based on the setting of these Channel Setup and Power Amp Assign functions 3 Once the settings are completed press the ENTER button at the each setting screen e The Extra Setup screen reappears 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e Return to the Auto Setup screen e This procedure is used to automatically determine the background noise whether or not speakers are connected and the polarities of the connected speakers e To avoid affecting the measurements turn off the air conditioner or any other device that makes noise and take the measurements with the room as quiet as possible Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Start then press the CURSOR lt button e Start the preliminary measurements 1 1 Auto Setup ei 1 1 Auto Setup Measuring Speaker Detect Please place micropho
49. S10 Cx VWANIO Xd SLO 2 96 SLO GNNOYENS SLA Lx VOXYLA S3 SLO Lx V9140Sd S3 SLO GNNOUYNS SL GYVONVLS KHI 9 04N XHL Id 49100 XHL 0 Wd Vx XHL 0 XM Up XH a apow sawed yH Cx Spo ASNN XHL Cx ewau g ZEIN XHL Lx X3 GNNOYYNS XHL Le XHL L9XUL SF D z oo x x oo x x x z z xX x x xX x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Si DD BP e E CH RE el ES x Ba x Ea oR on YA o x Ed ba ba Ba Ba x E E OR Of OF O x Ed x Ba OF on OF o x Ed x Ed ba Ba Ba x zx Be Es LI Cat Of O x E x Ed x E x Ei xX Ba x x ES x a x WA xX Be x x Bea lt ES BX Ei XB x ra ka Ba ka El x x Ea x Ba Of Of Of O xX Ba x Ba OR Of OF O Of Cf x Ba x E x Ba x O OOx X X XK X X Xx o 6i o bei x Ba x E x Be x OO oO O he CH he CH DO E a o fal x o Ry ow OF x 3 x Ed x Ei x E E O x Ba x Ei x Ei x Ed x x E x Ed x Ei x Ei C x Ba x Ed x ES Ei O x Ba x ea x ee Be x x a x Ei x Ed xo x Ba x Ei x Ed Ei x x Ed x Ei x ee Ei x x Ba x Ei x Ed x Ed x x Ba x Ed x E E x xX XX OO00xX x xX WO OO x Si CO E O ei lt Ba x CO x Ei x Ei x Ei BO x E x Ei x Ei Ya P Ee dax Ei CO Ka CO ent C ai e X et Cal O ei CO E x E S i E PO Pa Om Of axi X EC ECO SC Kei xa X e O alc ei CO E E aX Ba PaO ECO A e X Dei O ail O ei CO E x E Sa x ai O ail O SO E x E Si x CO ail O ei CO E E Si X ECO ail WI Ba x E SC ECO US
50. Salsa Sambers Sampo Samsung Samsux Sandra Sanjian Sansei Sansui Santon 10163 10037 10185 10037 10264 10009 10668 10087 10036 10009 10587 10163 10418 10335 10017 10817 10087 10361 10714 10238 10455 10009 10009 10374 10037 10163 10455 10163 10361 10606 10335 10102 10009 10092 10700 10009 10056 10154 10208 10370 10682 10814 10039 10216 10264 10451 10037 10587 10727 10009 10206 10072 10216 10418 10037 10714 10037 10698 10825 10412 10030 10109 10498 10610 10817 10011 10516 10668 10194 10363 10621 10516 10030 10093 10721 10019 10060 10156 10216 10482 10702 10817 10217 10412 10264 10602 10729 10698 10773 11037 10497 10603 10544 10556 10712 11037 10631 1755 10072 10163 10217 10556 10718 10821 11060 10371 10412 10655 10698 10861 11537 10259 10264 10087 10264 10218 10264 10216 10217 10712 10748 10163 10250 10516 10548 10177 10217 10208 10290 10473 10480 10032 10036 0154 10171 10030 10032 10090 10178 10226 10587 10766 10363 10370 10411 10428 10282 10264 10817 10287 10560 10235 10356 10516 10039 10178 10037 10455 10463 10706 10714 10418 10556 10335 10625
51. Se kungia Jeemellet THULE OM eran nse a 84 VISTAS Me Geen CEI WIM CUO sc scesaeceocencerancenactsoncresnacnoas aaceaaceaseser 84 el Eeler AWA 85 e Operating Seine WAS UE NAA ele 85 Se tungithe baekilig wasili hitiin gia ma AAA 85 Settima the e ME 85 Reseitingitne remote contro E LU Multi zone music entertainment system MONEZI IEM EE ee ZONES Olay bac EE ZONE TE Te EE Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc ina ZONEZTOOMIZONEZ SEIECMMOdE 93 Outputting a program source to an amplifier etc in a ZONE3 or ZONE4 room ZONE3 ZONE4 SELECT mode 93 Video Setup Setting the HDMI DVI In Aesignment as ales Setting the Component In Aesionmert a 12 Se ttingithe Vide Co ne nta Modem E 112 Setting the HDMI Component Out Setup WG WA Settingitne Audio Delay na r 14 Settingithe On screen Displayal SD AE 15 Advanced Playback Stitinye tne Derm DYES SHENEL sue Setting the Dolby Digital Setup Setting ther AUtOrs UMOUMG wireless V7 SettingutnenviamUa EOS tt Opes eee et ener 118 119 e Procedure for copying the Flat correction Curve 11s Zone Setup ZONE2 5 1 7 1ch Setting the type of speakers for ZONE 120 Setting the low frequency distribution for ZONE 120 Sie lte wave DEIN UNAS HOP OIE m Za Setting the Channel Level for ZONE 122 NZI Setting the Crossover Frequency for ZONE 123 Setting the Video Setup for ZONE2 O Vip maanani lege Clesse 123 eA HEEN 124 Setting the ZO
52. Video Setup Video Setup Default settings Page The HDMI or DVI D input terminals are assigned for the pyp VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VCR 4 VAUX HDMI DVI In different input sources 111 112 Assignment Select HDMI or DVI D for the monitor output terminal Select the HDMI audio signal playback method NONE NONE NONE NONE I NONE NONE VE NONE NONE Component In This assigns the color difference component video input DVD VDP Tv DBS VCR1 VCR2 VCR3 VCR4 VAUX 112 Assignment terminals for the different input sources 1 RCA 2 RCA 3 RCA 4RCA 5 RCA 6 BNC NONE NONE NONE Video Convert This sets whether or not to use the video conversion ON 112 Mode function HDMI Component Set the format of the signal up converted to the HDMI Convert ON Scaler HDMI Aspect Full Resolution 480p 576p 113 114 Out monitor output or component video output terminal Color Space Y Cb Cr RGB Made Normal S Audio Delay Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and Oms 114 video This sets whether or not to display the on screen displa On Screen that appears on the monitor GE W the Ge Function Mode ON Master Volume ON iRadio mServer Always XM Always 115 Display pp Screensaver ON Display Mode Mode 1 the remote control unit or main unit are operated 154 Advanced Playback Advanced Setup Part 2
53. a oO g x Bea x Ea X E E ECO BX BX Exp xE E O x Bey x YA WA A ES o X Ba x YA Ya x BX x Aa Aa YA E x 98S 08 O x pa x Saa Ba xX ES SS Be xX Be OX eX Ka XB xE cee u o og iS Of Cm COE CO e O00000000 OO DC IC o xo ES LL OO D m oo AAA aaa BR RR D x xO 440 O WALYIA KIHIV AWVS OJIA AIAOW ONO LYSAODNOD SISSV19 ano Zzvr VNAYV J904 WNIGVLS Y3dNS CEES ROG aNNOYYNS SLA TWALISIG 49100 9 03N SLC JI 31901 Od 49100 XI 01901 Od Ad 10d 4919 VWANANIO XHL JWOH 497 vu 2ND XHL JWOH N3349S8 JAIM NI HO ILIN NI 1X3 03431S MORe HO IL1N 2010 IANN asa 193410 GSd 10341q 193410 29004 LIV MS ADVI 431N39 HIGIM 431N39 NOISN3WIG VNYHONYd Ajuo NI 1X3 Ajuo 4QON GT 9 03N Ajuo 200 SISNW XII 91907 Od 440 NO YaSOOMENS AWIL Av OO apow LHIIN leu51g Agjod sesayjuaied u UMOYS 9Je S NJLA YNLJ p JaeyoWeIeY sapow Jusen y U Alijigeisnipe pue sjeubis po punong 169 x x x x x x x x x x x Lx ISAN Xd NIAN Cx VWANIO Xd NI LLIN IHI UI HO LONN 31901 Od 49100 3WV9 TI 31901 Odd 49100 JISNW H 31901 Odd 49100 VIN3NIJ TI 31901 Odd 49100 JWY9 XI 31901 Oud 49100 JISNW YI 31901 Otd 491 VIN3NIJ XU 91901 Od A0 bx JISNAN XI lr WU A91 Cx VINANIO XM d IVLISIG AGT WASIG A91 X3 RUDI 491 aNNOYYNS IST 9 03N SL VWANIO 9 03N SL D 9 03N SI BEIM IR
54. and the surround settings is output in sequence E Front panel display Press the STATUS button Xx Descriptions of the unit s operations are also displayed on the front panel display In addition the display can be switched to check the unit s operating status while playing a source E Using the dimmer function e Use this to change the brightness of the display Press the DIMMER button X The display brightness changes in four steps bright medium dim and off Input mode e The AVR 5805Cl has an AUTO signal detection mode that automatically identifies the type of incoming audio signals but is also equipped with a manual mode that can be switched according to the type of input audio signals 46 INPUT MODE CURSOR SURROUND PARAMETER ON SCREEN E Selecting the AUTO PCM and DTS modes Press the INPUT MODE button Xx The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT MODE button on the main unit is pressed AUIO POM DIS When operating the remote control unit Remote control unit Xx The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit is pressed AUTO PAM DIS EXT IN 2 EXT IN 1 ANALOG za AUTO All auto mode In this mode the types of signals being input to the digital and analog input terminals for the selected input source are detected and the program in the AVR 5805Cl s surr
55. e Select CINEMA mode for movie surround soundtracks MUSIC for music sources and GAME for 2 channel game box audio sources e Though we recommend selecting the surround mode as described above other surround modes can also be selected WIDE SCREEN IGS page 61 62 e Effective for 2 channel sources recorded in Dolby Surround or for 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources HOME THX CINEMA THX 5 1 IE page 51 e This mode is optimized for playing 5 1 channel movies e For sources recorded in Dolby Surround as well this mode provides the same power as with 5 1 channel sources DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx 2 DTS SURROUND DTS 96 24 DTS PLIIx 2 DTS NEO 6 IGE page 54 55 e This mode is optimized for playing 5 1 channel or 7 1 channel music e For Dolby Surround recording sources Dolby Pro Logic II playback is conducted 49 NOTE e Surround modes indicated with an asterisk 1 require the use of two surround back speakers e Surround modes marked with an asterisk 2 cannot be used when the surround back speaker is set to NONE e The PLIIx Cinema mode cannot be selected when only one surround back speaker is being used Basic Operation HOME THX CINEMA SURROUND PARAMETER PURE DIRECT CURSOR STATUS CZ DIRECT STEREO ENTER SURROUND BACK Playing audio sources CDs and DVDs 2 channel playback
56. fs 48kHz fs 48kHz FORMAT 3 2 1 FORMAT 3 3 1 OFFSET 4dB FLAG DISCRETE O O ie NOTE e OSD 2 The monitor s resolution is displayed when an HDMI monitor is connected to the AVR 5805Cl e OSD 4 This is displayed when the auto surround mode is set to ONT IF page 117 and the input mode is set to AUTO It is not displayed when the input mode is set to ANALOG or EXT IN Basic Operation E Surround parameters MODE SB CH OUT AFDM Auto Flag Detect Mode e ON Select the surround back channel playback method or mode 1 Multi channel source THX Surround EX Dolby Digital signals are played in the THX Surround EX mode Ultra2 Cinema The signals are played in the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode Music Mode The signals are played in the T Games Mode The signals are played in the T NON MTRX The same signals as those of the surround channels are output from the surround back channels MTRX ON The surround channel signals undergo digital matrix processing and are output from the surround back channels SB OFF OFF No signal is played from the surround back channels ES MTRX When playing DTS signals the surround back signals undergo digital matrix processing for playback ES DSCRT When a signal identifying the source as a discrete 6 1 channel source is included in the DTS signals the X Music mode X Games mode This function only
57. on behalf of Secure Content Owners 167 Additional Information do olpny Jedng pue olpny QAq SLA Eu O Aqiog Bulkejd usu Zy sjeuBls S1q pue eu Aqjog Bured USUM 1 WM 40 VINANID 01 18S S JAQON 84 USM agellene si Jojowejed SIUL YJ LON VWAANID 01198 S JAQON 94 UayM agejiene si Jejetueled su JLON gp vt 319341 AP 9 SSVA ZILON gP 0 3193841 GP 9 SSv8 LILON Humes uoleinByuoo sexeeds Aq zo 10 uo pauni e jqeunN x ajqeisnipe Jon jeuBis ON x IO O aiqeisnipy jeuBls O x x x A ap 0 O x x ap 0 O 440 O x x X ei TWOLYIA x x x x gP 0 O O x aP 0 O 440 O O KIHIVI 01 O unipaN O x x aP 0 O O x aP 0 O 440 0 g AWVS OJIA 01 O unipe O x x gP 0 O O x aP 0 O 440 0 O AIAOW ONO OL 0 wnIpaN O x x aP 0 O O x ap 0 O 440 O CO LYADNOD OISSV19 01 O wnIpanN O x x gP 0 O O x aP 0 O 440 O O anid ZZvr OL O wnipaN O x x ILON O Q x ap 0 O 440 O Q VAN J904 01 0 WIPE O x x LILON O CO x aP 0 O 440 0 O WNIGVIS Y3dNS x x x x ap 0 O x ap 0 O 440 0 CO OH HG x x x 440 O aP 0 O O NO O aP 0 O 440 O CO aNNOYYNS SLO x x 440 O aP 0 O NO O aP 0 O 440 O g WLIDIG 49104A x x VWANID O EALON O aP 0 O CO x x 440 O O 9 03N SLO x x WAANID ILON
58. panel of the unit x The optional standard microphone is DENON DM S305 sold separately x When using other microphone CS page 150 151 Easy Setup and Operation AMP SYSTEM SETUP CT CURSOR ENTER When placing the microphone adjust the height so that the microphone s sound receptor is at the height of the ears of the listener Xx Be sure that at the beginning the measurement is started with the microphone set up at the main listening position It is not possible to measure properly if there are any obstacles between the speakers and microphone Check that there are no obstacles x Please do not stand between or near the speakers and the microphone during the measurements NOTE e Do not disconnect the microphone until the settings are completed e Do not change the connection of speakers or the subwoofer s volume after performing these measurements Mount the auto setup microphone onto a camera tripod etc and place it at ear height at the main listening position in the listening room with the sound receptor facing the ceiling Easy Setup and Operation Turning on the power Starting Auto Setup 1 X L M S Turn on your subwoofer Set the volume to halfway and set the crossover freguency to the makimum or Low pass filter off if your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover freguency Some subwoofers have a standby mode Be
59. small taking multiple measurements at or near the listening positions makes it possible to correct the sound more effectively Example The AVR 5805Cl s Room EO function offers three correction curves Audyssey Front and Flat These can be selected after performing the auto setup procedure Details of the different correction curves are described below e Audyssey This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics e Front This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers e Flat Makes the frequency response for all the speakers flat This is suitable for multi channel music reproduction from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5 1 DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD e To make the Speaker system settings without using the Auto Setup function IGS page 140 148 20 E About the main listening position M e The main listening position is the point where a listener sits most often or the listening position when only one person is listening Measurements on the AVR 5805Cl start from this point Correction for the speaker distance Delay Time is set based on this point Example Example 2 Si ON STANDBY POWER SYSTEM SETUP CURSOR ENTER SETUP MIC Connecting a microphone Connect the optional microphone for Auto Setup to the SETUP MIC jack on the front
60. speakers gt Surround back speakers As seen from above Surround speaker Surround back speaker fc Point slightly Front speaker IL ie downwards Pa 2 to 3 feet As seen from the side Additional Information e Set the front speakers center speaker and subwoofer in the same positions as in example It is best to place the surround speakers directly at the side or slightly to the front of the viewing position and 2 to 3 feet 60 to 90 centimeters above the ears Same as surround back speaker installation method Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 5805CI and set settings on the setup menu to A This is the factory default setting 1257 page 153 e The signals from the surround channels reflect off the walls as shown on the diagram at the left creating an enveloping and realistic surround sound presentation For multi channel music sources however the use of bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position may not be satisfactory in order to create a coherent 360 degree surround sound field Connect another pair of direct radiating speakers as described in example and place them at the rear corners of the room facing towards the prime listening position 3 When using different surround speakers for movies and music To achieve more effective surround sound for both movies and music use different sets of surround spea
61. the height of your ear when sitting Microphone Amplifier Gain Setting using Sound Level Meter and RMS Volt Meter First you will need to adjust the microphone amplifier gain 1 Connect the all speakers and the video monitor for the on screen display with the AVR 5805Cl 2 Connect the microphone with the microphone amplifier 3 Turn on the AVR 5805CI and the microphone amplifier 4 Turn on the Phantom Supply on the microphone amplifier 5 Set the Parameter Test Tone to Manual and Test Tone Start to Yes at Channel Level IGS page 143 145 6 Once the test tone for Front Left FL speaker starts check the Sound Pressure Level at the Listening Position with an SPL Meter You do not have to check any of the other channels 7 Adjust the Main Volume so that the Sound Pressure Level measures 80 dB C weighted 8 Once the Main Volume as been set connect the output of microphone amplifier to the RMS Volt Meter 9 Adjust the microphone amplifier s gain as the RMS Volt Meter becomes about 120 mV RMS 10 Once set exit out of System Setup and turn off the AVR 5805Cl 11 Connect the output of the microphone amplifier to the AVR 5805Cl s front panel V AUX Left channel audio input located behind Trap Door 12 Change the setting to V AUX L at Mic Input Select 13 Start Auto Setup IG page 20 26 150
62. 0 dB in 0 5 dB step Manual EQ Front L R 63Hz 0 0d gt 125Hz 0 oa 250Hz 0 04 pont 0 D 1kHz 0 04 2kHz 0 OW AkHz 0 o Ski 0 o 16kHz 0 08 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Manual EO screen reappears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Advanced Playback menu reappears 5 4 Manual EQ Default Yes4 Base Curve Copy Adjust CH 4L R CH gt U Exit J Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears 5 Advanced Playback 1 2ch Direct Stereo 2 Dolby Digital Setup 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup GExit a e Base Curve Copy is displayed after performing the Auto Setup e To restore the settings to their defaults select Default Yes lt q then press the CURSOR lt button 5 4 Manual EQ Default Yes Base Curve Copy Adjust CH L R CH gt 119 Advanced Setup Part 1 E Procedure for copying the Flat correction curve Press the CURSOR A button to select Base Curve Copy then press the CURSOR lt button e Switch to the Base Curve Copy screen 5 4 Manual EQ TC Default Yes pas Manua EQ Base Curve Copy4 Adjust CH L R CH gt See Plat Base Curve Copy Yes gt A Exit 2 Press the
63. 10009 10556 10009 10016 10092 10037 10037 10346 10625 10753 10037 10037 10320 10037 10009 10009 10036 10363 10216 10037 10009 10037 10009 10218 10556 10009 10030 10037 10556 11137 10037 10264 10544 10714 11755 10037 10361 10668 10250 10163 10264 10051 10036 10264 10037 10606 10264 10019 10150 10394 10056 10421 10698 10819 10556 10037 10037 10163 10320 10037 10037 10247 10715 10320 10092 10648 10170 10282 10556 10721 10163 11437 10556 10556 10374 10056 10051 10073 10486 10702 10820 10412 10337 10186 10264 10104 10320 11037 10466 10668 10280 10208 10706 10706 10039 10179 n OU 10412 10668 z 10755 10217 10650 10655 10412 11163 10092 0653 10217 10726 10795 10054 10180 10109 10498 10706 10821 10556 10668 10206 10455 T005 RG 10714 10178 10418 10698 11037 10247 10093 10264 10891 10056 10186 10287 10560 10712 10579 11037 10217 10556 10163 10374 10767 TOZA 10455 10706 11437 10259 10178 10418 ASST 10060 10335 10587 10714 10259 o KOZT a TOST M37 22 Texet ThemeScene Thomson Thorn Thorn Ferguson Tia
64. 10009 a KOOS 10565 10412 10817 10037 10455 10037 10544 10009 10482 2102925 10714 10154 11756 T0087 IOSA 10370 10587 10170 a KOZIG 10606 11437 10109 10217 10218 10264 10374 10428 10180 10217 10036 10264 10785 10412 10374 10193 10217 10556 10146 10208 10661 10370 10715 10418 10421 10374 10614 10191 10282 10668 10428 10486 10451 10247 10037 10374 10661 10208 10218 10668 10361 10226 10812 10418 11037 o TIOE 10195 10455 10714 10486 10714 10623 10802 10544 10108 10412 10157 10512 10217 10282 11037 10339 11163 10455 10512 10264 10817 10428 10374 10821 10486 10200 10455 10487 10499 a 10716 10S Bondstec Boots Bosch Boxlight BPL Bradford Brandt Brandt Electronique Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Bruns BTC Bush Caihong Cailing Caishi Candle Canton Carad Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Celestial Centrex Centrum Centurion Century CGE CGM Changcheng Changfei Changfeng Changhai Changhong 10247 10009 10320 10752 10037 10180 10109 10335 10037 10087 10216 10019 10003 10087 10218 10009 10218 10363 10581 10
65. 10264 10412 10216 10217 10556 10508 10036 10046 10156 10165 10264 10320 10497 10499 10705 10817 10247 0512 10418 10371 10714 10721 10037 10072 10337 18 Noblex Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Norfolk Normerel Noshi Novak Novatronic NTC Nu Tec Oceanic Okano Omega Omni On Command Onimax Onking Onwa Optimus Optoma Optonica Orion Orline Ormond Orsowe Osaki Osio Oso Osume Otto Versand Pacific Pael Palladium Palsonic PRESET CODE 10154 10180 10070 10102 10109 10163 10346 10359 10548 10606 10748 10824 10217 10037 10109 10560 10714 10163 10037 10018 10012 10037 10037 10105 10092 10037 10455 10163 10208 10009 10037 10264 10264 10698 10891 10531 10714 10280 10102 10180 10602 10154 10166 10887 10093 10165 10011 10037 10264 10320 10463 10516 10655 10714 10037 10218 10668 11037 10516 10032 10037 10355 10374 10290 10218 10032 10036 10036 10037 10226 10235 10535 10544 10037 10556 10216 10037 10247 10630 10655 10001 10037 10412 10418 10216 10179 10208 10361 10374 10610 10631 10163 10195 10374 10531 10698 10706 10361 10473 10370 10706 10780 10218 10371 10250 10650 1ON 7 WITS 10321 10355 10531 10544 10880 11463 10072102177 10412 10556 10037 10072 10093 10109 10247 10320
66. 41165 41353 41359 40790 41100 40730 40783 40790 40831 41003 41127 40770 40850 41051 41115 40705 40816 40821 41268 40741 40770 40783 41165 40869 41334 41158 40815 40744 40783 40833 40869 41099 41144 41158 41304 2 Goodmans GPX Gradiente Gran Prix Grandin Greenhill Grundig Grunkel GVG H amp B H amp B Hanseatic Harman Kardon HDT Hen Hher Hitachi Hiteker Home Electronics Home Tech Humax Hyundai Lo iLo nitial ntegra RT SP Jaton JBL Jeken Jensen Jepssen JMB JNC JSI JVC jWin archer awasak Kendo ennex Kenwood iiro KLH LH Digital Konka OSS PRESET CODE 40651 40833 40699 40651 40831 40672 40717 40539 40790 40770 41169 40850 40713 40741 40582 40705 40713 40651 40573 40672 40730 41107 40646 40768 41348 41348 40717 40571 40783 40695 41078 40702 40699 41016 41250 40695 40672 41423 40503 41049 40783 40790 40699 40713 40490 40770 40717 40717 40711 40651 40690 41004 40769 40713 40651 40850 40783 40702 40713 40664 40872 40783 40839 40627 40539 41051 40713 40770 40534 40790 40719 40896 40713 40730 40783 40790 41730 40670 40695 40705 40713 41004 41730 40826 40831 40695 40713 41247 40850 41634 40558 40623 40867 41
67. 67 NEWS News NOSTALGA Nostalgia INFORM Information JAZZ Jazz SPORTS Sports CLASSICL Classical TALK Talk R amp B R amp B ROCK Rock SOFT R amp B Soft R amp B CLS ROCK Classic rock LANGUAGE Language ADLT HIT Adult hits REL MUSC Religious music SOFT RCK Soft rock REL TALK Religious talk TOP 40 Top 40 PERSNLTY Personality COUNTRY Country PUBLIC Public OLDIES Oldies COLLEGE College SOFT Soft WEATHER Weather Basic Operation FUNCTION TU D CURSOR lt gt 8 RDS SEARCH E CHANNEL CURSOR lt gt K TUNER AMP made RDS search Press the CHANNEL button e Automatically begin the RDS search operation e Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that provide RDS service RDS a am New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search Set the input source to TUNER RDS station PTY Program category TP Traffic info A J FUNCTION ZA EN RT Radio Text A 2 Tune by preset Up Down N Main unit Remote control unit x If no RDS stations is found with above operation all in the AMP mode the reception band are searched X When a broadcast station is found that station s name Press the TU TUNER appears on the display button to select the TUNER EN mode To continue searching repeat step 3 Remote control unit If no other RDS station is found when al
68. CO E E keg Kos I CO E E lt O xX OO0000 X x Xx ER Bea o et O WO Ba x amp aX ae xX PO Pa Om Of axi EC ECO Of Le XHL LIEU S VINNIJ XH 3INOH IO waan A f sre rs eyo mu egy wm you s Beg ww Bel yum Wel oni 0781 1 e Ipny wua Twuigia Toun ya DE asa asa a ang OMY og amoo amoa wuoaamoa X WIE0 A000l sud sla wait Wees ein ooTWNY aa apoi punong qo olpny Jedns OIGNV GAG W1LISIG Ad 10d Sid sjeuBis yndu uong Additional Information sjeubis ndu ay uo Buipuadap saweu apow punons ul saudi M 170 Additional Information QUON JO JxdS 0 195 s Jayeads yoeq punons u ym pajoejeas a0 Jouues pow SI sjeuBls j uueyo z uey 19410 sjeUBis yndul 104 yy padeldsip S O34J1S HOG 10 OFYALS HOZ veut QUON 01 19S si dnjas 1ayeeds g puNoUNs ay 10 pue UON 01 79S SI dn s Jayeads yOeg Dunoune y ji ey QUON JO Pd 0 Jes si dnjes 1ayeeds yORg puNONS out UsYM JqLJILAL Jou SI apOW SIY Zx QUON 01 1958 si dnjes sayeeds yOeg Dupong ay UJUM ajqeiene Jou SI apowW SIU Le LON pow q2 2 S UON x apow giqeajeas O NO S dav Up pexi PON o snjejs jeru u ajqejoajas PON J O J J O O
69. DVI D monitor output terminals on the AVR 5805CI can only be used one at a time not simultaneously e To provide audio output from AVR 5805Cl s audio output terminal select AMP at the System Setup To provide audio output from the TV select TV at the System Setup For details see Setting the HDMI DVI In Assignment IS page 111 112 HDMI Dvi D OCP The AVR 5805Cl is HDMI Ver 1 1 compatible DI eg TV Monitor emm D C i WI L S DVD player s er SSD Li L J Input signals Copyright Protection System LINEAR PCM O To play back the digital video and audio of DVD Video and e SC DVD Audio through an HDMII DVI D connection both the DVD Video Dolby Digital O connected player and monitor are required to support a DTS O copyright protection system called HDCP High bandwidth LINEAR PCM Digital Content Protection System HDCP is copy DVD Audio PACKED PCM O protection technology that comprises data encryption and with CPPM without CPPM authentication of the partner equipment CD LINEAR PCM O The AVR 5805CI supports HDCP Please see the operating instruction of your video display for more information Multi area x about this Super Audio Stereo area x CD CD area O NOTE e The audio signals on the multi stereo area of Super Audio CDs are not output If the Super Audio CD is a hybrid CD only the audio signals in the CD area ar
70. ENTER TUNING E Listening to Internet radio stations registered in your favorites When the NetAudio function is selected press the CURSOR A or V button to select Favorites then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e The Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed 2 desired radio station then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e Playback starts E Deleting radio stations from your favorites At the screen on which the Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed press the CURSOR A or V button to choose the radio station you want to delete then press the MEMORY button e The delete screen appears Favorites Is it deleted Cancel gt lt Remove Press the CURSOR lt I button to delete the station To cancel without deleting press the CURSOR gt button Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the 78 ets TUNING mr MEMORY S MODE ENTER CURSOR m gt AUX AMP mode Character search function searching by first letter e The character search function searching by first letter can be used to select the desired item from the menu screen displaying the list of Internet radio stations or music files stored on the computer While the menu screen is displayed press the TUNING button e The character search screen appears Character Search GA Press the TUNING button to select the first let
71. Exit Press the CURSOR lt 1 or button to select ON or OFF ON The dynamic range is compressed automatically according to the combination of speakers being used OFF The dynamic range is not compressed X Set Compression to ON if it seems that sound is distorted because the input level exceeds the allowable input for the front speakers Xx When a center speaker or surround speakers are not connected the sounds in those channels are directed to the front speakers Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Advanced Playback menu reappears e The surround mode used at last for the four types of input signals shown below is stored in the memory and the signal is automatically played with that surround mode the next time it is input Note that the surround mode setting is also stored separately for the different input sources Analog and PCM 2 channel signals STEREO 2 channel signals of Dolby Digital DTS or other multi channel format DOLBY PLIIx Cinema Multi channel signals of Dolby Digital DTS or other multi channel format DOLBY DTS SURROUND PCM and DSD multi channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS MULTI CH IN X Default settings are indicated in Xx During playback in the PURE DIRECT mode the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Auto Surround Mode at
72. L2 C R2 Z2M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L4 Z3 M R4 Z4 M L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z2 L R4 Z2 R L4 Z3 L R4 Z3 R L4 Z4 L R4 Z4 R L4 Z3 M R4 Z4 M L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z3 L R5 Z3 R L5 Z4L R5 Z4R L5 Z4L R5 Z4R L5 Z4M R5 L5 Z4M R5 L5 Z3M R5 L5 IR5 e Amp Assign mode Bi Amp Front e Amp Assign mode Bi Amp Channel Setup gt MAIN ZONE 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup gt MAIN ZONE 5 1 CH Power Amp Assign VI FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR Di CR Di C R2 L2 C R2 C L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L4 FL R4 FR L4 FL Bi FR L4 FL R4 FR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 R5 L5 SL A R5 SR A 132 Advanced Setup Part 1 E Table of channels to which power amplifiers can be assigned with respect to the channel settings for the different zones and the amplifier assignment modes e Amp Assign mode Advanced Channel Setup SAIN ZONE FONE ASSIGNABLE CHANNEL 9 1 CH SCH L FR C SLA SR A SL B SR B SBL SBR Z2 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 SR Z3 L Z3 R ZA L Z4 R STEREO L FR
73. LOGIC II DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx DTS NEO 6 modes and the input signal switches to a digital signal encoded in Dolby Digital the Dolby Surround mode switches automatically When the input signal switches to a DTS signal the mode automatically switches to DTS Surround e The DTS NEO 6 Cinema or Music mode can be chosen directly by pressing the CINEMA or MUSIC button on the Remote control unit during playback in the DTS NEO 6 mode E Surround parameters DTS NEO 6 Mode e Cinema This mode is optimum for playing movies Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same atmosphere with 2 channel sources as with 6 1 channel sources This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well because the in phase component is assigned mainly to the center channel C and the reversed phase component to the surround SL SR and SB channels e Music This mode is suited mainly for playing music The front channel FL and FR signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there is no loss of sound quality and the effect of the surround signals output from the center C and surround SL SR and SB channels add a natural sense of expansion to the sound field CENTER IMAGE 0 0 to 1 0 default 0 3 The center image parameter for adjusting the expansion of the center channel in the DTS NEO 6 MUSIC mode has been added Basic Operation The Dolby Headphon
74. MULTI CH IN x Advanced AL24 processing is activated when PCM 2 channel signals are played while the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT or DIRECT NOTE e The DIG indicator will light when playing CD ROMs containing data other than audio signals but no sound will be heard 48 ROOM EQ Room EO function e The AVR 5805Cl s Auto Setup Room EO function offers three correction curves Audyssey Front Flat The timbre of the speakers can also be adjusted manually using a graphic equalizer Details of the different correction curves are described below Press the ROOM EO button e The Room EQ switches as follows each time the ROOM EQ button is pressed OFF Audyssey gt Front Flat Manual Xx The Audyssey is selected the MultEQ XT indicator lights green The Front or Flat is selected the MultEQ XT indicator lights red Xx The MultEQ XT indicator also lights red if the Speaker Configuration Delay Time Channel Level or Crossover Frequency is set manually after conducting the Auto Setup procedure Audyssey This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics Front This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers Flat This the frequency response of all speakers flat This is suitable for multi
75. Mode For the replay of 5 1 multi channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected In this mode new THX processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS and Dolby Digital to provide a wide stable rear soundstage THX Games Mode For the replay of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Digital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field ASA Advanced Speaker Array ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart you will need to go THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing which will re optimi
76. NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual meets FCC requirements Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority granted by the FCC to use the product 3 NOTE This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio TV technician for help This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil nu
77. Nu Tec Okano Olidata Omni Onix Onkyo Oopla Optimus 41082 41265 40730 40651 40591 40770 41115 40591 40717 40770 40826 41402 41051 40872 40774 40752 40516 40752 40672 40690 40672 40503 41158 40525 OptoMedia Electronics Orion Oritron Ormond Otic P amp B Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panasonic Panda Philco Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Plu2 Pointer Polaroid Polk Audio Portland Powerpoint PRESET CODE 40896 40695 40651 40713 40826 40770 40695 40831 40770 40695 40672 40490 41762 40717 40690 40503 41260 40672 40490 40850 40784 41020 40539 40770 40872 41730 40692 41004 40692 40831 41003 40831 40698 40852 40627 40713 40852 40503 40790 40539 41267 40699 40525 41061 40741 40785 40869 41404 41107 41265 40778 40833 40792 40768 40774 40790 40804 40703 41362 41462 41490 40646 40675 40854 41158 41354 41165 40571 40631 41086 Powtek 40852 Shinco 40717 Prima 41016 Shinsonic 40533 40839 Prinz 40831 Silva 40831 Prism 40705 Silva Schneider 40831 Proline 40651 40672 40833 41004 Singer 40690 40768 Proscan 40522 Skantic 40539 40713 41003 Proson 40713 Skymaster 40730 40768 Prosonic 40752 Slim Art 40784 ProVision 40699 40778 Slim Devices 40533 Qwestar 40651 SM Electronic 40690 40730 40768 Radionette
78. O O O O O O O G J 034315 034315 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Ex 034315 HO6 g D O CO CO CO O O O oO CO CO TVNLHIA O O O O O O O CO O O O O O O O O KIHIVI O O O Gi Q CO CO JWY9 0301A O O CO O O O O O O O O O O O O O JION ONO Q Q oO CO oO O O O oO Si oO O Q 1439N09 3ISSV19 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O HIT ZZVT O O CO O O O O O Si YNJ Y 90 O E O O O O O O O O O O O O CO O WNIGVIS Hd CO Q O CO D D oO Si O oO CO O e N3349S 301M OLIVINWIS de x E x x e x x x x X x X x E x x Lx JISAN Xd 0 HIM x O x x O x x x x x x x x x x x Cx VINANIO Xd 0 20 x X x x x x x X x x X x x x 193410 34Nd HO UI x O x x x X x xX X X x x x X x x 201 IANN asa O x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 193410 34Nd ASA x x g O x O O Q O Q O O O Q O O 133410 JH Nd 193410 3 4Nd x O x x CH x x x x x x x x X x x Lx JISAW XI 193410 x O x x O x x x x x x x x x x x Cx VWANIO Xd 193410 x O xX x CO x x x x x x x x x x x 193410 HO IAN x CO x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 193410 IANN aSa O x x x x x x x Es x x X x x x x 193410 ASQ x x O x O D oO oO O CO D 133410 193410 woz onma zer A pama AE aE aa PHAM pe au vza wovs eum Bey yum wA asa asa JO oun olpny GAd Agog Agog Agoa wm emm X3 1vLI910 A9100 Sid Sid KULW S3 S10 1493S S3 SLO vz 901YNY GON poy punong do oipny Jedns OlanNv dAd Teo 49100 Sld sjeuBis indu uong 171 Additional Information
79. Osaki Osume Otake Otto Versand Pacific Packard Bell Palladium Palsonic Panasonic Pathe Cinema Pathe Marconi Penney Pentax Perdio Philco Philips Phoenix Phonola Pilot Pioneer Polk Audio Portland Prinz Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosonic Protec PRESET CODE 21972 20240 20041 20240 20041 20972 20209 20209 20000 20072 20035 20162 20642 20222 20037 20072 20002 21479 20000 20072 20209 20081 20000 21972 20037 20000 20035 21035 20043 20041 20035 21237 20042 20000 20000 20479 20000 20739 20278 20081 20037 20042 20081 20278 20000 20081 20000 20060 20278 20072 20042 20278 20067 20041 20209 20226 20048 20121 20037 20348 20041 20037 20162 21062 20037 20209 20035 20035 20067 20240 20278 21060 20046 20315 20320 20046 20278 20104 20184 20072 20642 20072 20072 20225 21308 20038 20038 20081 20081 20320 20048 20048 20315 20162 20209 20209 20642 20226 21562 20042 20072 20226 20162 20642 20081 20081 20348 20432 20348 20315 20614 20240 20209 20616 21562 20104 20104 21062 20479 20348 20616 21035 20226 20618 Protech ProVision Pulsar Pye Oisheng Ouarter Ouartz Ouasar Quelle
80. Parade Blue Sky Boghe Boman Brainwave Brandt Broksonic 40872 40713 40872 40774 40672 40672 40830 40770 41168 40690 40717 41122 40730 40730 40655 40713 41165 41004 40698 40717 40571 40651 40804 41004 40783 40770 40503 40695 40730 40790 40778 40641 40705 41115 40672 40783 40784 40831 41061 40717 41004 41407 41265 40790 40872 41071 40662 40713 40672 41115 40651 40868 41242 40833 40770 40695 41051 40850 40755 41020 41041 41072 40833 40695 Bush 40516 40717 41051 C Tech 40798 Cambridge Soundworks 40690 Cat 40699 41165 CAVS 41057 CCE 40730 Celestial 41020 40790 40884 40899 Centrex 40672 Centrum 40713 CGV 41115 Changhong 40627 40699 40713 40717 Cinea 40831 Cineral 40730 Cinetec 40713 cineULTRA 40699 CineVision 40833 Citizen 41277 Classic 40730 Clatronic 40672 Clayton 40713 Coby 40730 41115 40794 40796 40797 Compacks 40826 41056 41061 41100 Conia 40516 Continental Edison 40768 Craig 40831 Crown 40690 41071 41072 41121 Curtis Mathes 41087 Cybercom 40831 CyberHome 40816 Cydectin 41074 Cytron 40651 D Vision 41115 Daenyx 40872 Daewoo 40705 40884 41169 Daewoo International 40872 Dansai 40770 40713 40769 40778 Dantax 40539 Daytek 40872 Dayton 40872 DCE 40831 DEG 40774 Decca 40770 Denon 40490 1 PRESET C
81. Setup Part 1 E Connecting the preouts The pre out terminals used to connect the subwoofer depends on the MAIN ZONE s channel setup Connect as shown on the diagram below Channel Setup Connection Main Subwoofer 9 1 CH 77 1 CH 1 SP SE 2 SURR A SURR BACK SURR B PRE OUT Subwoofer 9 1 CH 2 SP Q Or FRONT SW SURR A SURR BACK SURR B FRONT SW Y SURR PRE OUT ZONE 2 PRE UT Subwoofer R B LFE 3 SP Subwoofer L F T GE E QOs FRONT f SW SURR A SURA BACK SURR B FRONT SURR PRE OUT SORE UT LFE Subwoofer R B ZA CH 2 SP Subwoofer L F M OO E OO A SURR 226 PRE OUT Subwoofer R B LFE 3 SP E Subwoofer L F OO O O FRONT OOQ SURR A SURA 2 QLR PRE OUT LFE Subwoofer R B 5 1 CH 2 SP Tom Subwoofer L F M OO Se S FRONT QQQ SACK PRE OUT Subwoofer R B LFE 3 SP Soba Subwoofer L F Ste QO FRONT SW SURR A SURAIBACK SURR B PRE OUT Subwoofer R B 128 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment e With the AVR 5805Cl s 10 channel power amplifier it is possible to select 10 channels worth of signals not including the subwoofer signals output from the pre out terminals to be output from the speakers This makes it possible to put together various speaker systems The channels can be selected freely so L1 to L5 and R1 to R5
82. Star Trak Starland Starlite PRESET CODE 01214 00613 00157 01251 00132 00863 01474 00115 00132 00243 00114 01087 00592 00885 00610 00136 01251 00494 00173 00299 00713 00587 00713 01449 01334 00132 00692 00157 00115 00829 00275 00492 00847 00132 00887 00869 00180 01122 00200 00668 00157 00885 00299 00421 00396 00369 01191 00871 01205 00592 01517 DIS 01847 01848 01412 00587 01085 01334 SOON SA 00243 00587 00132 00882 00282 00493 00853 00243 00421 00710 00805 00898 01206 00587 01075 01105 00515 00421 01251 00713 00847 01848 00605 01200 01409 00501 00299 00713 00299 01101 00292 00494 01524 00605 00607 00692 01083 01111 01334 01206 01283 00605 00742 01075 01856 01409 01412 00856 00628 00605 00692 01200 00396 01118 00294 00496 01558 00887 00713 00607 00742 01409 00713 01232 00486 00500 01639 01014 00880 00713 01294 00794 01273 00489 00639 01640 Stream Strong SiS STVI Sunkai Sunny Sunny Sound Sunsat Sunstar Supermax Supernova Tantec Tarbs Tatung TEL Teac Techniland TechniSat Technomate Technosat Technotrend Technowelt Techsan Techwood Teco tekComm Telasat eleciel Telefu
83. a new surround format developed by Digital Theater Systems A sound image and sense of positioning can be achieved by adding a surround back SB channel to the conventional 5 1 channels DTS ES Discrete 6 1 This is the latest format in which all 6 1 channels including the SB channel are recorded independently Since the different channels are independent the sound can be designed with total freedom DTS ES Matrix 6 1 With this format the SB channel is matrix encoded and inserted into the SL and SR channels then decoded for the SL SR and SB channels upon playback This achieves a surround sound more faithful to the artist s sound design intentions than with conventional 5 1 or 6 1 channel systems DTS NEO 6 surround This is a matrix decoding technology for 6 1 channel surround playback of 2 channel sources The optimum decoding for the type of signal source to be played can be selected There are two modes DTS NEO 6 CINEMA This mode is suited for playing movies It achieves the same type of sound as in a movie theater even with 2 channels DTS NEO 6 MUSIC This mode is suited for playing music A natural sense of expansion is added to the sound field DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 is a multi channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems The sampling frequency is raised to achieve 5 1 channel playback with high qualit
84. addition the signal input to the SW subwoofer terminal is output to the PRE OUT SW subwoofer terminal EXT IN 2 Once this is selected the input signals connected to the FRONT L FRONT R CENTER SURR L surround left and SURR R surround right channels of the EXT IN terminals are output directly to the front left and right center and surround left and right speaker systems as well as the pre out terminals In addition the signal input to the SW subwoofer terminal is output to the PRE OUT SW subwoofer terminal Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button The surround parameter menu appears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter 2 CH Select when the input source being played is a 2 channel source MULTI CH Select when the input source being played is a multi channel source MULTI CH DIRECT w DG Input SW ATT dot q E SB CH OUT EXT IN 1 D 4 OFF a O INPUT CHANNEL Default Yes DROE 2CH X Press the CURSOR lt button to set the Input channel Press the ENTER button to return to the previous screen 47 Basic Operation Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting complete the setting P e Cancelling the external input mode Press the INPUT MODE or ANALOG button to switch to the desired input mode e The external input mode can be set for any input source To watch video while
85. agnum Manesth arantz Mark arta Mastec aster s Matsui atsushita Media Center PC edion MEI electronic Memorex emphis Metronic etz MGA GN Technology Micormay icromaxx Microsoft ind Minolta itsubishi Motorola TC Multitec ultitech Murphy yryad NAD aiko National ebula Electronics NEC Neckermann Nesco Neufunk Newave Nikkai Nikko 20278 20000 21781 20240 20642 20045 20035 20000 20037 20642 20278 20209 20035 21972 20209 20035 20000 20000 20048 20479 20072 20081 20037 20043 20240 20348 20209 DMZ 21972 20042 20000 20642 20035 20000 20037 20000 20000 20081 20104 20642 20162 20033 20035 20104 20081 20072 20209 20037 20072 20037 21278 20035 20072 20038 20278 20240 20162 20348 20037 20035 20104 22S 20081 20240 20348 20041 20807 20048 20240 20072 20226 20037 20209 20278 20039 20081 20081 20209 20081 20209 20278 20348 20226 20642 20038 20037 20039 20162 20209 20162 20226 20043 20048 20278 20240 20038 20041 20278 20149 20642 20046 20047 20240 20348 20347 21562 20067 20081 20048 20067 8 Niveus Media Noblex Nokia Nordmende Northgate Novatronic Nu Tec Oceanic Okano Olympus Onida Onimax Onkyo Optimus Orbit Orion
86. and DVI D x Ifthe same HDMI or DVI D input terminal is selected the setting for the input source that was previously ver 3 NONE 3 ANALOG i ai ver 4 NONE 4 ANALOG assigned switches to NONE age NONE 5 ANALOG Press the CURSOR A or V button to select x If there is no HDMI audio signal or the audio signal of Monitor then press the CURSOR lt or gt HDMI can not be reproduced the signal automatically 3 o A switches to the input from the set terminal button to select the monitor output terminal EE eran HOMI 1 5 inau tenmin 111 Advanced Setup Part 1 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears L e Audio signals input from the analog and digital terminals are not output to the TV e With HDMI the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously When HDMI is assigned to an input source the digital audio input assignment switches to HDMI along with the video input When this setting is made for input sources to which a digital audio input DENON LINK IEEE1394 etc is previously assigned the digital audio assignment is set to HDMI In this case reassign the digital input using the procedure described at Digital In Assign I page 104 and EEE1394 Assign 1 amp 8 page 107 Setting the Component In Assignment e This assigns the component color difference video input terminals for th
87. and assignment modes e Amp Assign mode Normal Channel Setup gt MAIN ZONE 9 1 CH 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 DIDIER FR Di C R2 L2 C R2 C R L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L4 SLB R4ISRB L4 R4 L4 4 L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 R5 e Amp Assign mode ZONE2 MAIN ZONE 9 1 CH 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup gt ZONE2 MONO STEREO MONO 5 1 CH STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR YLT FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR LI FL pl FR L2 C R2 ZZM L2 C R2 L2 C R2 Z2MjL2 C R2 Z2C L2 C R2 L2 C R2 Z2M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SRA L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L4 SLB R4 SRB L4 Z2L R4 Z2R L4 R4 L4 Z2FL R4 Z2FR L4 Z2L R4 Z2R L4 R4 L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z2 SL R5 Z2SR L5 R5 L5 R5 e Amp Assign mode ZONE3 MAIN ZONE 9 1 CH 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup gt ZONE3 MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR 1 FL R1 FR JL FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR L2 CMD C R2 L2 C R2IZ3M L2 C R2
88. button once to pause playback then press ENTER button again to resume playback x If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than two seconds when in the play or pause mode playback stops and the previous menu window reappears I e There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet The programs they broadcast and their bit rates vary widely Generally the higher the bit rate the higher the sound quality but streamed music or sound may be broken if the communication lines or servers are busy Inversely programs with low bit rates have lower sound quality but tend to be more stable e Server Full or Connection Down is displayed if th station is congested or if it is not broadcasting e The time for which the on screen display is displayed can be set at Setting the On Screen Display IS page 115 au Presetting registering Internet radio stations e There are two ways to register stations by presetting them or by storing them in your favorites e Stations that are preset can be tuned in directly from the remote control unit Press the MEMORY button while playing the Internet radio station you want to register e The registration menu appears Favorites Preset Favorites Preset Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Preset then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e The preset registration screen appears Press a MEMORY BLOCK A G button
89. change in the EE1394 connection status while this screen is displayed the model name cannot be acquired from the connected EEE1394 device UNKNOWN is displayed If an IEEE1394 device other than one for IEEE1394 audio playback is connected Not Play is displayed and the input source cannot be assigned m gt Mm Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the IEEE1394 Auto Function Tuner Presets e Set whether or not to automatically play the IEEE1394 device when it is selected with the FUNCTION knob 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select TEEE1394 Auto Func at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The IEEE1394 Auto Func screen appears Audio Input Setup ESN 3 6 EEE1394 Auto Func Digital EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename 1 In Assign 2 3 4 5 1EEE1394 Assign 6 7 E Auto Function OI EEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON Select this to automatically play the device OFF Select this if you do not want to automatically play the device X In some cases settings may be required on your player Also refer to the player s operating instructions Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears E Auto Preset Memory e FM stations are rece
90. channel music reproduction from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5 1 DTS DVD Audio and Super Audio CD Manual Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ Setup For details of the Manual EO Setup CS page 118 119 e The Audyssey Front and Flat Room EQ curves can be selected after performing the Auto Setup procedure Basic Operation Playing modes for different sources e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with many surround modes We recommend using the surround modes as described below in order to achieve the maximum effect for the specific signal source X is a 6 1 channel 7 1 channel surround mode Sources recorded in Dolby Digital Surround EX THX SURROUND EX IE page 52 53 e Maximum performance for playing movies on the AVR 5805CI DOLBY DIGITAL EX PLIIx 2 IGS page 54 55 e This mode is optimized for playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Surround EX Sources recorded in DTS ES DTS ES DSCRT 6 1 MTRX 6 1 PLIIx 2 IGS page 54 55 e This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in DTS ES ES DSCRT 6 1 THX ES MTRX 6 1 THX IE page 52 53 e When playing movies setting this mode sometimes results in a more natural sound Select the mode as desired Dolby Digital or DTS Surround 5 1 ch sources 2 ch sources recorded
91. channel signals are output to the surround and surround back signal right channels and the in phase component of the left and right channels is output to the center channel Use this mode to enjoy stereo sound 10 9CH STEREO x Depending on the program source being played the effect may not be very noticeable In this case try other surround modes without worrying about their names to create a sound field suited to your tastes NOTE When playing sources recorded in monaural the sound will be one sided if signals are only input to one channel left or right so input signals to both channels If you have a source component with only one audio output monophonic camcorder etc obtain a Y adaptor cable to split the mono output to two outputs and connect to the L and R inputs E Personal Memory Plus This set is equipped with a personal memorize function that automatically memorizes the surround modes and input modes selected for the input different sources When the input source is switched the modes set for that source last time it was used are automatically recalled x The surround parameters tone control settings and playback level balance for the different output channels are memorized for each surround mode 60 SURROUND PARAMETER DSP SIMULATION 9CH CURSOR ENTER STEREO DSP surround simulation Select the surround mode for each input channel Example 9CH STEREO mode 9 CH ST
92. circuit turns off before adjusting the volume Preparing the remote control unit e The included remote control unit RC 1036 can be used to operate not only the AVR 5805Cl but other remote control compatible DENON components as well In addition the memory contains the control signals for other remote control units so it can be used to operate non DENON remote control compatible products Inserting the batteries Remove the remote control unit s rear cover Notes on batteries e Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not 2 operate even when the remote control unit is operated nearby the set The included battery is only for verifying operation e When inserting the batteries be sure to do so in the EL proper direction following the and marks in the battery compartment e To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid 2 Set two LR6 AA batteries in the battery compartment in e Do not use a new battery together with an old one the indicated direction e Do not use two different types of batteries e Do not short circuit disassemble heat or dispose of batteries in flames e Remove the batteries from the remote if it will not be in use for long periods e f the battery fluid should leak carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries e When replacing the batteries have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible
93. compatible characters Basic Operation E TU Tuner DTU Digital tuner system buttons The tuner or digital tuner system buttons shown on the diagram below are used for Network Audio operations A G Preset memory blocks A Y Character search MODE Configuration mode selection MEMO Preset and favorite registration A V ak Cursor up down left and right ENTER Enter settings CH Preset channel selection 1 8 Preset numbers RC 1036 E Connections Connect one side of the Ethernet cable CAT 5 to the ETHERNET terminal on the AVR 5805Cl s rear panel the other side to the router ETHERNET Internet radio a To WAN side To LAN side port To LAN side port LAN port ETHERNET Computer Basic Operation FUNCTION CURSOR ENTER MEMORY E Network settings When using a broadband router DHCP function the network settings are made automatically so there is no need to make the settings from the setup menu If the broadband router s DHCP function is turned off make the Network Setup I page 138 139 Listening to Internet radio e The required system connections and settings must be made in order to listen to Internet radio Update appears on the display when connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time Either turn t
94. conjunction with the POWER switch on the main unit and when the power is switched between on and standby from the remote control unit No power is supplied from these outlets when this unit s power is at standby Never connect equipment 2 whose total capacity is above 120 W 1 A e The AC outlets can be set to turn on and off for the different functions For details see Setting the AC Outlet Assignment 1287 page 136 NOTE e Only use the AC OUTLETS for audio equipment Never use them for hair driers TVs or other electrical appliances e Insert the plugs securely Incomplete connections will result in the generation of noise 42 Basic Operation Playback P E ZONE2 mode Operating the remote control unit To operete Ihe ZONED maian e The RC 1036 remote control has a backlit EL display whose contents change according to the mode or function selected with the appropriate remote commands for that mode or function E Operate the this unit The AMP button is the main mode for controlling the AVR 5805CI in the main room MAIN ZONE E ZONE3 mode To operate the ZONE3 function x The function switches as shown below each time one of the AMP button is pressed m gt AMP gt ZONE2 gt ZONE3 SYSTEM CALL ZONE4 _
95. fix the output level for the different zones or make it variable e VAR variable The level can be adjusted freely using buttons on the remote control unit e 40 dB 0 dB The output level is fixed at the set level and the volume can no longer be adjusted Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Option Setup menu reappears P e For ZONE2 ZONE3 and ZONE4 the Volume Limit and Power On Level can be set when Variable is selected for Volume Level e When the power amplifier is assigned to either of the ZONE2 ZONE3 and ZONE4 channels at Power Amp Assign VAR only variable is displayed and the fixed level cannot be set 134 Setting the Trigger Out e Four 12 V DC Trigger Outputs on the rear panel can be used to control other devices with compatible trigger inputs such as motorized screens motorized screen masking motorized drapes and other trigger controlled devices e Set the DC output supplied from the trigger out jacks for the various input sources to ON or OFF 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Trigger Out at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Trigger Out screen appears 7 Option Setup 1 2 3 GA Trigger Out 5 6 7 E Ya N 7 4 Channel Setup 1 Leger Ouk Power Amp Assign Trigger Out Volume Control E ae 1 Trigger Out 2 Trigger Out 3 4 AC Outlet As
96. from step 1 e f the microprocessor has been reset all the settings are reset to the default values the values set upon shipment from the factory Advanced Setup Part 1 e You can customize a variety of system setup so that it may be fitting for your listening environment For the contents of a system menu and the initial setting of this unit ES page 153 156 Navigating through the System Setup Menu e You can change setting using the buttons on the front panel or remote control unit SYSTEM SETUP CURSOR ENTER Press the AMP button to select the AMP mode Press the SYSTEM SETUP button e The System Setup Menu appears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the item you want to set then press ENTER button Press the CURSOR A or V again to select the item you want to set then press ENTER button To change the setting Press CURSOR A or V button to select the item you want to change then press CURSOR lt or gt button to change the setting X Select Default Yes then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default setting Press the ENTER button and set a new item Press the SYSTEM SETUP button to return to the System Setup Menu or the main menu AM SYSTEM SETUP Ces CURSOR SD ENTER On screen display Display 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 Zone Set
97. front channels FL C and FR or the rear channels SL SR SBL and SBR together Use it for example to adjust the balance of the sound from each position when multi channel music sources are played Press the CH SEL ENTER button e The Channel Vol screen appears Press the CURSOR A V or CH SEL ENTER button then select Fader Channel Vol FL 0 06 SR A 0 og 0 06 SR B 0 04 FR 0 0B SBR 0 048 SW 0 0B SBL 0 0B SL B 0 08 SLA 0 08 Fader FRONT REAR X The channel switches in the order shown below each time the CH SEL ENTER button is pressed ELH C HFR HSWHISRA HSRB ry ry FADER SBLF SBR SLAF SEBIS Press the CURSOR lt 1 button to reduce the volume of the front channels the CURSOR gt button to reduce the volume of the rear channels Example When FRONT is selected Channel Vol FL 1 0B SRA 0 08 1 08 SR B 0 08 FR 1 0B SBR 0 08 SW 0 08 SBL 0 08 SL B 0 08 SLA 0 08 GN gt REAR The fader function does not affect the subwoofer channel I e The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be faded to 12 0 dB using the fader function e f the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjusting the fader the fader adjustment values are cleared so adjust the fader again 65 Basic Operation Listening to the Radio
98. indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider Normally input 255 255 255 0 Gateway When connected to a gateway router input its IP address Primary DNS Secondary DNS If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider input it at Primary DNS If there are two or more DNS addresses input the first one at Second DNS Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Network Setup menu reappears I e DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol These are systems by which the IP address and other network settings are automatically set for the AVR 5805Cl computer broadband router and network devices e DNS Domain Name System This is a system for converting the domain names used when browsing Internet sites for example www denon jp into the IP addresses actually used for communications for example 202 221 192 106 138 E Setting the Proxy Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Proxy at the Network Setup screen then press the ENTER button e The Proxy screen appears 7 7 Network Setup 7 7 Proxy N IP Address D 4 gt Proxy Proxy Network Option Exit emm Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON e The proxy server is enabled Emtee 7 7 Proxy oy L Proxy 4Address gt
99. input to the selected signals ANALOG EXT IN or IEEE1394 e Refer to DENON LINK connections 1257 page 35 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select DLINK 3 1 Digital In Assign cD COAX1 Tape OPTS DVD 4 DIMENIN gt V Aux OPT6 VDP COAX3 T COAX4 DBS COAX5 DLINK VOR OPT1 No Signal VCR 2 OPT2 4EXT 1 gt VCR 3 OPT3 VCR 4 OPT4 De fau l t Yes Press the CURSOR or V button to select DLINK setting then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the input signal ANALOG EXT IN or IEEE1394 3 1 Digital In Assign CD COAX1 Tape OPT5 DVD DLINK VAux OPT6 VDP COAX3 Tv COAX4 DBS COAX5 DLINK VR OPT1 No Signal VCR 2 OPT2 ANALOG gt VCR 3 OPT VCR 4 OPT4 Defaul tiYesi4 If the signal cannot be played with DENON LINK connection the signal automatically switches to the input from the set terminal 104 Setting the EXT IN Setup e Set the EXT IN terminals playback method Press the CURSOR A or V button to select EXT IN Setup at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The EXT IN Setup screen appears Audio Input Setup Leem N Digital
100. is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Memory backup and protecting the setting E User Memory This stores the current user settings in the memory 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Setup Memory Lock at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Setup Memory Lock screen appears 7 Option Setup Channeli Setup 7 6 Setup Memory Lock Power Amp Assign Volume Control Trigger Out AC Outlet Assign Setup Memory Lock Network Setup FUser Memory Setup Lock Exit J Press the CURSOR or V button to select User Memory then press the ENTER button e Switch to the User Memory screen 7 6 User Memory Save Yes 4 Exit Bi Press the CURSOR lt button to select Save Yes e About 30 seconds are required for the settings to be stored in the memory Xx Once the settings are stored in the memory Load is displayed and the settings can be loaded 7 6 User Memory Load Yes 4 Save Yes 4 Exit Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Setup Memory Lock screen reappears Advanced Setup Part 1 H Setup Lock This sets whether or not to lock the system setup settings so that they cannot be changed Once all the settings are made set Setup Lock to ON
101. menu reappears The AVR 5805CI automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the listening room e Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels is equal From the listening position listen to the test tones produced from the speakers to adjust the level The level of each channel should be adjusted to 75 dB C weighted slow meter mode on a sound level meter at the listening position If a sound level meter is not available adjust the channels by ear so the sound levels are the same Because adjusting the subwoofer level test tone by ear is difficult use a well known music selection and adjust for natural balance 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Channel Level at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Channel Level screen appears 2 Speaker Setup 2 4 Channel Level 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Setup 3 Delay Time GA Channel Level 5 6 7 E Test Tone 8 lt Manual Test Tone Start Yesj4 Crossover Freguenc Surround Sp Setup THX Audio Setup Level Clear Yes Lr C t Press the CURSOR lt or button to select Auto or Manual Auto Adjust the level while listening to the test tones produced automatically from each speaker Manual Select the speaker from which you want to produce the test tone to adjust the level Exampl
102. or V button to select Channel Level at the Zone Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Channel Level screen appears 6 Zone Setup 6 4 Channel Level Zone 2 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Mode 3 Delay Time F4 Channel Level 5 6 T E Test Tone D gt Manual Test Tone Start Yes 4 Crossover Frequenc Video Setup Zone3 4 Tone Ch Le Level Clear s J Press the CURSOR lt or E button to select Auto or Manual Auto Adjust the level while listening to the test tones produced automatically from each speaker Manual Select the speaker from which you want to produce the test tone to adjust the level Example When the Auto mode is selected 6 4 Channel Level Zone 2 Test Tone Start Yes 4 Level Clear Yesj4 d wA Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Test Tone Start then press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes 6 4 Channel Level Zone 2 Test Tone 4 gt Manual Test Tone Start Yesj4 Level Clear ee When Auto mode is selected Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all 1 the speakers to the same volume e The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order at 4 seconds int
103. protected 172 Additional Information Video convert S VIDEO MONITOR Input signals MONITOR OUT OUT HDMI COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO gt x x x X x x x O z x x S x Used x x 0 Not used x x O O x O x x z x O x O x o o x Used x O O Not used x O O O OFF O x x x O x x O S x S x Used O x o O Not used O x O O O O x x O O x O z o S S x Used O O R o Not used O O O O Signal input x Not output x No signal Kal On screen display superimposed on video signal and output E e When Analog to HDMI Convert is set to OFF no signals other than the HDMI input signals are output to the HDMI monitor output terminal 2 On screen On screen display superimposed on S Video signal and output display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP SURROUND PARAMETER except the HDMI monitor out and ON SCREEN button Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the VIDEO CONVERT MODE settings of ZONE2 VIDEO CONVERT Mode Input signals MONITOR OUT COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x x O VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO x O x S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO x CO CO S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO ON O x x COMPONENT x x O x O COMPONENT Kal VIDEO VIDEO O O x CO
104. reappears e The items to be set differ as described below according to the selected input terminal and the Mode selection EXT IN 1 10 CH Mode DSP ANALOG Surr B NOT USED USED NOT USED USED S Back NOT USED SBL SBR SB SBL Surr Sp Surr A Surr B Surr A B SW Level 0 5 10 15 dB 0 5 10 15 dB Input ATT OFF 6 dB EXT IN 2 6 CH Mode DSP ANALOG Surr B S Back Surr Sp Surr A Surr B Surr A B SW Level 0 5 10 15 dB 0 5 10 15 dB Input ATT OFF 6 dB 105 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Input Function Level Setting the Function Rename e The playback level is corrected individually for the different input sources 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Input Function Lev at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Input Function Lev screen appears Audio Input Setup 3 3 Input Function Lev 1 Digital In Assign 2 EXT IN Setup Tari ES 3 Input Function Lev BC va Ge 4 Function Rename cp OdB Yo OdB 5 1EEE1394 Assign Tape OdB Yer Dap 6 IEEET394 Auto Func fom op ied OdB 7 Tuner Presets ve OdB VAN 0dB Exit TW OdB Ax 0dB De f a u I t Yes 4 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to
105. reproduction of your favorite music sources As this product is provided with an immense array of features we recommend that before you begin hookup and operation that you review the contents of this manual before proceeding Getting Started Basic Operation EE 7 AU Se 7 Cautions on installation m a 7 Cautions on handling ae Preparing the remote control unit 8 Inserting the batteries 0 00 0 ccceeeneeeeereeetenenenees 8 Operating range of the remote control unit 9 Part names and functions BRO DEE 10 YA EISE 12 Re mote oi MA eneee E E AAA 183 Easy Setup and Operation Easy to setup HOw eee 14 Speaker system Iavout 15 Speaker connections 00cnieeiereee 16 17 Connecting a DVD player and TV Monitor 18 19 Auto Setup Room EQ ett 20 Connectinolaimicrophone mear 21 ONNE NNN TON Easa oeaan an Ee a a e EAR 22 Starting Auto Setup BAS DEE Ekel Wun DEE E EE EH UE MEDIE HEI 24 See koa asia IS teen eee menor meee 25 INT AVS EE 26 Connecting Other Sources Cablelindications AAA 27 The video conversion functon 28 On screen display for component video outputs and HDMiioutput e e EE 28 Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals Connecting a TV t ner n cc ececececeeteeteeteeees Connectingia DBS DEE Connecting the external inputs EXT IN
106. select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the level X The level can be adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in units of 1 dB Xx When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears e After completing this setting check that the playback levels for the different sources are the same e The names of the different input function can be changed as desired and displayed on the display 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Function Rename at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Function Rename screen appears Audio Input Setup Ze Sp ry Digital Im Resi en 3 4 Function Rename EXT IN Setup 1 2 Tuner 4 gt 3 Input Function Lev ess j Steg GA Function Rename ol cD 5 1EEE1394 Assign T 6 1EEE1394 Auto Func e CDR TAPE 7 Tuner Presets voP VDP Exit Ww TV Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input function whose name you want to change then press the CURSOR lt or gt button e The screen switches to the character input screen Example When DVD is selected and the CURSOR lt or gt button is pressed 3 4 Function Rename a c ovo Pvp gt v L Default Yes4
107. sure to turn this function off before performing the Auto Setup procedure Turn on your TV monitor Press the POWER switch am ON The power turns on and the power indicator lights Set the POWER switch to this position to turn the power on and off from the included remote control unit OFF The power turns off and indicator is off In this position the power cannot be turned on and off from the remote control unit Press the ON STANDBY switch on the main unit or ON button on the remote control unit e When pressed the power turns on and the display lights e When pressed again the power turns off the standby mode is set and the display turns off The sound is muted for several seconds after which the unit operates normally Whenever the ON STANDBY button is in the standby state the apparatus is still connected to the AC line voltage Please be sure to turn off the POWER switch or unplug the cord when you leave home for say a vacation Press the AMP button to select AMP only when operating with the remote control unit Press the SYSTEM SETUP button e The System Setup Menu appears EET System Setup Menu GI Auto Setup Room EQ 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 Zone Setup 7 Option Setup Exit J Xv Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Auto Setup Room EQ then press the ENTER button e The Auto Setup Room
108. surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema mode e When the HOME THX CINEMA button is pressed the surround mode is set as follows according to the signal that is played THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema 2 Home THX CINEMA PLIIx C THX 3 THX 5 1 4 ES DSCRT 6 1 THX ES MTRX 6 1 THX x When the HOME THX CINEMA mode is set when a DVD is played check the DVD player s digital output setting and change the setting to one for which Dolby Digital and DTS bit stream signals can be output bit stream for example Playing sources recorded in Dolby Surround in the Home THX Cinema Surround mode Press the HOME THX CINEMA button to select Home THX Cinema mode Play a program source with the DO posv surround mark x For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the respective components Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears PLIIx C THX e 4 PLIIx C gt Sue MODE 4 SB ON gt CR g ei en P Default Yes4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 51 Basic Operation E To play in the THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema Surround mode for sources recorded in Dolby Digita
109. technologies e Windows Media Connect e Windows Media DRM 10 for network devices System requirements e The preparations described below must be made in order t use the Internet radio and music server functions E Broadband Internet connection A broadband connection to the Internet is necessary order to use the AVR 5805Cl s Internet radio function 0 D 74 NOTE You must have a contract with an Internet Service Provider ISP in order to connect to the Internet For instructions on connecting to the Internet contact your ISP or a computer store If you already have a broadband Internet connection there is no need to take out another contract Modem A modem is a device for exchanging signals over the Internet using a broadband connection Some are integrated into routers For instructions on connecting to the Internet contact your ISP or a computer store Router A router is a device for connecting multiple pieces of equipment computers the AVR 5805Cl etc to the Internet simultaneously When using the AVR 5805Cl we recommend a router equipped with the following functions Built in DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server Function for automatically assigning the device s IP address on the LAN Built in 100BASE TX switch When connecting multiple devices it is recommended to have a built in switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater NOTE e The type o
110. the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e The Option Setup menu appears System Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ Speaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup Zone Setup Option Setup 7 Option Setup Channel Setup Power Amp Assign Volume Control AC Outlet Assign 1 2 3 4 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E Setup Memory Lock Network Setup xit xit rl 2 3 4 Trigger Out 5 6 7 E 2 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Channel Setup then press the ENTER button e The Channel Setup screen appears Option Setup 7 1 Channel Setup GI Channel Setup 2 Power Amp Assign Main Zone S A Main 4 9 1CH gt 5 AC Outlet Assign Subwoofer 4 TSP gt 6 Setup Memory Lock Z one2 4 5 1CH gt oes Setup Zone3 4 Stereo gt Gi Zone4 4 Stereo gt Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the zone then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the channel setting Xx Refer to the table on page 127 7 1 Channel Setup Main Zone Main 4 DICH gt Subwoofer 43SP LR 4 Stereo 4 Stereo gt 4 Stereo gt Zone2 Zone3 Zone4 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Option Setup menu reappears 126 Advanced Setup Part 1 E The number of channels that can be selected for the different zones is as shown below
111. this is set to r STANDARD LSB SIMU l l STEREQ D MBE 4 Press the CURSOR lt button to reduce the 7CH STEREO volume of the front channels the CURSOR gt CH SEL ENTER CES button to reduce the volume of the rear We CURSOR channels SURROUND O x The fader function does not affect the SW channel PARAMETER P e The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be faded to 12 0 dB using the fader function e f the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjusting the fader the fader adjustment values are cleared so adjust the fader again E Fader function e This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the front channels FL C and FR or the rear channels SL SR SBL and SBR of ZONE2 together Use it for example to adjust the balance of the sound from each position when multi channel music sources are played Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press the CH SEL ENTER button e The Channel Vol screen appears Channel Vol aa R 0 OB GC 0 0B SBR 0 0B FR 0 0dB SBL 0 DO SW 0 0B SL 0 O B Fader L FRONT 4 REAR Press the CURSOR A V or CH SEL ENTER button then select Fader X The channel switches in the order shown below each time the CH SEL ENTER button is pressed EL C FR Sw SR FADER SL SBL EE le Channel Vol N FL 0 0B SR 0 OB E 0 0B SBR 0 O
112. to use some of the buttons depending on the model and age of your equipment e When of the a remote control code is sent the icon for the mode device to which that code belongs flashes e The HOME button is used to return to the AMP AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL mode when in any mode other than AMP Advanced Operation IR segment m MODE SELECTOR Setting the preset memory function e The various devices can be operated by setting the preset memory on the attached remote control unit For some models the remote control unit or the device may not operate properly In this case use the learning function ES page 84 to store your device s remote control signals in the attached remote control unit 1 X D Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be set in the preset memory Presetting is not possible for the AMP ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 TUNER and SYSTEM CALL modes Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice and the input mode is set Input the 5 digit number for the brand of the device to be set in the preset memory as shown on the list of preset codes 127 End of this manual e The IR segment blinks twice when the memory is set e When a preset code is transmitted the mode indicator for the device to which that code belongs blinks The input mode is
113. under license from Microsoft Corporation Inc This product is covered by one or more of the following In the USA 5 479 168 5 638 074 5 640 161 5 808 574 5 838 274 5 854 600 5 864 311 5 872 531 and in Australia 669114 Other patents pending within the Dolby Digital decoder into the SL SR and SB About IEEE1394 channels and output as 6 1 channels of signals With the AVR 5805Cl the signals further undergo Home THX Cinema processing to achieve a THX Surround EX system Even without the proper environment for playing the SB channel Dolby Digital Surround EX signals are 100 compatible with existing 5 1 channel playback systems so they can be played as such In this case the SB channel signal is produced as a monaural signal from both the SL IEEE1394 is an international standard established by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers of the United States The AVR 5805Cl can be connected to an IEEE1394 compatible device using an IEEE1394 cable to enable digital transfer of multi channel audio sources DVD Audio discs Super Audio and SR channels so none of the signal components are CDs etc with a single cable missing The effects specific to THX Surround EX the sense of spatial expression and the positioning of the sound however are the same as with conventional 5 1 channel surround systems THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdi
114. unit to be learnt on the AVR 5805CI s remote control unit e The display turns on again and the IR segment blinks twice to indicate that the code is successfully captured Other remote control unit The AVR 5805Cl s remote control unit RC 1036 Other buttons can be learnt by repeating steps 4 and 5 The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR button If the IR segment displays one long blink a leaning error has occurred Try repeating this step again until a successful capture occurs Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice and the setting is completed 6 e To cancel the learning setup mode press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds NOTE e Do not try to learn anything to the RC SETUP button Using the system call function e A series of operations can be registered at a single button e This function makes it possible to for example turn the amplifier s power on select the input source turn the monitor power s on turn the source device s power on and start playback all by pressing a single button once e Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL button 1 2 or 3 E Registering Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 8 button 9 gt 7 gt 8 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the system call regi
115. with the AVR 5805Cl s IEEE1394 interface so when connecting a video device connect the video signals as well 38 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the antenna terminals e An F type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly X Direction of broadcasting station A FM ANTENNA AM LOOP ANTENNA Supplied 75 O ohms COAXIAL CABLE E AM loop antenna assembly Connect to the AM antenna terminals Remove the vinyl tie ji and take out the Bend in the reverse connection line direction a With the antenna 3 gt C on top any stable GE EZ surface TY Mount I b With the antenna I attached to a wall I I 7 Installation hole Mount on wall etc A I FM COAX 750 1 Ce zm rd Connection of AM antennas 1 Push the lever 2 Insert the 3 Return the conductor lever FM INDOOR aN Ich ANTENNA gt W gt Supplied AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUND Note to CATV system installer NOTE e This reminder is provided to call the CATV system e Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously installer s attention to Article 820 40 of the NEC which e Even if an external AM antenna is used do not disconnect provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular the AM loop antenna specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the e Make sure AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch grounding s
116. works with software on which a special identification signal is recorded This software is scheduled to go on sale in the future This is a function for automatically playing in the 6 1 channel mode using the surround back speaker s if the software is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES or in the normal 5 1 channel mode without using the surround back speaker s when the software is not recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES When AFDM is set to ON and the EX ES flag is detected automatically the surround mode is fixed according to the playing program source In this case the MODE SB CH OUT parameter can not be selected on the surround parameter screen e OFF When the identification signal is detected automatically and you would like to select the surround mode freely set AFDM to OFF In this case the MODE SB CH OUT parameter can be selected on the surround parameter screen regardless of the playing program source Example When playing software that has a Dolby Digital EX flag When AFDM is set to ON the surround mode is automatically set to the DOLBY DIGITAL PLIIx CINEMA mode The surround parameter screen shown at the below is displayed surround back signals included in the source are played PLIIx Cinema DOLBY D PLIIx C D g CINEMAIE Q 4 OFF gt Processing is per
117. 0 30072 30028 30681 31318 30287 31484 31317 30157 30018 31208 30157 30157 30093 30305 30157 30029 30194 31484 30157 30287 30029 30032 30157 30157 30000 30194 31208 30826 31711 30393 30305 30157 30043 30164 30174 30280 30164 30280 30173 30155 30196 30655 30036 30196 30305 30469 30305 30426 30305 30426 31202 30038 30437 31294 31697 30180 30626 30155 30164 30175 30180 30305 30179 30342 31325 30393 30420 30425 30037 30157 30190 30626 Mission 30157 Sharp 30037 30180 30861 31658 31684 itsubishi 30156 Sherwood 30180 30196 30426 31067 MTC 30420 Shure 30043 usical Fidelity 30393 30437 Siemens 30157 30180 Myryad 30157 Silsonic 30036 30888 AD 30000 31208 Simaudio 30157 Nagaoka 30018 Sonic Frontiers 30157 aim 30157 Sony 30000 30100 30185 30490 30604 30605 Nakamichi 30147 31364 EC 30043 30234 Soundesign 30145 30425 Nikko 30164 30170 30174 STS 30018 SM 30157 Sugden 30157 Oak 30145 Symphonic 30305 Onkyo 30101 30868 31685 TAG McLaren 30157 Optimus 30000 30032 30037 30087 30145 30175 Tandy 30032 30179 30194 30196 30280 30305 30342 Tascam 30420 30420 30426 30437 30468 31063 31075 TDK 31208 Orion 30393 Teac 30174 30180 30393 30420 Panasonic 30029 30207 30303 30752 31682 Tec 30245 Parasound 30194 30420 Technics 30029 30207 30303 Penney 30043 Thomson 30053 Perform
118. 0 06 A E j COR TAPE CDR TAPE dt t f R SES T S DENON LINK connection e High quality digital sound with reduced digital signal transfer loss can be enjoyed by connecting a separately sold DENON LINK compatible DVD player e Digital transfer and multi channel playback of DVD Audio discs and other multi channel sources is possible by connecting the AVR 58O5CI to a DENON DVD player equipped with a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player e When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected be sure to make a setting to DENON LINK with the System Setup Digital In Assignment IGS page 104 Wa AA DVD player gt BOLO ECE KEEN x TE DENON D D ae 1 Zoe e With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken however the digital signals may not be output from the DVD player In this case connect the DVD player s analog multi channel output to the AVR 5805Cl s EXT IN terminals for playback Also refer to your DVD player s operating instructions 35 Connecting Other Sources Connecting eguipment with HDMI terminals e A simple 1 cable connection using a commercially available cable with a device having an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface terminal allows digital transfer of the digital images of DVD Video and other sources and the multi channel sound of DVD Audio and DVD Video e The HDMI and
119. 0 gt A R DH o CENTER SUB WOOFER BS FRONT A R 88 E ZONE2 7 1 channel system e 7 1 channel playback is possible in ZONE2 if 7 1CH is selected for the ZONE2 channel setting at Channel Setup in the System Setup Menu VIDEO OUT AN SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RC 1036 SB SB L R 89 ZONE2 AUDIO OUT VARIABLE OUT Advanced Operation ZONE2 VIDEO signal cable MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable MAIN ZONE 7 1 channel system ZONE2 7 1 channel system Monitor FL FL gpr nnannannannannat C ZONE2 DVD player AVR 5805Cl fo NN 7 TV Monitor _ COMPONENT VIDEO IN CRB PB Poweramplifier 7 1ch AUDIO IN SURROUND L IO EN SURROUND BACK JOP EN Advanced Operation E ZONE2 STEREO MONO system e When two speakers are being used in ZONE2 select STEREO for the ZONE2 channel setting at Channel Setup in the System Setup Menu Stereo sound can be enjoyed in ZONE2 e When only one speaker is being used in ZONE2 select MONO for the ZONE2 channel setting at Channel Setup in the System Setup Menu In this case monaural sound can be enjoyed in ZONE2 ZONE2 VIDEO signal cable MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable MAIN ZONE 9 1 channel system ZONE2 STEREO MONO system Monitor LJ R FL FL P Power amplifier DVD pla
120. 00008 00525 00899 Samsung 00000 00040 00144 01060 Zentek 00400 Scientific Atlanta 00008 00017 00237 00277 00477 00877 01510 01877 SATELLITE Sejin 01602 sat 01300 Signal 00015 00040 Sky 01334 Signature 00011 ABsat 00123 00668 00713 00832 SL Marx 00040 ADB 00642 00887 01259 01367 01473 01491 Sony 01006 01460 01492 01493 01494 01495 Sprucer 00021 Aegir 00520 Starcom 00003 00014 00015 AGS 00668 00710 Stargate 00015 00040 00797 Aiwa 01514 Starquest 00015 Akai 00200 00515 Sumitomo 01500 01504 Akena 00668 Supercable 00276 Alba 00421 00455 00515 00613 00713 Supermax 00883 Aldes 00520 Tadiran 00040 Allsat 00200 01017 01043 Tandy 00258 Allsonic 00369 Tele Danmark 01016 Alltech 00713 Tele 1 00443 Allvision 01232 01334 01412 Telepiu 00443 Alpha 00668 Teleview 00040 AlphaStar 00772 Telewest 01068 01368 Amitronica 00713 Thomson 01110 01256 Ampere 00132 00396 00829 Time Warner cable 01877 Amstrad 00132 00243 00345 00396 00501 00675 Timeless 00040 00689 00713 00742 00795 00847 00863 Tocom 00012 00013 00882 00885 01113 01175 Torx 00003 Anglo 00713 Toshiba 00000 01509 Ankaro 00369 00692 00713 01279 Trans PX 00153 00276 00315 AntSat 01017 01083 TransACT 01106 Anttron 00421 00613 Tri Vision 01257 Apollo 00421 00455 Tristar 00883 Arcon 00692 00834 01043 01075 01205 01279 25 PRESET CODE Arcus 01143 CCE 00345 Arion 01205 Century 00856 Armstrong 00243 Channel Master 00212
121. 0037 10037 10102 i 10512 10435 10030 28 10556 10668 10767 10046 10238 10435 10053 10247 10264 10218 10632 10725 10817 T0520 10039 10264 10208 10264 10163 10808 10411 10163 10072 10235 10247 10610 11437 10455 10706 10785 10259 10292 10499 10556 10108 10150 10817 10282 10371 10638 10641 10726 10754 10421 10180 10185 10412 10226 10264 10412 10418 10216 10217 10374 10721 10264 10579 10362 10411 10362 10374 10610 10180 10418 10587 10703 10707 10779 10795 10217 10280 10374 10661 11037 LG Liesenk amp Tter Liesenkotter Lifetec Lihua Lloyd s Lloytron LOEWE Logik Logix Longjiang Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxman LUXOr LXI ER M Electronic adison Magnadyne agnafon Magnavox agnum Majestic anesth Manhattan arantz Marelli ark Master s asuda Materin 10001 10038 10442 10714 11637 10037 10012 10037 11037 10817 10001 10032 10037 10516 10001 10264 10668 10264 10206 10217 10009 10056 10163 10356 10631 10047 10054 10009 10217 10037 10087 10102 10020 10096 10729 10037 10016 10035 10320 10037 10030 10854 10087 10037 10499 10009 10208 10003 10039 10
122. 009 10009 10362 10039 10702 10032 10217 10003 10054 1217 11254 10412 10714 10180 10037 10037 10282 10206 10037 10321 10037 10037 10037 10039 10287 10698 10872 10030 10180 10036 10092 10374 10367 10072 11756 10698 10808 0036 0359 10009 10055 10516 10217 10218 10180 10264 10259 10363 10264 10355 10455 10264 10371 10208 10264 10216 10218 10056 10178 10335 10748 10768 10054 10096 10060 10092 10178 10179 10817 10411 10093 10163 10092 10146 10363 10650 10011 10036 10060 10072 10556 10621 10706 10727 10320 10374 10411 10487 10531 10579 10455 10698 10865 10870 10171 10381 10093 10178 10217 10218 10163 0721 10037 0154 0629 10216 10051 10156 KISS 10826 11537 Teac Tec Tech Line Techica Technema Technics TechniSat Technisson Technol Ace Technosonic echview Techwood Tecnimagen Teco Tedelex Tek Teknika Telecor Telefunken lelefusion elegazi elemeister elesonic Telestar eletech eleton Televideon eleview Tempest Tennessee Tensai Tenson era Tesla Tevion 10009 10247 10512 10712 11724 10009 10337 10037 10218 10320 10051 10037 10714 10179 10556 10847 10003 10556 10009 10218
123. 0556 10092 10320 10374 10418 10480 10102 10216 10247 Unic Line United Universal Universum Univox Utax V2max V7 Videoseven V7Videoseven Vector Research Vestel ictor ideocon ideologic ideologique ideomac ideosat ideotechnic ideoton idikron idtech iewsonic iking nc ision istar E AA Bee WE lt WE lt WE lt Bee zio Voxson Waltham Wards Warumaia Watson Watt Radio Waycon Wega Wegavox 10037 10037 10027 0009 10104 10177 10290 10418 10535 11037 10037 10163 10865 11755 10880 10030 10037 11163 10036 10508 10216 10218 10009 10247 10217 10356 10054 10019 10724 10046 11756 10032 10206 10864 10087 0037 10443 0000 10021 10054 10111 10178 11147 10374 0009 10668 10102 10156 10036 10037 10455 10606 10037 10421 11437 10087 10163 10053 10218 10264 10320 10036 10857 10037 10361 10885 10163 0109 10668 0016 10024 10055 10135 10179 11156 10661 0037 11037 10216 10037 0011 10105 10191 10346 10544 10714 10178 10548 11756 11037 1347 y 10218 11437 10544 10087 10032 10146 10200 10361 10473 10556 10163 10217 10250 10864 10217 10178 10163 10017 10027 0056 10154 10180 10715 10887 10556
124. 0798 40872 40884 Teletech 40713 40768 Semp 40503 Tensai 40651 40690 40770 Sensory Science 41158 Terapin 41031 Shanghai 40672 Tevion 40651 40768 40798 40833 Sharp 40630 40675 40713 40752 41256 Theta Digital 40571 Sharper Image 41117 Thomson 40522 Sherwood 40633 40717 40741 40770 41043 41077 Tokai 40698 40784 40790 4 PRESET CODE Toshiba 40503 40695 41045 41154 TRANS continents 40826 40831 40872 Tredex 40800 40803 40804 TYT 40705 United 40672 40695 40768 40826 40852 41115 41165 Universum 40591 40713 40741 40869 US Logic 40839 Venturer 40790 Vieta 40705 Vizio 41064 41226 Voxson 40690 40730 40774 40831 Welkin 40831 Wesder 40699 Wilson 40831 Windy Sam 40573 Xbox 40522 XLogic 40768 40798 Xoro 41173 41250 Yamada 40872 41004 41056 41158 Yamakawa 40872 Zenith 40503 40591 40741 40869 Zoece 41265 DVDR Aspire Digital 41168 5 Denon 40490 Digitrex 41056 Funai 40675 41334 Go Video 40741 41158 41304 41730 JVC 41164 LiteOn 41158 41416 41440 Magnavox 40646 Mustek 41730 Panasonic 40490 Pioneer 40631 RCA 40522 Sensory Science 41158 Sony 41033 41431 Zenith 40741 VCR Accent 20072 Adventura 20000 Aiko 20278 Aiwa 20000 20032 20037 20124 20209 20315 20348 20479 Akashi 20072 Akura 20072 Alienware 21972 America Action 20278 PRESET CODE American High 20035 Craig 20037 20047 20072 202
125. 09 10236 10706 10264 10208 10264 10264 10037 10698 10499 10412 10053 10463 10731 10264 10037 10264 10009 10264 10163 10163 10714 10290 10698 10282 10371 10193 10480 10208 10480 10374 10036 10721 10761 10412 10226 10412 10412 10054 10817 10556 10817 10093 10508 11253 10412 10216 10556 10264 10412 10206 10264 10371 11661 10455 10208 10544 10339 10548 10051 IOSA 10817 10817 10848 10145 10821 10634 10193 10576 10817 10217 10374 10361 10282 10339 10346 10548 10610 10346 10361 10606 10610 10092 10156 10817 10156 10264 10218 10371 10606 10653 10218 10282 10661 10817 10421 10606 Kendo ennedy ennex enwood IC ingsley iota ioto Kiton LH HE loss neissel olin Kolster ongque Konichi onka Kontakt orpel Korting otron Koyoda raking Kriesler TV Kuaile ulun Kunlun yoshu yoto L amp S Electronic LaSAT Leader Lecson Legend Lemair Lenco Levis Austria Leyco PRESET CODE 10037 10428 10206 11037 10019 10217 10216 10001 10054 10037 10765 10037 10024 10037 10411 10036 10102 10009 10009 10037 10628 10714 10816 10487 10037 10087 10264 10009 10238 10012 10030 10009 10009 10051 10817 10032 10032 10714 10486 10009 10037 10009 10032 10037 1
126. 10092 10282 11147 10037 10009 10186 10009 10009 10009 10808 10217 10017 10721 10886 10668 10216 10001 10056 10217 10455 10487 10009 10179 10360 10499 10634 11163 10037 10218 10053 10037 10714 10648 10037 10208 10363 0009 10455 11037 10163 10808 10706 10037 10779 10009 0036 10443 10672 10179 10590 10037 10865 10706 10180 10027 10098 10287 11347 10072 10363 10163 10019 10019 10109 10247 10556 0032 10217 10371 10516 10661 10370 10056 10163 10045 10217 10473 10037 10579 10037 10487 10264 10869 10030 10047 10109 10135 10335 10451 11447 11454 10163 10217 10374 10218 10030 10030 10032 10154 10163 10290 10361 10606 10714 10035 10036 O21 80235 10374 10451 10556 10560 10668 10714 10421 10170 10339 10361 10072 10108 10226 10339 10516 10548 10163 10282 10610 10668 10070 10191 10535 10556 10508 10587 10891 11034 10715 10560 10698 10051 10178 10560 10361 10037 10178 10363 10037 10264 10480 10579 10808 10371 10146 10356 10320 10714 10195 10587 10055 10180 10625 10516 10039 10216 10377 10072 10335 10487 10630 11037 10487 10163 10359 10374 10715 10370
127. 10178 11047 11547 10019 10165 10037 10036 10037 10865 10714 10037 10361 10163 10102 T0072 10630 11347 TOZA 10037 10264 10003 10178 10556 10019 10037 10208 10418 10051 10865 10037 T0585 10036 10163 10337 10037 10087 10030 10154 10037 10668 a OIS 10018 10060 10560 11147 10030 10178 10264 10346 10668 10544 10361 10321 10634 11447 10451 10102 10337 10009 10466 10714 10087 10226 10055 10070 10544 10217 10516 10032 10165 10264 11037 10602 10019 10090 10618 11247 10032 10180 10418 10361 11037 10363 10411 T0579 10163 10418 10030 10644 10193 10264 10165 10104 10668 10556 IOUS a MOI eh 10412 MOUS 10030 10092 10625 11347 10039 10548 10370 11037 10180 10056 10556 10668 10180 10486 10039 10374 10412 10247 10200 10039 10428 10038 10093 10679 11447 10621 10714 10217 10668 10052 10412 10817 10250 10361 10047 10579 10047 10135 10753 11454 10154 Rex RFT Rhapsody Ricoh Rinex Roadstar Robotron Rover Rowa Rownsonic Royal Royal Lux Runco Ruyi Saba Saccs Sagem Saige Saisho Saivod Saka Sakyno Salora
128. 10218 10102 10009 10247 10019 10154 10180 10320 10623 10282 10030 10753 10833 10012 10171 10037 10003 10001 10217 10556 10037 10037 10102 11756 10206 10037 10037 10217 10259 10394 10531 10544 10019 10070 10087 10102 a 10171 10774 10037 10773 10238 10435 10185 10037 11661 10037 10320 10264 ODA 06S 10185 10361 10714 10813 10840 10037 10812 10217 10009 10009 10264 10216 10163 10247 10178 10180 10259 10292 10516 10610 10264 10282 10104 10163 10038 10039 10171 VUTA 10236 10247 10370 10371 10030 10217 10264 EES 1O51 10463 11034 10361 10362 10630 10361 10548 10070 10087 LOS ONS 10280 10282 10463 10486 10421 Feilang Feilu Feiyan Feiyue Fenner Ferguson Fidelity Filsai Finlandia Finlux Firstar Firstline Fisher Flint Forgestone Formenti Formenti Phoenix Fortress Fraba Friac Frontech Fujitsu Fujitsu General Funai Furi Futronic Future Futuretech Galaxi Galaxis Ganxin Gateway GBC 10009 10009 10264 10009 10009 10037 10287 10037 10361 10544 10217 10193 10037 10216 10093 10037 0009 10610 10853 10037 10180 10037 10037 10817 11755 10009 0045 10359 0037 10105 10480 10629 10009 0009 10217
129. 10264 10359 10548 10052 10650 10039 10092 10093 10178 1085 10264 10290 10618 10644 10774 10812 20 Sanyo Sanyuan SBR Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scimitsu Scotch Scotland Scott Sears Seaway Seelver SEG GEI Sei Sinudyne Seleco Semivox Semp Sencora Sentra Serino Shancha Shanghai Shaofeng Sharp Shen Ying Shencai Sheng Chia Shenyang Sherwood Shintoshi Shivaki Shogun Shorai PRESET CODE 10011 10036 10108 10145 10159 10180 10280 10339 10508 10544 10893 11154 10009 10093 10012 10037 10037 10361 10714 10012 10037 10247 10259 10556 10648 10019 10178 10163 10019 10178 10047 10054 10159 10171 10556 10634 11037 10009 10036 10217 10218 10668 11037 10087 10102 10037 10087 10163 10206 10363 10371 10180 10156 11356 10009 10035 10093 10455 10264 10412 10009 10208 10848 10145 10817 10009 10030 10093 10157 10386 10491 10720 10818 10003 10009 10009 10145 10009 10093 10009 10264 10009 10037 10037 10178 10019 10179 10045 10146 10208 10370 10555 10817 10193 10374 10070 10361 10668 10179 10056 10178 10037 10264 11163 10177 10102 10259 10411 10610 10817 10226 10032 10696 10374 10165 10516 10851 10092 10264 10179 o OES 10072 10154 10216 1102817 10556 10556 10486 a ON
130. 10650 10853 10208 10226 10706 10780 10891 10238 10320 10019 10021 10047 10051 10178 11347 10163 10216 10030 10032 10092 10096 10247 10370 10774 11661 10012 10017 10030 10032 10080 10087 10187 10191 10374 10423 10774 11154 10216 10320 10080 10087 10037 10039 10038 10109 10361 10423 10760 10866 10339 10714 10092 10374 10516 10412 10761 10108 10367 11310 10163 10508 11410 10264 10817 10412 10821 10370 10027 10056 10030 0060 10282 10320 10037 0145 0418 10054 0178 0451 10019 0037 10092 0193 0556 1454 10486 10193 10706 10163 0428 10020 0051 0108 0200 0690 1756 10216 10712 10166 0486 10715 10783 10815 19 Prinz Prism Profex Profex Fidelity Profi Profitronic Proline Proscan Prosonic Protech Proton ProVision Pulsar Pye Qingdao Quadral Qualcraft Quasar Quelle Questa R Line Radialva Radiola Radiomarelli RadioShack Radiotone Rank Arena RBM RCA Realistic Recor Rediffusion Reflex Relisys Reoc Revox PRESET CODE 10194 10051 10009 10102 10009 10037 10037 10625 10047 10037 10009 10247 11037 10001 10056 10037 10017 10012 10556 10051 10218 10039 10009 10650 10011 10512 10032 10037 10218 10012 10037 10019 10056 10009 10648 10036 10070 10000 10051
131. 1498 01900 Woorisat Worldsat 31 PRESET CODE 01142 00200 00455 00834 01206 00082 01446 00820 00321 00501 00114 00713 01291 01075 01429 00713 00136 00879 00157 01392 00052 00834 00132 01251 00114 00607 01535 01535 01161 00173 00369 00200 00114 00492 01105 00114 01162 00869 00421 00321 00157 00157 00455 00243 00299 00173 00455 00520 00114 01323 01442 00501 01207 00455 01501 01253 00351 00115 00853 01296 00713 01162 01640 00074 00200 00115 00675 00742 01206 00142 00351 00501 01161 00299 00501 00123 01480 01443 00587 01545 00486 01516 01307 00372 00132 01099 00076 00243 00173 00742 01251 01279 00690 00690 00605 00321 00607 00668 01444 00592 00668 00713 00749 00790 01285 01530 01749 00200 00396 00501 OMS OA OS 00238 00722 00724 00299 00397 00571 01087 01099 01251 01283 00710 00713 00818 00829 00351 00372 00396 00638 00690 00710 01012 01251 Kcom Kcom Multimedia XMS Xrypton Xsat Xtreme Yes Zaunkonig Zehnder Zenith Zinwell Zodiac Zwergnase CD Acoustic Research ADC Adcom Advantage Aiwa Akai Arcam Audio Alchemy Audio Dynamics Audio Pro Audio Research Audio Technica Audiolab Audiomeca Audioton
132. 164 40831 41020 41149 40720 40721 41423 Landel Lasonic Lawson LENCO Lenoxx Lexia LG Lifetec Limit LiteOn Loewe Logix Lumatron Lunatron Luxman Luxor Magnasonic agnavox Magnex alata Manhattan arantz Mark arquant Matsui axim MBO DS Mecotek edion MEI emorex Metronic etz Micromedia icromega Microsoft icrostar Minato inax Minerva inoka Minowa intek Mirror itsubishi Mizuda 40826 40798 40768 40651 41165 40690 40699 40591 40651 40768 41058 40511 40705 40705 40741 40573 40713 40651 40503 41165 40782 40705 40539 40713 40770 40651 41730 40713 40690 40778 40770 40630 40831 40790 40695 40690 40525 40503 40539 40522 40831 40752 40713 40705 40770 41165 40717 40752 40521 40770 41173 41127 40768 40831 40783 40769 41159 40713 40872 40539 40839 40713 40699 40741 41158 40539 40741 41004 40539 40672 40730 40651 40831 40571 40713 40770 40774 40778 40790 40801 40869 40036 41416 41440 40741 40833 41115 41730 40646 40675 40713 40821 40695 40713 40884 41004 41730 40770 40774 40783 40820 41270 40713 41403 41521 3 Momitsu Tlogic Mustek x Onda NAD aiko Narita EC Nesa evir NextBase exxTech Nintaus orcent Nordmende oriko
133. 2 10 11 12 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed Cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Attachments Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards Water and Moisture Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool and the like Accessories Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand tripod bracket or table The product may fall causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the product Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer s instructions and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer A product and cart combination should be e moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the product an
134. 20072 20278 Canon 20035 Emerex 20032 Carena 20209 Emerson 20000 20002 20035 20037 20043 20045 Carrefour 20045 20072 20121 20184 20209 20240 20278 Carver 20081 20294 20479 21278 21479 Casio 20000 ESC 20240 20278 Cathay 20278 Ferguson 20000 20041 20278 20320 CCE 20072 20278 Fidelity 20000 20072 20240 20278 20432 CGE 20000 Finlandia 20000 20037 20042 20043 20046 20048 Changhong 20048 20081 20081 20104 20226 Cimline 20072 Finlux 20000 20042 20081 20104 20315 Cineral 20278 Firstline 20037 20043 20045 20072 20209 20278 Citizen 20037 20278 21278 20348 Clatronic 20000 20072 Fisher 20046 20047 20104 Colt 20072 Flint 20209 20348 Condor 20278 Frontech 20072 6 PRESET CODE Fuji 20033 20035 Hypson 20000 20037 20072 20209 20278 Fujitsu 20000 20045 iBUYPOWER 21972 Fujitsu General 20037 mperial 20000 Funai 20000 21333 ngersoll 20209 20240 Galaxis 20278 nno Hit 20072 20432 Garrard 20000 inotech 20278 Gateway MIA nterbuy 20072 GE 20035 20048 20060 20209 20226 20240 nterfunk 20081 20104 20320 20807 21035 21060 nternal 20278 GEC 20081 nternational 20037 20278 20642 General 20045 ntervision 20000 20209 20278 General Technic 20348 R 20041 20042 20045 20047 20072 20081 Genexxa 20104 20104 20209 20226 20240 20348 Gessen 20278 rradio 20072 20081 Go Video 20432 TT 20041 20046 20104 20240 GoldHand 20072 TV 20037 20278 GoldStar 20037 20038 20209 20225 20226 20348 J
135. 4 Advanced gt FFront Small 41 00Kz2 gt Center Small 4 8OHz gt Surround A Small 4 80Hz Surround B Small 4 80Hz S Back Small 4 80Hz LFE 8 OHz gt D e f LFE THK is selected at Subwoofer Setup the frequencies can only be selected for speakers set to Small at Speaker Configuration 2 5 Crossover Frequency 4 Advanced gt Front Large Center Small 40Hz gt Surround A Small 4 80Hz gt Surround B None S Back Small 41 2 0Hz gt KL LEE 80Hz If LFE Main is set at Subwoofer Setup the frequencies can be selected regardless of the speaker size setting Selecting the Surround Speakers for the different surround modes Use this function when using multiple surround speaker combinations for more ideal surround sound Once the combinations of surround speakers to be used for the different surround modes are preset the surround speakers are selected automatically according to the surround mode 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Surround Sp Setup at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Surround Sp Setup screen appears 2 Speaker Setup 1 Speaker Config DOE EY pre Setup 2 Subwoofer Setup MB A B ye Delay Rie MUSIC AB A B 4 Channel Level GAME AB A B 5 Crossover Frequenc WIDE SCREEN A B Deg
136. 40 Amoisonic 20479 Crown 20037 20072 20278 Amstrad 20000 20072 20278 Curtis Mathes 20035 20041 20060 20162 21035 Anam 20037 20162 20226 20240 20278 Cybernex 20240 Anam National 20162 20226 21562 CyberPower 21972 Anitech 20072 Cyrus 20081 Ansonic 20000 Daewoo 20045 20046 20104 20209 20278 20642 Apelsound 20209 21278 Aristona 20081 Dansai 20072 20278 ASA 20037 20081 Daytron 20278 Asha 20240 De Graaf 20042 20046 20048 20081 20104 Asuka 20037 20038 Decca 20000 20067 20081 20209 20348 Audiosonic 20072 20278 Deitron 20278 Audiovox 20037 20278 Dell 21972 Awa 20037 20043 20278 20642 Denko 20072 Baird 20000 20041 20104 Denon 20042 Basic Line 20046 20072 20104 20278 Diamant 20037 Beaumark 20240 Diamond 20209 20348 Beko 20104 Dick Smith Electronics Bell amp Howell 20104 20642 Bestar 20278 Digitor 20642 Black Diamond 20081 20642 DirecTV 20739 Black Panther 20278 Domland 20209 Blaupunkt 20081 20162 20226 DSE 20642 Blue Sky 20037 20072 20209 20278 20348 20642 Dual 20000 20041 20081 20278 20348 Bondstec 20072 Dumont 20000 20081 20104 Brandt 20041 20320 Durabrand 20038 20039 Brandt Electronic 20041 Dynatech 20000 Brandt Electronique 20041 Elbe 20038 20278 Brinkmann 20209 20348 Elcatech 20072 Broksonic 20002 20121 20184 20209 20348 20479 Electrohome 20037 21479 Electrophonic 20037 Bush 20000 20072 20081 20209 20278 20315 Elin 20240 20348 20642 Elsay 20072 Calix 20037 Elta
137. 40741 40869 Smart 40705 40713 RCA 40522 40571 40717 40769 40790 40822 Sonai 40755 41022 41132 Sonashi 40831 REC 40490 Sonic Blue 40783 40869 41099 Recco 40698 Sony 40533 40573 40864 41033 41431 41533 Red Star 40770 41003 Soundmaster 40768 Reoc 40752 40768 Soundmax 40768 Resonance 40651 Soundwave 40783 Revoy 40699 Sova 41122 Rio 40869 Spectra 40872 RJTech 41360 Standard 40651 40768 40831 Roadstar 40690 40699 40713 40730 40833 41051 Star Cluster 40768 Ronin 40872 Strong 40713 Rotel 40558 40623 Sungale 41074 Rowa 40516 40717 40823 40872 41004 Sunkai 40770 40850 Saba 40651 40769 Sunstech 40831 Sabaki 40798 Superscan 40821 Saivod 40831 Supervision 40768 Sakyno 40768 SVA 40672 40717 40860 41105 Salora 40741 Sylvania 40630 40675 40821 41268 Sampo 40698 40752 Symphonic 40675 Samsung 40490 40573 40744 40820 40899 41044 Synn 40768 41075 Tandberg 40713 Sansui 40695 40768 40784 Tatung 40770 Sanyo 40670 40695 40873 Teac 40516 40571 40692 40695 40717 40741 Scan 40705 40850 40768 40790 40809 40833 41051 ScanMagic 40730 Technics 40490 40703 Schaub Lorenz 40770 41115 Technika 40768 40770 40831 41115 41165 Schneider 40539 40651 40705 40713 40774 40783 Technisson 41115 40790 40804 40831 Technosonic 40730 41051 41115 Schwaiger 40752 Techwood 40692 40713 Scientific Labs 40768 40798 Tedelex 40690 40768 41004 Scott 40651 40672 40797 Telefunken 40770 40790 40833 SEG 40713 40768 4
138. 442 01443 01444 01640 01505 01505 00775 01170 01505 01442 01443 01444 01427 01568 01561 01311 01623 01142 01442 01307 01848 01640 01300 01545 01307 01412 EN X2 Ces codes de pr s x3 X4 Lt SAT CBL These preset codes can be recorde DVD These preset codes Ces codes de pr s TV VCR ection peuven ection peuven can be recorde ection peuven ection peuven These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT CBL mode Ces codes de pr s tre enregistr s en mode din the DVD mode tre enregistr s en mode din the TV mode tre enregistr s en mode This preset code can be recorded in the VCR mode Ces codes de pr s tre enregistr s en mode Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory Les codes pr r gl s diff rent en fonctiom des livraison de l usine DVD preset codes Codes pr r gl s DVD 41470 default d faut 40490 DVD 555 DVD 2910 DVD 800 E DVD 755 DVD 3800 DVD 1600 DVD 900 DVD 3910 DVD 2000 DVD 910 DVD 5900 DVD 2500 8 DVD 955 DVD 5910 DVD 3000 DVD 1000 DVD 9000 DVD 3300 DVD 1200 DVM 715 DVD 1500 DVM 1800 3 DVD 1710 DVM 1805 gt DVD 1910 DVM 1815 Z DVD 2200 DVM 2815 Q pvp 2800 DVM 4800 A DVD 2800I DVD 2900 36 PRESET CODE wa wa DENON TOKYO JAPAN www denon com Denon Brand Company D amp
139. 556 10715 10033 10037 10218 11137 10009 10087 10633 10009 10418 10412 10259 10361 10037 10412 10179 10361 11037 10054 10037 10287 10102 10216 10024 10179 10780 10606 10037 10361 10163 10037 10855 10217 10037 10858 10019 10030 10056 10060 10606 10644 10856 11148 10264 10374 11437 10264 10136 10292 10655 10011 10016 10698 10706 10817 10362 10363 10556 10581 10579 10194 10208 10363 10473 11163 10154 10156 10104 10105 10346 10374 10247 10516 10516 10030 10036 10186 10187 10802 11254 10648 10714 10163 10217 10668 11037 10054 10412 11154 10486 10714 10217 10218 10032 10108 10698 11178 10668 10362 10060 10773 11037 10217 10480 10178 10109 10480 10544 10037 10386 11454 10715 10235 10556 10715 10264 10037 a OUE 10700 1265 10714 10512 MOMs 10880 10290 10548 10163 10054 10706 10264 10704 10371 17 Matsui atsushita Matsuviama axam Maxdorf axent MCE ediator Medion egapower Megas egatron MEI eile Melectronic emorex Memphis ercury Mermaid erritt Metronic etz MGA icromaxx icrostar icroTEK idland inato inerva inoka inutz istral Electronics itsubishi Mi
140. 668 10009 10092 10185 10412 10765 10765 10217 10486 10556 10087 10264 10218 10206 10247 10581 10218 10264 10282 10359 10714 10037 10355 10668 10171 10412 10180 10650 10282 10247 11437 10018 10093 10451 10767 10556 10104 10264 10320 p 11037 10163 10216 10218 10371 10418 10443 10714 11037 10177 10218 10264 10433 10516 10581 10250 10628 10700 10292 10370 10428 10019 10030 10052 10108 10178 10179 10628 10879 10633 10714 10715 11 Audiosonic Audioton Audiovox Autovox Aventura Awa Axxent Axxon Baihe Baile Baird Bang amp Olufsen Baohuashi Baosheng Barco Basic Line Bauer Baur Baysonic Bazin Beaumark Beijing Beko Belcor Bell amp Howell BenQ Beon Berthen Best Bestar Bestar Daewoo Binatone Black Diamond Black Panther Black Strip Blaupunkt Blue Sky Blue Star PRESET CODE 10009 10337 10715 10217 10003 10875 10087 10171 10009 10216 10606 10009 10714 10009 10001 10072 10087 10264 10009 10380 10009 10374 10805 10009 10535 10180 10217 10178 10001 10412 10037 10606 10019 10016 11032 10032 10668 10337 10037 10374 10217 10556 10102 10035 10036 10535 10037 10556 11254 10282 10037 7 10370 10264 10092 10206 10011 10217 10698 10264
141. 7 10060 10072 Vector 20045 10163 10178 10191 10208 10216 10217 Vector Research 20038 10218 10264 10361 10363 10371 10377 Victor 20041 20067 21283 10412 10433 10473 10480 10516 10548 Video Concepts 20045 10556 10581 10602 10606 10631 10648 Video Technic 20000 10672 10696 10698 10702 10706 10714 Videomagic 20037 10715 10729 10745 10753 10812 11537 Videosonic 20240 Akashi 10009 Viewsonic 21972 Akiba 10037 10218 10282 10455 Villain 20000 Akira 10037 10418 10556 Voodoo 21972 10 PRESET CODE Akito Akura Alaron Alba Albatron Albiral Alfide Alkos Allorgan Allstar Ambassador America Action Amplivision Ampro Amstrad Anam Anam National Andersson Anex Anglo Anhua Anitech Ansonic AOC Aolingpu Aolinpike Apex Apex Digital Arcam Archer Ardem Aristona ART ASA Asberg Asora Astra Asuka ATD Atlantic Audinac 10037 10102 10672 10035 10206 10037 10177 10180 10217 10751 10009 10362 10648 10003 10861 10055 11163 10037 10009 10051 10009 10009 10556 10003 10060 10180 10858 10264 10156 10748 10216 10003 10037 10037 11037 10070 10102 10009 10037 10217 10698 10001 10180 0009 10412 10179 0009 10235 10487 10700 0037 10668 10216 0036 10843 10217 10370 10037 10371 11037 10009 10250 10421 10264 10037 10104 10
142. 714 10009 10748 10891 10030 10218 10037 10037 10030 10036 10054 10009 10037 10037 10037 10000 10765 10767 10698 11037 10037 10087 10247 RRE 10001 10661 10009 10264 10009 10009 10783 10217 10893 10208 10287 10418 10362 10217 10180 10036 10235 10371 10614 11037 10817 10046 10610 10455 10070 10170 10037 10163 10217 10819 10780 10238 10370 10009 10817 10374 10412 10817 10156 10817 10282 10335 10560 10625 10714 10486 10668 10236 10463 10037 10163 10208 10217 10264 10282 10355 10361 10374 10486 10487 10556 10617 10661 10668 10698 10056 10186 10668 11037 10820 10821 10826 10247 10418 10051 10264 10374 10412 10817 10696 10753 10817 10264 10508 10765 10767 10820 10821 10848 11156 12 Chengdu Ching Tai Chun Yun Chunfeng Chung Hsin Chungfeng Chunsun Cimline Cinema Cineral Citizen City Clairtone Clarion Clarivox Clatronic Clayton CMS CMS Hightec 10009 10817 10003 10009 10000 10003 10700 10843 10009 10264 10036 10053 10412 10009 10817 10009 10218 10672 10092 10451 10030 10039 10186 10280 10009 10185 10180 10037 10070 10009 10037 10264 10320 10606 10648 11037 10216 10217 Commercial Solutions 10047 11447 Concerto Condor Conia Con
143. 79 21479 Toshiba 41045 Citizen 21278 Sharp X4 20807 Colt 20072 Curtis Mathes 21035 CABLE PVR Combination x1 Daewoo 21278 Americast 00899 Emerson 20002 20294 20479 21278 21479 Digeo 01187 Funai 20000 21333 Freebox 01482 GE 20240 20807 21035 21060 General Instrument 00476 00810 GoldStar 21237 Jerrold 00476 00810 Harley Davidson 20000 Motorola 00476 00810 01106 01187 01376 Hitachi 20000 Nokia 01569 Lloyd s 20000 Pace 00237 01877 Magnasonic 21278 Pioneer 00877 01877 agnavox 20000 21781 RCA 01256 Magnin 20240 Scientific Atlanta 00877 01877 emorex 20162 21237 Sony 01006 MGA 20240 Supercable 00276 itsubishi 20043 20807 Thomson 01256 35 PRESET CODE Zenith 00899 DBS PVR Combination x1 sat 01300 Atsat 01300 British Sky Broadcasting 01175 Canal Satellite 01339 Comag 01412 Digiturk 01076 DirecTV 00099 01392 Dish Network System 00775 Dishpro 00775 Dream Multimedia 01237 Echostar 00610 Euro 01278 Expressvu 00775 Force 01194 Foxtel 01356 GbSAT 01214 Grundig 01150 Hughes Network Systems 01142 Humax 01176 Hyundai 01159 JVC 01170 Kathrein 01221 Maximum 01334 Motorola 00869 Nokia 01310 Opentel 01412 Pace 01423 Panasonic 01320 Philips 00099 Proscan 00392 RCA 01392 Rebox 01214 Sagem 01253 Samsung 01442 SKY 01175 Skyplus 01412 Sony 00639 Star Choice 00869 Strong 01158 Thomson 01900 Topfield 01206 eS 01253 Zehnder 01075 00392 00639 01076 01142 01377 01
144. ABE SBR 10 Oft L10 V J Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the speaker to be set Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to set the distance between the center speaker and listening position Example When the distance is set to 10 0 feet for the center speaker 2 3 Delay Time Step 4 Int D Default Yes 4 au F FL 4 12 Dt sue Rico 12 0ft D EC 10 0ft a SW 12 Oft ai ee e LE M J x The distance changes in units of 1 foot or 0 1 foot each time the button is pressed Select the value closest to the measured distance x When Step is selected you can select the unit of 1 ie OLA inal OF POL ie OO inn When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values x The difference of the distances set for the various speakers must be 20 0 ft 6 0 m or under If an inappropriate distance is set RELOCATE BLINKING SP is displayed In this case move the relevant speaker to the proper position as indicated by the displayed value RELOCATE BLINKING SP Step 4 1ft gt wm Default Yes 4 Sg ei E FL 12 Oft FR 12 Oft C 10 Oft 6 y COE A ABB 3 W J Advanced Setup Part 2 Setting the Channel Level Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup
145. Arnion 01300 Chaparral 00053 00209 00216 ASA 00397 Cherokee 00123 00710 01480 Asat 00200 Chess 00114 00713 01085 01334 ASCI 00114 01334 CityCom 00115 00299 00607 00818 01075 01176 ASLF 00713 01232 AssCom 00853 Claasen Nachrichten 00520 AST 00321 00351 Clark 00613 Astacom 00668 00710 Clemens Kamphus 00396 00834 Aston 00142 01261 CNS 01367 Astra 00243 00607 00713 CNT 00520 Astrastar 00548 Cobra 00396 Astro 00133 00173 00358 00369 00501 00520 Colombia 00132 00668 00548 00607 00613 00658 01099 01100 Columbia 00132 Onis Columbus 00668 Athena 00668 Comag 00132 01232 01412 Atsat 01300 Condor 00369 00607 AtSky 01334 Connexions 00396 Audioline 01429 Conrad 00115 00132 00369 00501 00607 Audioton 00613 Conrad Electronic 00607 Aurora 00642 00879 Cosat 00592 Austar 00497 00642 00863 00879 01173 01259 Crossdigital 01109 Avalon 00396 Crown 00243 Axiel 00668 00710 Cryptovision 00455 Axis 00369 00834 00880 01111 Cyfra 01076 Beko 00455 Cyrus 00200 Bentley Walker 01017 D box 00723 00873 Best 00369 Daeryung 00396 Bestar 00243 Daewoo 00421 00713 01111 01296 Black Diamond 01284 Daumling 00794 Blaupunkt 00173 Delfa 00863 Blue Sky 00713 00885 Deltasat 01075 Boca 00132 00243 00713 00794 00829 01232 Dgtec 01242 01542 Boston 00132 00668 00710 Digatron 01294 Brainwave 00692 01294 Digena 01100 British Sky Broadcasting Digenius 00299 01161 00847 01175 01847 Digiality 00607 Broco 00713 Digipro 01105 Bsk
146. B FR 0 0B SBL 0 0dB SW 0 0B SL 0 0dB FRONT gt REAR 96 Advanced Operation ZONE2 Surround USER MODE function of ZONE2 e When ZONE2 is used with a 5 1 or 7 1 channel system various surround modes can be selected according to the program source being played e The desired sound field can be achieved by adjusting the parameters for the various Surround modes Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Select the surround mode for each input channel OI STANDARD Dolby Digital DTS Surround mode SC Remote control unit D DSP surround simulation mode Remote control unit Xx The surround mode switches in the following order each time the DSP SIMULATION button is pressed WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB VIDEO GAME MONO MOVIE CLASSIC CONCERT 3 STEREO mode VIRTUAL MATRIX 4 5CH 7CH STEREO mode 7CH Remote control unit Remote control unit See pages 49 54 58 61 for a description of the features of the various surround modes Xx The following surround modes can be selected in ZONE2 STEREO STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND 5 7CH STEREO WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME MATRIX and VIRTUAL Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the various surround parameters
147. B video range data range of 16 black to 235 white e Enhanced Signals are output via the HDMI output terminal with a digital RGB video range data range of O black to 255 white When the HDMI terminal is connected the black may seem to stand out depending on the TV or the monitor In this case set this to Enhanced When Y Cb Cr is selected under Color Space RGB Mode Setup will have no effect The Aspect setting is valid when the resolution is set to 1080i 720p or 1080p To output with other resolutions set the aspect ratio on the TV When Through is set the signal is output with the same resolution as input from the video S Video and component video terminals The OSD however is output with a resolution of 480i so use a monitor compatible with this resolution This mode is suited for playing back 16 9 video e NORMAL A black band is added to the left and right of the input video and the video is output This mode is suited for playing back 4 3 video 113 3 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears Advanced Setup Part 1 I e Color Space and RGB Mode Setup are only displayed when Analog to HDMI Convert is set to ON e When connecting to an HDCP compatible monitor equipped with DVI D terminal using an HDMI DVI D converter cable the signals are output in RGB format regardless of the Co
148. BL 20278 21237 Jensen 20041 Goodmans 20000 20037 20072 20081 20209 20278 JMB 20209 20348 20348 20642 Joyce 20000 GPX 20037 JVC 20041 20045 20067 20081 21008 21283 Gradiente 20000 Kaisui 20072 Graetz 20041 20104 20240 ambrook 20037 Granada 20000 20037 20042 20046 20048 20081 Karcher 20081 20278 20104 20226 20240 EC 20037 20278 Grandin 20000 20037 20072 20209 20278 Kendo 20072 20209 20278 20315 20348 20642 Gronic 20104 enwood 20038 20041 20067 Grundig 20072 20081 20226 20320 20347 20348 KIC 20000 Haaz 20348 imari 20047 Hanseatic 20037 20038 20081 20209 Kioto 20348 Haojie 20240 LH 20072 Harley Davidson 20000 Kneissel 20037 20209 20278 20348 Harman Kardon 20038 20081 odak 20035 20037 Harwood 20072 Kolin 20041 20043 HCM 20072 olster 20209 Headquarter 20046 Korpel 20072 Hewlett Packard 21972 uba Electronic 20047 Hher 20278 20642 Kyoto 20072 HI Q 20047 Lenco 20278 Hinari 20041 20072 20240 20278 Leyco 20072 Hischito 20045 LG 20037 20038 20042 20045 20209 21237 Hitachi 20000 20037 20041 20042 20046 Lifetec 20209 20348 20081 20089 20240 20040 Linksys 21972 Hornyphon 20081 Lloyd s 20000 Howard Computers 21972 Loewe 20037 20081 20162 21562 HP PD Logik 20072 20209 20240 Hughes Network Systems Lux May 20072 20042 20739 Luxor 20043 20046 20047 20048 20104 20315 Humax 20739 LXI 20037 Hush 21972 M Electronic 20000 20038 7 PRESET CODE Magnasonic agnavox Magnin
149. C 00605 00369 00520 00607 LLUSION sat 01557 Legend 00269 iLo 01535 Lemon 00692 01461 mex 00084 00136 00520 Lenco 00115 00369 00421 00607 00628 00692 mperial 01429 00713 ndovision 00887 Lennox 00592 ngelen 00114 00396 00882 Lenson 00501 nnova 00099 Leyco 00515 nternational 00132 00243 LG 01075 01226 01414 nterstar 01017 01105 01214 Lifesat 00132 00157 00299 00369 00605 00713 ntertronic 00243 01043 01122 ntervision 00592 00607 00628 Lifetec 00587 nVideo 00871 Lodos 01284 Q 00210 Loewe 00243 QO Prism 00210 Logix 01017 01075 R 00173 00282 00331 00358 00455 Lorenzen 00132 00299 00607 00692 00742 00794 rdeto Technology 00879 00867 01161 01294 SkyB 00887 Lupus 00369 taltel 00871 Luxor 00345 00501 00573 Jadeworld 00642 M vision 01557 Jaeger 01334 agnavox 00722 00724 Janeil 00152 Manata 00132 00136 00417 00668 00710 00713 JOK 00690 00710 anhattan 00455 00520 00592 00834 01017 01083 Jolly 00592 Marantz 00200 JVC 00492 00515 00571 00775 01170 01507 arave 00417 01531 01775 Mascom 00520 K SAT 00713 aspro 00173 00571 00692 00713 00750 01530 Kamm 00713 00880 Mastec 01334 Kaon 01300 atsui 00173 00571 00710 01284 KaTelco 01111 Matsushita 00500 28 PRESET CODE Max aximum MB DS Mediacom ediamarkt MediaSat edion Medison ega Melectronic emorex Metronic etz Micro icro electronic Micromaxx icrostar Microtec inerva Mitsubishi organ s
150. CURSOR lt button to select Yes 5 4 Manual EQ Curve Flat Base Curve Copy DG No XX Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Manual EQ screen reappears 6 4 Manual EQ Flat Default Yes4 Base Curve Copy4 GAdiust CH L R CH gt Exit X The type of the copied correction curve is displayed in the upper right of this screen E e f the Auto Setup procedure has not been performed this item is not displayed Advanced Setup Part 1 Zone Setup ZONE2 5 1 7 1ch e Make the settings related to surround playback and video for ZONE2 e Adjust the sound played in ZONE3 and ZONE4 P e When STEREO or MONO is selected for the ZONE2 channel output setting at Channel Setup ES page 126 128 the menu screen displayed differs In this case see the instructions starting at page 125 Setting the type of speakers for ZONE2 e Set the presence absence of speaker combinations and the size in function of the low frequency reproduction capabilities when playing surround sound in ZONE2 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Zone Setup at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e The Zone Setup menu appears System Setup Menu Auto Setup Room EQ Sone Setup Speaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup 1 S Speaker Config 4 5 Advanced P
151. CURSOR lt or gt button to select the equalizer setting e Set the Room EQ setting with All or Assign for each surround mode OFF The Equalizer is not used Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Audyssey Room EQ Setup at the Auto Setup Room Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics EQ menu then press the ENTER button e The Room EQ Setup screen appears Front Adjusts the frequency response of the surround speakers to match the characteristics of the front 1 2 Room EQ Setup channel speakers Relation To Flat The Surround Mode Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to ESEN gt Assign the flattest response This mode is suitable for multi channel music surround sound sources Auto Setup Room EQ 1 Auto Setup 2 Room EQ Setup 3 Direct Mode Setup 4 Mic Input Select 5 Parameter Check Exit Manual Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ Setup Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select For details of the Manual EQ Setup IEP page All or Assign 118 119 All ee Zerf 0 Sets the Equalizer for all surround modes When Assign is selected PE After completing system setup select the Assign S S o Sets the Egualizer individually for each surround 2 desired equalizer setting pressing the ROOM mode EQ button e Equalizer settings for the ind
152. Crossover Frequency 6 Video Setup 7 Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev Exit Example When ZONE2 is set for a STEREO or MONO 6 Zone Setup GI Zone2 Tone Ch Lev 2 Zone3 Tone Ch Lev 3 Zone4 Tone Ch Lev 4 Video Setup P e For instructions on making the settings ES page 120 125 Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to surround sound playback in ZONE2 E Test Tone e Before playing with the surround function be sure to use the test tones to adjust the playback level from the different speakers This adjustment can be performed with the system setup ES page 122 123 or from the remote control unit as described below e Adjusting with the remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the Auto mode and only effective in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND modes The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press the TEST TONE button e The Test Tone screen appears Advanced Operation Tes t Tone Auto Zone 2 om GFL 4 0 OdB gt 0 0 OB Zee FR 0 0d SR 0 OB D SL 0 ob a sw 0 048 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume After completing the adjustment press the TEST TONE button again E Channel Level e After adjusting using the test tones adjust the channel lev
153. DCP unless the other equipment supports HDCP e The output format of the connected player e Check whether the output format of the 36 37 HDMI DVI FORMAT does not matche the connected player HDMI DVI FORMAT supported input format of connected monitor matches the supported input format of equipments connected monitor equipments e The AVR 5805CI does not play HDMI audio e Set the HDMI audio playback setting at the 111 112 NEP signals HDMI DVI In Assign settings to AMP The MDM audo IS ee CUE e The HDMI audio signals are not output from e Set the HDMI audio playback setting at the 111 112 the connected monitor device HDMI DVI In Assign settings to TV e The set s internal temperature has risen and e Put the AVR 5805CI1 in a well ventilated place 16 the protection circuit has been activated e Turn off the power then wait for the set to 16 fully cool off before turning the power back on Power has turned off and the e The core wires of the speaker cables are e Check the connections of all the speaker 16 power indicator is flashing red touching each other or the AVR 5805Cl s rear cables panel activating the protection circuit e AVR 5805Cl1 is malfunctioning e Turn off the power and contact a DENON 16 customer service center So ndisony produced Kone ihe e You are playing a monaural source TV AM e When playing monaural sources select a 61 63 A r gt ah radio broadcast etc in the DOLBY DTS sur
154. DENON AV SURROUND RECEIVER AVR 5805CI OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FCC INFORMATION For US customers RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION To REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance WARNING To REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE 1 COMPLIANCE INFORMATION Product Name AV Surround Receiver odel Number AVR 5805Cl This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to he following two conditions 1 this product may not cause harmful interference and 2 this product must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Denon Electronics USA LLC a D amp M Holdings Company 00 Corporate Drive ahwah NJ 07430 2041 Tel 800 497 8921 2 IMPORTANT NOTICE DO
155. DTS compatible sources be sure to connect the source component to the digital input terminals OPTICAL COAXIAL and set the input mode to DIS Basic Operation ROOM EQ E Input mode indicator Depending on the input signal e In the AUTO mode Van AUTO DENON LINK IEEE 1394 e In the DIGITAL PCM mode PCM DENON LINK LIEEE 1394 e In the DIGITAL DTS mode DTS DENON LINK IEEE 1394 e In the ANALOG mode ANALOG e In the EXT IN mode EXT IN E Input signal indicator e DOLBY DIGITAL e DTS DA DIGITAL ca DIG DIG Depending on the input signal e PCM e The DSD indicator lights when the DENON LINK or IEEE1394 have been connected and the DSD signals have been input ES page 35 38 DSD J PCM DIG HDCD Depending on the input signal e The HDCD indicator lights when digital signals are being input with a player that supports HDCD playback x The DIG indicator lights when digital signals are being input properly If the DIG indicator does not light check whether the Digital In Assign IS page 104 and connections are correct and whether the component s power is turned on x AL24 processing is activated when PCM signals are played while the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO MULTI CH PURE DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT or
156. Dial Norm is a feature of Dolby Digital which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital programs When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital sometimes you may see a brief message in the front panel display which will read Dial Norm X dB X being a numeric value The display is showing how the program level relates with THX calibration level If you want to play the program at calibrated theatrical levels you may wish to adjust the volume For example if you see the following message Dial Norm 4 dB in the front panel display to keep the overall output level at THX calibrated loudness just turn down the volume control by 4 dB However unlike a movie theater where the playback loudness is preset you can choose your preferred volume setting for best enjoyment Display Night mode When listening at night or at lower volumes the night mode improves listenability Press the NIGHT button on the remote control unit to enter the night mode P e Canceling night mode Press the NIGHT button again e The night mode only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital e When the night mode is set to ONT the D COMP surround parameter can not be selected 55 Basic Operation SURROUND PARAMETER GAME STANDARD CINEMA CURSOR ENTER MUSIC Dolby Pr
157. E 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup gt ZONE2 STEREO MONO MONO STEREO STEREO MONO MONO ZONE4 MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL PRI FR ET FL RI FR LT FL RI FR YLT FL RI FR LT FL PRT FR JLT FL RT FR LI FL YR FR 12 C R2 Z4M L2 C R2 Z2M L2 C R2 Z4M L2 C R2 L2 C R2 Z4M L2 C R2 Z2M L2 C j R2 Z4M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SRA L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SRA L4 Z2 L R4 Z2R L4 Z4L R4 Z4R L4 Z2M R4 L4 Z2L R4 Z2R 14 Z2L R4 Z2R 14 Z4L R4 ZAR 14 22M R4 L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBRYL5 Z4L R5 Z4R L5 R5 15 RS 15 R5 e Amp Assign mode ZONE2 3 4 MAIN ZONE 7 1 CH 5 1 CH KE ZONE2 MONO STEREO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO MONO MONO ZONE3 MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO MONO ZONE4 MONO MONO STEREO STEREO MONO MONO STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR LT FL YR FR L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL R1 FR YLT FL YR1 FR LT FL R1 FR LI FL Bi FR L2 C R2 Z2M L2 C R2 Z4M L2 C R2 Z3M L2 C R2 Z2M L2 C R2 Z3M L2 C R2 Z2M L2 C R2 Z2M
158. E ZONE4 mode X pi The EL display switches as shown below with respect to To operate the ZONEA function the selected mode E AMP mode To operate the MAIN ZONE function E SYSTEM CALL mode To operate the System call function P e This function provides the ability to program a series of individual remote control codes into a macro stored under one of the number pad s numeric choices 127 page 84 85 43 Basic Operation SOURCE FUNCTION MATER VOLUME 6 ROOM ER Les HOME THX CINEMA SPEAKER HOME THX CINEMA VIDEO ON OFF VIDEO SELECT SCALE SURROUND SPEAKER THA SES ee Sf MATER VOLUME TE PHONES MONITOR SELECT ROOM EQ Playing the input source x The volume can be adjusted within the range of 80 0 to 18 0 dB in steps of 0 5 dB However when the channel level is set CS page 64 65 or 134 if the volume for any channel is set at 0 5 dB or greater the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 0 dB In this case the maximum volume adjustment range is 18 0 dB Select the input source to be played e The input source indicator lights Example an Maximum value of channel level FUNCTION Also you may not be able to adjust the volume to the N LE maximum of 18 0 dB when internal volume D compensation control is activated due to the SZ z r combination of the surround mode and
159. ELECTOR button for the device to be punched through TV or SAT CBL Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice and the setting is completed Setting the back light s lighting time 1 2 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 3 button 9 gt 7 3 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the backlight lighting time setting mode is set Press the NUMBER button of 1 to 5 you want to set the lighting time e The IR segment blinks twice Lighting time 1 5 sec 10 sec factory default aD Sec 20 sec 25 sec RUN Setting the brightness e The brightness of the display can be adjusted in 5 steps Default level 3 e First set the auto brightness adjustment setting to OFF 1 2 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the CHANNEL button e Press the button to increase the brightness 1 step e Press the button to decrease the brightness 1 step Advanced Operation Ki CH La Kr SYSTEM CALL 18 a a Resetting the remote control unit Resetting the learning function E Resetting for individual buttons Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 6 button 9 gt 7 6 in that order e The IR segment bli
160. EQ menu appears 1 Auto Setup Room EQ GI Auto Setup 2 Room EQ Setup 3 Direct Mode Setup 4 Mic Input Select Exit J Press the CURSOR or V button to select Auto Setup then press the ENTER button e The Auto Setup screen appears ao cata Gatae 9 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphone at ear height at main listening position Extra Setup Channel 9 1CH FStarti L Cancel p X The message Connect Microphone is displayed if no microphone is connected If so connect the auto setup microphone e f no operation is performed for approximately 3 minutes during the auto setup procedure the screensaver is launched The screensaver is canceled if any one of the CURSOR ENTER or SYSTEM SETUP button is pressed 22 Easy Setup and Operation Extra Setup Preliminary measurements e The AVR 5805CI has ten available amplifier channels some of which can be assigned for powering speakers in ZONE2 ZONE3 and ZONE4 depending on the speaker system complement in the main room If this functionality is not needed skip this Extra Setup procedure and proceed to Preliminary Measurements e By default the speaker system setting Is set to 9 1 channels 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Extra Setup then press the CURSOR lt button e Switch to the Extra Setup screen 1 1 Auto Setup 1 1 Extra Setup
161. EREO Main unit Remote control unit Example DSP surround simulation mode SA Main unit Remote control unit The surround mode switches in the following order each time the DSP SIMULATION button is pressed DSP SIMULATION WIDE Pa SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA MATRIX JAZZ CLUB VIDEO GAME MONO MOVIE CLASSIC CONCERT Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears ROCK ARENA w dmedium gt EFFECT410 gt See D TONE 4 a SB CH OUT A4B8A ON lt gt OFF Default Yes X The screen for the selected surround mode appears 61 Basic Operation DSP SIMULATION 9CH STEREO ENTER eas io CURSOR SURROUND PARAMETER Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the various surround parameters Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the parameters setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting Q RG P e The OCH STEREO display changes as shown below according to the surround back speaker setting SURROUND BACK SURROUND SPEAKER SPEAKERSETTING DISPLAY oN A B 9CH STEREO Aor B 7CH STEREO A B 7CH STEREO OFF i A or B 5CH STEREO e Select Default Yes and press the CURSOR lt button to reset all the settings Basic Operation SURROUND PARAMETER CURSOR T DEFEAT ENTER SURROUND TONE CON
162. Freguency various speakers is to be output from the subwoofer Jse this function when using multiple Surround THX DOLBY THX DOLBY THX WIDE 9 CH DSP MULTI CH surround speaker combinations for more ideal S Surround surround sound Once the Gombinations of mode DTS CINEMA DTS MUSIC DOLBY GAME SCREEN STEREO SIMULATION MODE Speaker surround speakers to be used for the different 146 147 Setup surround modes are preset the surround Surround speakers are selected automatically according speaker A A A A B A B A B A to the surround mode Boundary Gain When using a THX Ultra2 compatible ya subwoofer set the subwoofer s THX Ultra2 Subwoofer NO 147 ii Compensation THY Audio freguency response Setup Surround Back 1 Wien using two surround back Speaker speakers set the distance of the two The Distance Between SBL SBR 0 ft to 1 ft 0 m to 0 3 m 148 Position speakers 153 Advanced Setup Part 2 3 Audio Input Setup Audio Input Setup Default settings Page p EE Input co ovo vop w oes ver vor z vera vera CDRI VAUX Digital In This assigns the digital input terminals for the Source 104 Assignment different input sources igi g p Digital COAX COAX COAX COAX COAX OPT1 opt2 op
163. G Surround Sp Setup 9CH STEREO A B NIS TO EE DSP SIMULATION A B MI Exit MULTI CH MODE B A B L 4 146 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the surround mode then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the surround speaker A When surround speakers A is used B When surround speakers B is used A B When both surround speakers A and B are used Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears a e For the WIDE SCREEN and OCH STEREO DSP simulation modes the surround speakers can be set separately e See page 105 for the selection of the surround speakers when the ANALOG mode is selected at EXT IN Setup Settings the THX Audio Setup E Settings for using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer e Make these settings when Yes is selected for the subwoofer in the Speaker Configuration settings This option is not available when No is selected ES page 140 141 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select THX Audio Setup at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The THX Audio Setup screen appears 2 Speaker Setup 7 N Speaker Config 2 7 THX Audio Setup Subwoofer Setup Delay Time Channel Level 1 S Boundary Gain 4 5 Crossover Frequenc 6 G7 E Compensation Surround Back Surround Sp Setup Speaker Position THX Audio Setu
164. GS Slab 10714 10180 10146 10179 10102 10362 11437 10206 10206 10264 10435 10264 10036 10198 10650 igs 10179 10412 10236 10443 10236 10817 10451 10088 10156 10217 10412 10721 10548 OZ 10394 11037 10154 10163 10487 10516 10516 10346 10412 10039 10200 10688 10104 ONSA 10264 10486 107997 10606 10218 10544 S7 10156 10216 10634 10544 10544 10362 10817 10053 10256 10689 Show Siarem Siemens Siera Siesta Signature Silva Silva Schneider Silver SilverCrest Simpson Singer Sinotec Sinudyne Skantic SKY Skygiant Skysonic Skyworth Sliding SLX Smaragd Soemtron Solavox Sole Sonawa Songba Soniko Sonitron Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound amp Vision Soundesign Soundwave Sowa Spectra Spectricon Squareview Ssangyong 10009 10087 10032 10200 10012 10370 10016 10037 10037 10036 11037 10186 0009 10371 11537 10544 10356 10037 10180 10696 10009 10748 10865 10512 10487 10865 10032 10813 10218 10009 10037 10208 10009 10163 10009 10000 10093 10157 11100 10102 10178 10032 10036 10226 10009 10003 10171 10009 10264 0087 10072 10102 10037 10361 10216 10037 10187 10087 10433 10418 10102 10282 10753
165. H OUT parameter is set to OFF Set SP Back at the System Setup to None Display Pro Logic II Cinema mode Pro Logic II Music mode Pro Logic II Game mode Dolby Pro Logic mode Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the various surround parameters Example DOLBY PLIIx Music mode screen DOLBY PLIIx MODE DOLBY PLIIx MUSIC m E OPTIONAL PARAMETERS a e ES D COMP OFF SC SE PANORAMA D 4 gt a eee SB cH ouT DIMENSION 3 SE u gt OFF crak veg CENTER WIDTH 4 3 gt Xx When set with the on screen display while in the MUSIC mode set the BE mark to OPTIONS ai pressing the CURSOR A or V button then press the CURSOR lt button Press the ENTER button to return to the previous screen parameters setting x Default setting Press the CURSOR lt button to select Default Yes then parameters set to default setting MODE D 4 P LTI x CINEMA CINEMAJE Q 4IOFF D COMP OFF TONE 4 v v v SB CH_OUT 4 OFF Default e J Rag Be Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting I e The Dolby Pro Logic IIx Pro Logic II Cinema Music or Game mode can be chosen directly by pressing the CINEMA MUSIC or GAME button
166. Hifi 30420 Thorens 30157 Philips 30157 30287 30626 Thule Audio 30157 Pioneer 30032 30101 30305 30468 31062 31063 Tivoli Audio SHI 31087 Tokai 30164 30420 PMG 30164 Toshiba 31693 Polk Audio 30157 Traxdata 30626 Poppy 30164 Universum 30053 30157 30437 Proceed 30420 Vector Research 30194 30417 Proton SOS Victor 30072 QED 30157 Wards 30000 30032 30053 30087 30157 30179 Quad 30157 Yamaha 30000 30032 30036 30037 30170 30187 Quasar 30029 30888 31292 Radiola 30157 Yoko 30194 RadioShack 31075 Yorx 30461 RCA 30009 30032 30053 30155 30179 30305 Zonda 30157 30420 30468 30764 31062 Realistic 30155 30164 30175 30179 30180 30420 CDR Restek 30157 Classic 31297 Revox 30157 Denon 30626 30766 31868 Roadstar 30461 Fisher 31325 Roksan 30420 GPX 31296 Rotel 30157 30420 Harman Kardon 31202 Royal 30164 30420 JVC 30072 31294 SAE 30157 Kenwood 30626 Sansui 30157 30202 30305 LG 31208 Sanyo 30087 30179 30342 Marantz 30626 SAST 30157 NAD 31208 Scott 30155 30164 30305 Philips 30626 Sears 30305 Pioneer 31062 31087 33 PRESET CODE RCA Sony TDK Teac Yamaha TAPE Aiwa Akai Arcam Carver Denon Fisher Garrard Genexxa GoldStar Grundig Harman Kardon Inkel JVC Kenwood LG Luxman agnavox Marantz emorex Mitsubishi yryad Onkyo Optimus Orion Panasonic Philips Phonotrend Pioneer Polk Audio Radiola RCA Revox Sansui Sanyo Sharp Sherwood Siemens Sonic Sony TaeKwang Tandberg
167. In Assign SEE BTN Sep 1 2 EKT IN Setup 3 Input Function Lev 4 Function Rename KE S 5 EEE1394 Assign pais UNGA 6 1EEE1394 Auto Func 7 Tuner Presets SE SE Exit K J Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input terminal then press the ENTER button e Switch to the setting screen Press the CURSOR or V button to select the item to be set then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the parameter 3 2 EXT IN 1 Setup GMode 4 DSP gt Surr B NOT USED gt S Back NOT USED SW Level 4 15dB Input ATT 4 OFF gt a Mode e DSP The analog input signal is converted into a digital signal and undergoes DSP processing System Setup settings Speaker Configuration Delay Time etc are reflected in the same way as for other input signals The surround playback mode button functions e ANALOG The analog input signal is played without DSP processing SW and center channel Down mixing is conducted by the analog circuit Surround and surround back channels Not output if No is selected at the Speaker Configuration Delay Time Not reflected S Back Set when Mode is set to DSP Select according to the specifications of the player being used Also refer to the player s operating instructions e NOT USED Select when neither SBL or SBR is connected e SB SBL Select when only one surround back channel SBL is connected e SBL SBR Sel
168. KI t a Ne PPR RPP a a dRRRRnnRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR LEUUUUUEUUUUUEUUEUUEU DEEL v CEET 7 Option Setup OR 1 Channel Setup membe CS Page 126 128 2 Power Amp Assign 7777 777 oP page 129 133 3 Volume Cont rol zczzcoccosctzccn page 134 4 Trigger Ou ttres a page 135 5 AC Outlet Assign 7 ER 136 6 Setup Memory Lock EST page 7 Network Setup iii Ke page 137 L Exit L page 138 139 o 1 Auto Setup Room EQ CH 152 41 42 43 145 46 47 48 107 119 123 124 125 GI Auto Setup zeen eR page 20 26 2 Room EQ Setup sa Page 149 3 Direct Mode Setup Tue page 150 4 Mic Input Select ton age 150 5 Parameter Check 1 ees Le page 151 L Exit 2 Speaker Setup GI Speaker Conf ig AS Page 140 2 Subwoofer Setup oe page 141 3 Delay Time hb IOS page 142 4 Channel Level 7 F 3 P 43 5 Crossover Frequency ee E P39 6 Surround Sp Setup Le page 145 7 THX Audio Setup 7 Le page 146 Ki Exit i page 147 3 Audio Input Setup Gi Digital In Assign 4 4G Page 104 2 EXT IN Setup etre pe page 05 3 Input Function Lev Tee page 06 4 Function Rename rocken 5 1EEE1394 Assign t GE EE 6 1EEE1394 Auto Func un Page 107 7 Tuner Presets e CN page 108 Exit
169. Language press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select PC language 7 7 Network Option Standby Mode Power Saving 4ON gt PC Language 4 3 Checking the MAC Address e The AVR 5805Cl s MAC address is displayed e The MAC address differs for each set 7 7 Network Option D Standby Mode 4ON gt Power Saving PC Language 4 eng gt MAC Address 0005cd 10d901 If the check ends press the ENTER button e The Network Setup menu reappears Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Option Setup menu reappears Advanced Setup Part 2 e This Speaker Setup section describes the procedures to make speaker settings manually without using the Auto Setup function as well as to make manual changes to settings that have already been made by the Auto Setup function SYSTEM SETUP CURSOR TEST TONE SYSTEM SETUP 0 CURSOR ENTER S gt ENTER Speaker Setup e f the Auto Setup procedure has already been performed there is no need to make this setting e Perform this setting if you wish to make the settings for your speaker systems manually Setting the type of speakers Press the CURSOR or V button to select Speaker Config then press the ENTER button e The Speaker Config screen appears e The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjust
170. M Holdings Inc Printed in Japan OOD 511 4483 000
171. MPONENT Ke S VIDEO S VIDEO O O O COMPONENT Ka S VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO CONVERT S VIDEO Input signals MONITOR OUT Mode MONITOR OUT COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO x x O x x VIDEO x O x x S VIDEO x Used x CO O x S VIDEO VIDEO Not used x O O x VIDEO OFF O x x COMPONENT x x fo x O COMPONENT Kal x VIDEO _ fei O x COMPONENT Ka S VIDEO x Used O O OO COMPONENT Ka S VIDEO VIDEO Not used O O O COMPONENT 1 VIDEO O Signal input x Not output X No signal sk VIDEO No on screen display COMPONENT On screen display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP BE SURROUND PARAMETER and ON SCREEN button e The ZONE2 video conversion function is compatible with COMPONENT 1 On screen display superimposed on video signal and output the NTSC and PAL formats COMPONENT 2 On Epi display superimposed on S Video signal 173 and output Specifications E Audio section e Power amplifier Rated output Dynamic power Output terminals Analog Input sensitivity input impedance Frequency response S N Distortion Rated output Digital D A output Digital input Front 70 W 170 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D 200 W 200 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D Center 70 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D 200 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D Surround A B 70 W 170 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D 200 W 200 W 6
172. Motorola ultichoice Multistar yryad Mysat EC NEOTION etgem Netsat euhaus Neuling eusat Neveling Newton Next Level NextWave Nikko Nokia Nordmende Octagon OctalTV 00607 01075 00605 01225 01206 00243 00292 00132 01161 00713 00200 00818 00269 00084 00613 01279 00173 00501 00713 00299 01075 00713 00571 00455 00132 01232 00856 00642 00331 00200 00713 00496 01334 01322 00099 00501 00132 00587 01409 01161 00396 00869 01017 00200 00397 00873 01723 00421 00421 01294 01334 00501 00299 01232 00724 00132 00713 01282 00607 00369 00749 00200 00869 00879 01270 00887 00592 01232 00692 01143 00243 00455 01023 00455 00613 01505 00853 01334 01412 01283 01334 00243 00713 00794 00829 01519 00713 00520 00369 00713 01043 01075 00136 00243 00421 00520 00818 00885 01205 01215 00613 00713 01294 00607 00692 00713 00834 00713 00834 01279 01334 00573 00723 00751 00853 01223 01310 01311 01312 29 Okano Opentel Optex Optus Orbis Orbit Orbitech Origo OSAT Ouralis Oxford Pace Pacific Satellite Packard Bell Packsat Palcom Palladium Palsat Panarex Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat Philips Phoenix Phonotrend Pilotime Pino Pioneer Planet Plasmat
173. NE3 and ZONE4 tone control anckchnannelllevelieae eset ca cee aceon seen sree ter eres 124 125 Option Setup Se kiingie aa mine NS ethom ene 126 128 Setting the Power Amplifier Aeslonrment 129 133 Setting the Volume Control SettingithenMmoggen outa aana AAA E Setting the AC Outlet Aesionment AAaAaAaAaAEAEAEAEA 136 Memory backup and protecting the setting dE Se kinaitwa na pa AAA 138 139 Advanced Setup Part 2 Remote control unit operations during multi source playback 94 Speaker Setup System SSUUTO EE en 95 Setting the type of spegkerg 140 141 Adjustment steps that need to be performed prior to Setting the low frequency distribution 141 142 surround sound playback in ZONE2 Statiste tb Time e 142 143 amp Test Kol TEE EE 95 Setting the Channel Level WB os Vs e Channel Level e Adjusting the test tone using the remote control unit 145 Let TEE Teller 96 Setting the Crossover Frequency s s 145 146 ZONE2 Surround EH 97 e Setting the crossover frequency individually for the USER MODE function of ZONE2 on eee tee tect teeee eee 97 dinterentenhannels ee E a a 146 ZONE2 tone control SEH DEE 98 Selecting the Surround Speakers Other function for the different Surround modes 146 147 Playing Super Audio CDs with an IEEE1394 cable 99 Settings the THX Audio Setup Multi source rec
174. O SELECT button until the desired image appears X The video source selected with the video select function is stored in the memory for the different input sources P e Cancelling simulcast playback Select the SOURCE pressing the VIDEO SELECT button e It is not possible to select HDMI and DVI input signals e When playing HDMI DVI video input signals the analog video signal of another function cannot be selected for the HDMI video output e f the VIDEO SELECT mode is used during playback in the XM or Network Audio the picture switches to the picture selected from the control panel display Cancel the VIDEO SELECT mode if you want to display the control panel Video on off When no video signals of a DVD etc are connected to the AVR 5805CI and the DVD etc are connected directly to a TV etc the unneeded video circuitry can be turned off by selecting the VIDEO OFF setting Press the VIDEO ON OFF button Basic Operation ANALOG SURROUND PARAMETER INPUT MODE EXT IN STATUS Eb DIMMER CURSOR Checking the currently playing program source etc E On screen display Press the ON SCREEN button x Each time an operation is performed a description of that operation appears on the display connected to AVR 5805Cl s VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal Also the unit s operating status can be checked during playback X Such information as the position of the input selector
175. ODE 40672 40730 41165 41087 41004 41061 40869 41730 41165 40770 41165 41265 40672 40831 40769 40874 40774 40770 41172 40783 40713 40778 41115 40634 40690 40695 40699 40713 40778 40831 40833 40884 40876 40778 40852 41086 41107 41177 41351 40798 40852 41004 40770 41115 41023 41024 41117 41129 40784 40833 40869 40872 41234 41242 41115 40790 41089 41470 41634 Denver 40699 Desav 40770 Desay 40800 Diamond 40651 Dick Smith Electronics 40833 Digihome 40713 digiRED 40717 Digitor 40651 Digitrex 40672 DIGIXmedia 40826 Dik 40774 Disney 40675 DiViDo 40705 DK Digital 40831 DMTech 40783 Dragon 40831 DSE 40833 Dual 40651 41068 Durabrand 40713 DVD2000 40521 DVX 40768 ECC 40730 Electrohome 40770 Elfunk 40850 Elin 40770 Ellion 40850 Elta 40672 Emerson 40591 Encore 40698 Enterprise 40591 Enzer 40770 EuroLine 41115 Fenner 40651 Ferguson 40651 Finlux 40591 Fintec 40784 Firstline 40651 Fisher 40670 Funai 40675 Gateway 41073 GE 40522 General Electric 40717 Global Solutions 40768 Go Video 40715 41044 41730 Go Vision 41071 GoldStar 40591 40778 41407 40768 41730 40690 41056 40831 41270 41730 40713 41085 40831 40784 40690 40675 40784 40769 40672 41169 40713 40695 41077 40717 40741 41075 41072 40741 41107
176. ON CURSOR TUNING Na tn mi CH SEL ENTER BAND MODE Channel Level e You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your tastes as described below Press the CH SEL ENTER button e The Channel Vol screen appears Channel Vol D CEREM A o og G 0 0d SR B 0 G FR 0 Od SBR 0 OB SW 0 0B SBL 0 oo SLB 0 oa SLA 0 oa Fader L FRONT 4 REAR x Channels which is not used are not displayed X When the surround back speaker setting is set to Ispkr for Speaker Configuration IS page 140 141 this is set to SB D Pres the CURSOR A Y or CH SEL ENTER button to select the speaker Xx The channel switches as shown below each time the CH SEL ENTER button is pressed EL HH C FR SWI SRA SRB FADERI SLA SLB SBL Een 3 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the level X The adjustment range for the different channels is 12 0 dB to 12 0 dB in step of 0 5 dB x The sound from the subwoofer can be completely cut by lowering the SW subwoofer setting one additional from 12 0 dB setting it to OFF 64 AMP mode TU he CH SEL ENTER 19 CURSOR i TUNER mode es TUNING BAND MODE Fader function e This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the
177. OR MUSIC DTS NEO 6 mode e Surround playback can be performed for the analog input and digital input 2 channel signals Press the STANDARD button to select DTS NEO 6 mode e The DTS NEO 6 indicator lights sil fz x 3 _ DIS __ x The mode switches as shown NEO 6 below each time the STANDARD E Sy PAWS button is pressed lights DOLBY PLIIx DTS NEO 6 2 Play a program source 3 Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears DTS NEO 6 EMMC mm CINEMAJE Q 4 OFF gt D COMP ot aaa TONE 4 CR GO Q SB CH OUT 74088 K vor L Default Vesi Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the play mode CNTR IMAGE DE 410 3 gt D COMP OFF gt kl A TONE 4 CR y SB CH OUT 4488 N gt OFF C Default Vesi Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the various surround parameters USER MODE E55 Sir STANDARD CINEMA FA So ENTER Di KW CURSOR SURROUND O S PARAMETER Press the CURSOR lt or button to adjust the parameters setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting P e Select Default Yes and press CURSOR lt button to reset all the settings e When playing PCM digital signals or analog signals in the DOLBY PRO
178. Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the parameters setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 97 e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with a function for storing the input source auto surround mode and input mode settings selected for the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 in the memory so they can be used whenever desired For ZONE2 three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory using the USER MODE 1 2 and 3 buttons on the Remote control unit See page 60 for a description of the MAIN ZONE s USER MODE function E Storing the settings in the memory Set the following to the desired status CU ZONE2 input source 2 ZONE2 auto surround mode 3 ZONE2 input mode Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press and hold the USER MODE button until the USER 1 2 or 3 MEMORY is appears on the ZONE2 monitor E Calling the settings out Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press the USER MODE button at which the settings you want to call out are stored Advanced Operation PARAMETER ZONE2 tone control setting e This function allows you to adjust the bass and treble of the ZONE2 audio output during surround playback in ZONE2 to suit your tastes Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears ROCK ARENA D Beta SIZE 4med
179. Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D Surround Back 70 W 170 W 8 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 Yo T H D 200 W 200 W 6 Q ohms 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0 05 T H D 190 W x 2 ch 8 Q ohms 310 W x 2 ch 4 Q ohms All channels 6 16 Q ohms 200 mV 47 kQ kohms 10 Hz 100 kHz 0 3 dB DIRECT mode 105 dB DIRECT mode 0 005 20 Hz 20 kHz DIRECT mode 1 2V Rated output 2 V at 0 dB playback Total harmonic distortion 0 003 Yo 1 kHz at 0 dB S N ratio 125 dB Dynamic range 117 dB Format Digital audio interface Phono equalizer PHONO input REC OUT Input sensitivity RIAA deviation S N Rated output Maximum output Distortion factor Video section Standard video terminals Input output level and impedance Frequency response S Video terminals Input output level and impedance Frequency response Color component video terminal Input output level and impedance Frequency response 2 5 mV 1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz 74 dB A weighting with 5 mV input 150 mV 8V 0 03 1 kHz 3 V 1 Vp p 75 Q ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 Q ohms C color signal 0 286 Vp p 75 Q ohms 5 Hz 10 MHz 0 3 dB Y brightness signal 1 Vp p 75 Q ohms Ps Cs signal 0 7 Vp p 75 Q ohms Pr Cr signal 0 7 Vp p 75 Q o
180. R Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R STEREO L A FR A FL B FR B C SL A SR A SBL SBR Z2 L Z2 R Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R MONO L A FR A FL B FR B C SL A SR A SBL SBR Z2 M Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R 5 1 CH 7ACH LA FRA FL B FR B C SLA SR A Z2 FL Z2 FR Z2 C Z2 SL Z2 SR Z2 SBL Z2 SBR Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R SCH LA FRA FLB FRB C SLA SRA Z2 FL 22 FR Z2 C 22 SL Z2 SR Z3 L Z3R Z4 L Z4 R STEREO LA FRA FL B FRB C SLA SRA Z2 L Z2 R Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R MONO FL A FR A FL B FR B C SL A SR A Z2 M Z3 L Z3 R Z4 L Z4 R x The above is an example of the selectable channels when STEREO is set for the ZONE3 and 4 channel setting If MONO is selected Z3 M and Z4 M are displayed 133 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Volume Control e Set the upper limit for the volume the volume level when the power is turned on and the volume level when the mute mode is set for the each zones 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Volume Control at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Volume Control screen appears 7 Option Setup 1 Channel Setup 2 Power Amp Assign 3 Volume Control 4 Trigger Out 5 AC Outlet Assign 6 Setup Memory Lock 7 Network Setup Ex i 7 3 Volume Control ei H 7 3 Volume Control Zone3 Vol Lev VAR gt Vol Limit OFF gt P On Lev LAST gt
181. REO SIMULATION CONTROL PARAMETER TONE TONE SURROUND SURROUND ACK DEFEAT SPEAKER STATUS ON STANDBY epee eee EA MONITOR SELECT pa MODE mon mor E GE PHONES enans AV SURF UND RECEIVER AVR 5805 es es es MODE SYSTEM SYSTEM SURROUND SURROUND CONTROL PARAMETER CINEMA Music GAME ROOM EQ CH SSES INPUT x PURE DIRECT INPUT TONE TONE SURROUND SURROUND DIRECT STEREO MODE ANALOG d CONTROL DEFEAT SPEAKER BACK STATUS MONITOR VIDEO DIMMER ON OFF 10 Power ON STANDBY button 22 Power indicator 22 Power switch n 22 101 Headphones jack PHONES wwwwwww 45 V AUX INPUT terminals 0 000 00 00 00c cece 31 Q SETUP MiCiack cecccccccecccesesesesessseeseeeteees 21 USER MODE buttons 60 USER MODE indicators 000 000 0000 cccccccccesceseeeees 60 MASTER VOLUME control knob 44 O Master volume indicator 44 d Display rc 12 WP Remote control sensor 9 FUNCTION ko 44 SOURCE button 44 6 TUNING PRESET button 67 d ZONE2 SELECT button 93 ZONE3 4 REC SELECT button 93
182. Radialva Radiola Radionette RadioShack Radix Randex Rank Rank Arena RCA Realistic Reoc ReplayTV Rex RFT Ricavision Roadstar Royal Runco Saba Saisho Salora Sampo Samsung Sanky Sansui Sanyo Saville SBR Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scott Sears Seaway SEG 20081 20278 20039 20000 20060 20046 20046 20035 20081 20037 20081 20037 20000 20037 20037 20041 20041 20000 20226 21035 20000 20104 20348 20614 20041 20072 21972 20037 20072 20039 20041 20209 20043 20037 20045 20039 20000 20479 20046 20209 20240 20081 20000 20000 20278 20043 20000 20104 20278 20072 20278 20081 20162 20048 20037 20035 20240 21060 20035 20616 20072 20067 20348 20046 20048 20240 20048 20041 21479 20047 20240 20278 20041 20037 20348 20045 20035 PN ZS 20081 20278 21035 20042 20048 20060 20149 20320 20432 20807 20880 20037 20046 20047 20048 20081 20240 20278 20320 20104 20348 21330 20642 20121 20184 20432 20739 20067 20072 20048 20067 20104 20315 20042 20072 20037 20042 20240 20278 20278 21014 20348 20642 20209 20348 20104 20159 20081 20240 20046 20047 9 SEI Seleco Semp Sentra Serie Dorada Sharp Shinco Shintom Shivaki Shogun S
183. Rainbow RCA Realistic Rebox Red Star Regal RFT Roadstar Roch Romsat Rover S ZWO SAB Saba Sabre Sagem Samsung Sanyo SAT Sat Control Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team Satcom Satec Satelco Satline Satplus Satstation 00520 00573 00710 00455 00628 00392 01567 01535 00520 00571 00834 01367 00369 00115 00200 00869 00285 00613 00143 01392 00052 01214 00369 01251 00200 00713 00136 00421 00369 01207 01251 00115 00885 00455 00820 00853 01243 01377 00493 00321 01300 01143 00421 00713 00605 00713 00369 00628 00157 01083 00639 00723 00873 01173 00566 01404 00628 00668 00710 01012 00299 00607 00742 00396 00882 01113 00392 00566 00855 01291 00853 00628 00713 00520 00607 00690 00692 00710 01012 01114 01253 01307 00863 01017 01108 01109 01206 01244 01276 01292 01293 01343 01442 01458 01570 01609 01219 00351 00501 00675 00501 00520 00613 00692 00607 00834 01232 01100 30 Schaub Lorenz Schcke Schneider Schwaiger SCS Sedea Electronique Seemann SEG Seleco Septimo Serino Servi Sat ServiSat Sharp Siemens Silva Skantin Skardin SKR SKT SKY SKY Italia Sky Television Sky XL Sky Skymaster Skymax Skyplus SkySat Skyvision SL SL Marx SM Electroni Smart Sony SR Star Star Choice
184. SOR A or V button to select Video Convert Mode then press the ENTER button e The Video Convert Mode screen appears 6 6 Video Convert Mode Gl DVD 4 gt Zone 2 VDP ON TV ON DBS ON VCR 1 ON VCR 2 ON VCR 3 ON VCR 4 ON V Aux Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the ZONE2 input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON When there are multiple input signals for the input sources selected at ZONE2 the input signal is detected and the input signal output to the ZONE2 s monitor output terminal is selected automatically in the following order of priority Component S Video Composite OFF The convert function does not operate In such cases the input device s cable type must be the same as the type of cable connected to the AVR 5805Cl s monitor output terminal video S Video or component video Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Zone Setup menu reappears 123 Advanced Setup Part 1 H Audio Delay ZONE2 e Set the delay time the sound is synchronized with the picture which are output in ZONE2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Audio Delay at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Audio Delay screen appears 6 6 Video Setup 6 6 Audio Dela
185. Subwoofer Mode LEE Press the CURSOR or V button to select the item then press CURSOR lt or gt button to set x Fora description of the settings for the different items see pages 140 146 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Advanced Playback menu reappears E Setting the front B speakers when the surround mode is set to the 2 channel Direct or Stereo e When Adv Front B is selected at Power Amp Assign and Custom is selected at this setting the Front B setting is displayed x To play signals from the Front B speaker when in the 2 channel Direct or Stereo mode set Used 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo Setting 4Custom gt Grant B 4 Used gt Front 4 Large gt Subwoofer deel gt Subwoofer Mode 4 LFE Main gt 116 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Dolby Digital Setup Setting the Auto Surround Mode e Turn the audio compression on or off when down mixing Dolby Digital signals 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Dolby Digital Setup at the Advanced Playback menu then press the ENTER button e The Dolby Digital Setup screen appears 5 Advanced Playback 5 2 Dolby Digital 1 2ch Direct Stereo Downmix Option Setup 2 Dolby Digital Setu 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup Compression ONI4 gt Celi
186. TICAL 3 to 5 OUT terminal on the AVR 5805Cl s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 3 to 5 IN terminal 32 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a VCR e There are three sets of video deck VCR terminals so three video decks can be connected for simultaneous recording or video copying Vi WEW Vi k e f you choose to use the component video connection it needs to be assign deo dec For more information about Component Input Assignment IGS page 112 D LE d LI S VIDEO 6 5 OUT E VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT veo r f PB L est f PR S VIDEO IN VIDEO IN D AUDIO IN gt EH O aA R D AUDIO OUT 1Ha O aA R d NOTE e When recording to VCR it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR 5805Cl VCR 1 to 4 OUT terminal Example VCR 1 IN S Video cable VCR 2 OUT S Video cable VCR 2 IN Video cable VCR 1 OUT Video cable Connecting a CD player e To connect the digital audio output from the CD player you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the optical connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment I page Ges CD player D AUDIO OUT Seed JEC E A R 2q a COAXIAL COAXIAL M am OUT Connecting Other Sources Connecting a turntab
187. TROL BACK E Surround parameters EFFECT This parameter turns the effect signals with multi surround mode speaker effects on and off in the WIDE SCREEN mode When this parameter is turned off the SBL and SBR channel signals are equivalent to the SL and SR channels respectively LEVEL This parameter sets the strength of the effect signals in the WIDE SCREEN mode It can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15 Set this to a low level if the positioning or phase of the surround signals sounds unnatural SB CH OUT e ON Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker e OFF Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker Xx This operation can be performed directly pressing the SURROUND BACK button on the main unit s panel ROOM SIZE This sets the size of the sound field There are five settings small med s medium small medium med medium large and large small recreates a small sound field large a large sound field The ROOM SIZE expresses the expansion effect for the different surround modes in terms of the size of the sound field not the actual size of the listening room EFFECT LEVEL This sets the strength of the surround effect The level can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15 Lower the level if the sound seems distorted DELAY TIME In the matrix mode only the delay time can be set within the range of 0 to 300 ms 62
188. TV e Set the antenna wires from the tuner or TV away from this unit s power supply cord and input output connection cables e Noise or disturbance tends to occur particularly when using indoor antennas or 300 ohms feeder wires We recommend using outdoor antennas and 75 Q ohms coaxial cables Note For heat dispersal do not install this unit in a confined space such as a bookcase or similar enclosure Wall Getting Started Cautions on handling e Switching the input function when input terminals are e Whenever the power operation button is in the not connected STANDBY state the apparatus is still connected on AC A clicking noise may be produced if the input function is line voltage switched when nothing is connected to the input terminals Please be sure to turn off the power switch or unplug If this happens either turn down the MASTER VOLUME the cord when you leave home for say a vacation control knob or connect components to the input terminals e Muting of PRE OUT terminals and SPEAKER terminals The PRE OUT terminals and SPEAKER terminals include a muting circuit Because of this the output signals are greatly reduced for several seconds after the power switch is turned on or input function surround mode or any other set up is changed If the volume is turned up during this time the output will be very high after the muting circuit stops functioning Always wait until the muting
189. X main speakers should be set to Small 80 Hz If you set up your speakers using Auto Setup please make sure manually that any THX speakers are set to Small with 80 Hz crossover P e When measurements have been made using the measurement microphone speakers with a built in filter such as subwoofers might be set with a value that differs from the physical distance because of the internal electrical delay If the Channel Setup or Power Amplifier Assignment settings are changed after completing the auto setup perform the auto setup procedure again In the same way if the speaker layout has been changed we recommended performing the auto setup procedure over again NOTE e Do not turn off the power while the data is being stored If the power is turned off while the data is being stored the Room EO parameters stored in the memory will be cleared and it will not be possible to select Audyssey Front or Flat equalizer settings Easy Setup and Operation About the error message e These error messages will be displayed when performing the measurements of Auto Setup and the automatic measurements can not be completed because of the speaker arrangement measurement environment or other factors Please check the following matters reset the pertinent items and measure again Be sure to turn off the AVR 5805Cl s power before checking the speaker connections Screen example Cau
190. Z3M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SRA L4 Z2 L R4 Z2R L4 Z3L R4 Z3R L4 Z2M R4 L4 Z2L R4 Z2R 14 Z2L R4 Z2R 14 ZBL R4 Z3R 14 Z2M R4 L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR LS SBL R5 SBRYL5 Z3L R5 Z3R L5 R5 15 RS 15 R5 e Amp Assign mode ZONE3 4 MAIN ZONE 7 1 CH 5 1 CH Channel Setup ZONES STEREO MONO MONO STEREO STEREO MONO MONO ZONE4 MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO STEREO MONO Power Amp Assign L1 FL R1 FR L1 FL RI FR YLT FL R1 FR YLT FL RI FR PLE FL RT FR LT FL RI FR YLT FL YR FR 12 C R2 Z4MjL2 C R2 Z3M L2 C R2 Z4M L2 C R2 L2 C Roja Mj C R2 Z3M L2 C j R2 Z4M L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SRA L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SR A L3 SL A R3 SRA L4 Z3 L R4 Z3R L4 UZA LIRA Z4R 14 ZMA L4 Z3L R4 Z3R 14 Z3LiR4 Z3R L4 Z4L R4 Z4R L4 Z3M R4 L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 SBL R5 SBR L5 Z4L R5 Z4R L5 R5 15 R5 L5 R5 e Amp Assign mode ZONE2 4 MAIN ZON
191. a full listing of the XM commercial free channels and MARGINAL Signal strength is marginal advertising supported channels visit lineup xmradio com WEAK Signal strength is poor US residents or xmradio ca Canadian residents NO Lass Gi ine Sire Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio com US residents and xmradio ca Canadian residents Only available in the 48 contiguous United Adjust the antenna location until States and Canada 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights SIGNAL GOOD is displayed reserved All other trademarks are the property of their E respective owners Press the STATUS button until the KM channel ex XM001 is displayed E XM READY SUBSCRIPTIONS Once you have installed the XM Mini Tuner Dock inserted the XM Mini Tuner connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready home audio system and installed the antenna you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID on the XM Mini Tuner on the XM Mini Tuner package and on XM Channel 0 Record the Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference OO OOO O O C Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters 1 S or ET Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in YA U S online at http activate xmradio com or call 1 800 XM RADIO 1 800 967 2346 You will need a major credit card XM will send a signal from the satellites to a
192. and WIDE SCREEN modes D COMP Dynamic Range Compression Motion picture soundtracks have tremendous dynamic range the contrast between very soft and very loud sounds For listening late at night or whenever the maximum sound level is lower than usual the Dynamic Range Compression allows you to hear all of the sounds in the soundtrack but with reduced dynamic range This only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS Select one of the four parameters OFF LOW MID middle or HI high Set to OFF for normal listening This parameter is displayed only when playing compatible sources in DTS mode LFE Low Frequency Effect This sets the level of the LFE Low Frequency Effect sounds included in the source when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital DTS DVD Audio or Super Audio CD Program source and adjustment range 1 Dolby Digital 10 dB to 0 dB 2 DTS Surround 10 dB to 0 dB When DTS encoded movie software is played it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 0 dB for correct DTS playback When DTS encoded music software is played it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 10 dB for correct DTS playback TONE This adjusts the tone control ES page 63 64 This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other than PURE DIRECT DIRECT and Home THX Cinema mode Basic Operation E Dialogue Normalization Dialogue Normalization
193. arious front center surround and surround back speaker systems e f a connected main or surround loudspeaker has a specified 3 dB low frequency response rolloff adjust the crossover frequency for that speaker to match the specified low frequency response limit e g 80 Hz e When a speaker is set to SMALL low frequencies in that channel that are below the crossover frequency are directed to the system s subwoofer s or to speakers that are set to LARGE for systems with no connected subwoofer s 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Crossover Frequency at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Crossover Frequency screen appears 2 Speaker Setup 2 5 Crossover Frequency ER Fixed gt THK Speaker Config Subwoofer Setup Delay Time Channel Level Crossover Frequenc Surround Sp Setup THX Audio Setup Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the frequency FIXED THX Set to the THX rated 80 Hz crossover frequency VARIABLE 40 60 80 90 100 110 120 150 200 250 Hz Set as desired according to your speakers bass playback ability Advanced The crossover frequency can be set individually for the different speakers ES page 146 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears 145 Advanced Setup Part 2 D e f LFE Main is set at Subwoofer Setup SVV LFE Main
194. ast has been received Getting Started Remote control unit e For details on the functions of these parts refer to the pages given in parentheses Remote control signal transmitter IR segment T i lt E Pius 2 D r il 20 Tr E ii al H ES lt d INPUT MODE selector button USER MODE SYSTEM CALL buttons ROOM EO button Surround mode System Tuner system buttons Teand Move memo NIGHT button IAE TEST TONE button SYSTEM SETUP button CURSOR buttons NOTE RC SETUP button e For instructions on setting the remote control unit back light s lighting time IGS page 85 13 Easy Setup and Operation e This section contains the basic steps necessary to configure the AVR 5BO5BCI according to your listening room environment and the source equipment and loudspeakers you are using e For optimum performance we recommend using the Auto Setup function e f you wish you can set the various settings manually without using Auto Setup ES page 140 148 Easy to setup flow A Auto setup flow Perform the auto setup procedure following the Connecting the speakers instructions displayed on the TV s screen Placing the speakers Connecting a microphone CS page 21 Y Connect the DVD player to ay Xx By default the speaker system s
195. ator lights when aes playing DTS sources ES lights Press the SURROUND BACK button Lights when the Surround Back channelis on den s SE S NOE Set to 1spkr mA Set to 2spkrs AES DRE RES EET GEN lights lights Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears Dolby Digital EX GICINEMA EO DTS NEO 6 a GICINEMAJE Q 4 0FF D COMP OFF m s j ve g H LFE 4 04 TONE 4_ q p LFE 4 0 D AFDM 4 0FF TONE 4 P SB CH OUT gt AFDM 4 0FF A ABB 4MTRX ON g p SB CH OUT Defaut Yes a as s 4 ES MTRX gt Default Yes4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 54 Lt STANDARD Weg ENTER pa VK CURSOR SURROUND _ PARAMETER e Select Default Yes and press the CURSOR lt button to reset all the settings E Surround parameters CINEMA EO Cinema Equalizer The Cinema EQ function gently decreases the level of the extreme high frequencies compensating for overly bright sounding motion picture soundtracks Select this function if the sound from the front speakers is too bright This function only works in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Digital DTS Surround DTS NEO 6
196. canceled if no operation is performed for 10 seconds 82 I e There may be several preset codes for some brands If the remote control unit does not work properly with one code try inputting another code e Buttons that have been learned have priority over the signals set with the preset memory function If a learned button setting is not needed please erase it ES page 86 Operating a component stored in the preset memory Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be operated e The indicator of the device to be operated blinks 2 Operate the component X For details instructions refer to the component s operating 1 l gt L akkl l l I I i lt lt gt gt iLE l A G V A EL Display I me eal i chcSi souRCE SRC ON Ise rt SOURCE SRC OFF I I BAND MODE MEMO E Functions of buttons for the different devices Advanced Operation co player s DU Diplayer TV Satellite tuner Device operated or Video deck Tape deck Tuner or Monitor or Cable TV CD recorder DVD recorder EL Display MODE SELECTOR cD VCR TU DVD TV SAT CBL gt Play Play Play Play Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search laa ki to beginning of to beginning of to beginning of to beginning of track track track track IA Manual
197. celled when MASTER VOLUME is operated while the Auto Setup is performed Speaker system measurement e With these measurements the Speaker Configuration Crossover Frequency and Room EO are analyzed automatically The main listening position is measured first so leave the microphone where it ma Delay Time n Channel Level Is Press the CURSOR A or V button to select OK Start then press the CURSOR lt button e Measurements for the first point start 1 1 Auto Setup 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphong at ear height at main listening positiol Speaker Detect Check FOK Start Retry 4 Cancel Cancel4 J X The screen shown at the below appears once the measurements for the main listening position are completed 1 1 Auto Setup Please place microphone at ear height at 2nd listening position Calculate 4 OK Next 4 Retry4 k Cancel4 J Next the measurements for the second point will be taken Place the microphone at the second listening position For instructions on the position in which the microphone should be placed 1257 page 20 24 Press the CURSOR lt button e Measurements for the second point start 1 1 Auto Setup 2nd Position L Cancel4 p Perform step 2 3 repeatedly Xx The more measurement points the better the resulting room correction effect We recommend a minimum of 6 m
198. ces as flush with the front of the screen as possible Surround speaker systems Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the listening position is the same for both the left and right speakers It is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front left FL and front right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 2 ft 60 cm With the AVR 5805CI it is also possible to use the surround speaker selector function to choose the best layout for a variety of sources and surround modes E Surround speaker selector function This function makes it possible to achieve the optimum sound fields for different sources by switching between two systems of surround speakers A and B The settings of the different speakers A only B only or A B are stored in the memory for the different surround modes so they are set automatically when the surround mode is selected UA Al RTR Using A only Using B only Using A and B Multi surround speaker system Single surround speaker system SB Surround Back Speakers 15 Easy Setup and Operation Speaker connections e Connect the speaker terminals with the speakers making sure that like polarities are matched 9 with 0 wi
199. ch as that of text broadcasts which has been added to the video signal might not be output If this happens please set the conversion mode to OFF 112 Setting the HDMI Component Out Setup e Set the format of the signal up converted to the HDMI monitor output or component video output terminal 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select HDMI Component Out at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The HDMI Component Out screen appears 4 Video Setup D 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 2 Component In Assign 3 Video Convert Mode GA HDMI Component Out 5 Audio Delay 6 On Screen Display Exit P 4 4 HDMI Component Out 4 4 HDMI Component Out Analog to i re HDMI Convert Color Space 4 YCbCr gt Scaler 1 HDMI RGB Mode 4 Normal gt Aspect 4 FULL H Resolution 4480p 576p 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the setting then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the parameter Analog to HDMI Convert e ON Setting for converting analog video signals into DMI signals e OFF Setting for not converting analog video signals into DMI signals Scaler e HDMI The i p scaler can be used when outputting the input analog video signal to the HDMI monitor output terminal e Component The i p scaler can be used when outputting the input analog video signal to the compo
200. ch off the power of this unit check whether there are any faults with the wiring of the speaker cables or input cables and wait for the unit to cool down if it is very hot Improve the ventilation condition around the unit and switch the power back on If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems with the wiring or the ventilation around the unit switch off the power and contact a DENON service center Note on speaker impedance The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long periods of time at high volumes when speakers with an impedance lower than the specified impedance for example speakers with an impedance of lower than 4 Q ohms are connected If the protector circuit is activated the speaker output is cut off Turn off the set s power wait for the set to cool down improve the ventilation around the set then turn the power back on Cooling fan The AVR 5805CI is equipped with a cooling fan to prevent the temperature inside the set from rising The fan is activated under certain usage conditions It is temperature sensitive to minimize or prevent audible fan noise Easy Setup and Operation E Connections e By default the speaker system setting is set to 9 1 channels e The AVR 5805CI can be configured for 10 speaker playback using two pairs of surround speakers A B and one pair of surround back speakers as shown below e The output of eac
201. channels can be given the names you want Except the XM channels 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Preset Name at the Tuner Presets screen then press the ENTER button e Switch to the Preset Name screen 3 7 Tuner Presets F tN Auto Preset Memory Se ck Kate AIF 87 5 OMHAN N Preset Skip A3 89 TOM A3 98 10MH GP reset Name A4FM107 9 OME AED 90 10MH AGEN 90 10MH xl ATF 90 1 DM Aan 90 TOM A Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the preset channel whose name you want to change then press the CURSOR lt or gt button e The screen switches to the character input screen Example When A1 is selected and the CURSOR lt or gt button is pressed l 3 7 Geacak Maas ON 3 7 Preset Name a H v FATIM 87 50MHz Default L Yes4 J Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to move the cursor JJ to the character number symbol or punctuation mark you wish to input and press the CURSOR or V button to select that character ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW XYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxy z0123456789 I amp x lt gt Space Up to 8 characters can be input Advanced Setup Part 1 Repeat step 3 to input the preset channel Press the CURSOR A or V button to select name Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears Xx To reset the
202. corded in Dolby Surround in the Home THX Cinema Surround mode AA 51 e To play in the THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema Surround mode for sources recorded in Dolby Digital On DIS A ren AA Gras ee e ee eee Sil JS Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround ek vida CMe ika NA UA AAA AAA 54 55 Niga md Leet deere ache eet net ce ncn AAA chances A 55 DolbyieroiFogiclbe Proiltogic I imodeaeere ste 56 57 DTS NEO 6 mode Ueleg EE 59 WS ERA ME DE HE 59 DENON original surround modes Surround modes and their features DISTR euer ane geseet Tone control setting e Adjusting the tone from the remote control unit 62 63 e Adjusting the tone from the main unit TEE Le tele Enge lee rell HE HIE E Listening to the radio ANU TITS TE 65 IS Here EE 66 Proser ENEE EE 66 Checknonneipesenstations see see meee eee eee eer 67 leet Iert SHEN O TS cn 00 20 noc concoction connnonacneetocciseagacaneeccnecnosaesooHoe 67 FDIS Rechte DEI SSSI e a 67 RDS search PTY search delen lieler Rett bereet 70 XM Satellite Radio Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID 71 Channel selection DEE EE EE ee ue TS to be continued on page 6 E System Setup Menu System Setup Menu E TT J On On P Gab S Auto Setup Room COnnnnnnnn Speaker Getutpasnsnnsngnnsggg Audio Input Setupsaasuum Video Setup SHH EEEEEER Advanced Playbacks Zone Setupsasuuuua Option Setupma
203. ctions All rights reserved Surround EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories Used with permission Audyssey MultEQ XT e The AVR 5805Cl s transfer format is compatible with A amp M protocol In addition to A amp M protocol IEEE1394 transfer formats also include MPEG TS DV etc The AVR 5805Cl is compatible with a data transfer speed of up to S400 The IEEE1394 maximum data transfer speeds are defined as approximately 100 200 or 400 Mbps expressed respectively as S100 S200 and S400 When S100 or S200 devices are connected the actually transfer rate may be slower than 400 Mbps depending on the device s specifications As far as possible interconnect devices with the same maximum data transfer rate e The AVR 5805CI is compatible with the DTCP Digital Audyssey MultEQ XT is a technology designed to provide the optimum listening environment for multiple listeners within the Transmission Content Protection system listening area Test data collected from multiple listening points E Copyright protection system is analyzed comprehensively and equalization that improves the sound quality for the entire listening area is performed Audyssey MultEQ XT not only corrects frequency response problems in large listening areas it also fully automates the surround system setup For a detailed description see page 20 MULTEQ YA e Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories It is licensed
204. ctivate the full channel lineup Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done For more information or to subscribe in Canada visit XM on the Web at www xmradio ca or call XM s Listener Care at 1 877 GET XMSR 1 877 438 9677 Press the TUNING button to select channel 0 XM000 e The Radio ID is displayed Radio ID 71 Basic Operation FUNCTION BAND STATUS TED d 1 R I CURSOR ENTER TUNING GZ TUNING Channel selection Category search Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION AI Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER mode Watching the display press the BAND button to select the XM mode EEN number Channel name Song title Artist name Press the TUNING button to reach the desired channel X The channel changes continuously when you press and hold the TUNING button X When the artist name and song title are received they are displayed 72 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button in the XM mode e The current category name is displayed 1 i Channel Category Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the catego
205. d cart combination to overturn Ventilation Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating and these openings must not be blocked or covered The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface This product should not be placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer s instructions have been adhered to Power Sources This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home consult your product dealer or local power company For products intended to operate from battery power or other sources refer to the operating instructions iS ANS ed 3 Grounding or Polarization This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug a plug having one blade wider than the other This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet try reversing the plug If the plug should still fail to fit contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug FIGURE A EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ANTENNA
206. during playback in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Pro Logic II mode 57 Basic Operation E Surround parameters 4 Pro Logic IIx and Pro Logic II Mode Select one of the modes Cinema Music or Game The Cinema mode is for use with stereo television shows and all programs encoded in Dolby Surround The Music mode is recommended for stereo music and surround encoded stereo music sources The Pro Logic mode emulates Dolby Laboratories original Dolby Pro Logic surround decoding and may provide better results with older legacy surround encoded program material The Game mode is optimized for computer and or dedicated game box consoles that feature stereo analog or digital outputs It can only be used with 2 channel stereo sources PANORAMA This mode extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting wraparound effect with side wall imaging Select OFF or ON DIMENSION This control gradually adjust the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear The control can be set in 7 steps from 0 to 6 CENTER WIDTH This control adjust the center image so it may be heard only from the center speaker only from the left right speakers as a phantom image or from all three front speakers to varying degrees The control can be set in 8 steps from 0 to 7 Pro Logic Basic Operation USER MODE SURROUND PARAMETER STANDARD CINEMA PHONES ENTER CURS
207. e e The Dolby Headphone mode is set when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack while in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND mode Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears DOLBY HEADPHONE gt gt MODE 4 DHI DECODER 4 PLII C TONE4 Default Yes 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the parameter Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting AQIN e When RECOUT mode is set to SOURCE with this amplifier signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode can be output from the recording output terminals and recorded on another recorder IGS page 101 E Parameters MODE e DH1 Reference room small room with weak reverberations e DH2 Live room room with a bit stronger reverberations than DH1 e DH3 Large room larger room than DH1 offers a sense of distance and sound diffusion effects e BYPASS Stereo sound DECODER Select this when playing analog PCM or other 2 channel sources The signals are converted into multichannel signals using the decoders shown below and played in the Dolby Headphone mode PLII C Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema mode PLII M Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode NEO 6 C DTS NEO 6 Cinema mode NEO 6 M DTS NEO 6 Music mode OFF The signals are played in the Dolby Headphone mode as such 2 channels
208. e When the Auto mode is selected 2 4 Channel Level Test Tone Start Yes 4 Level Clear an 143 Advanced Setup Part 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Test Tone Start then press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes 2 4 Channel Level KU 4 gt Manual Test Tone Test Tone Start Yes 4 Level Clear Yesj4 b A When Auto mode is selected Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all 7 the speakers to the same volume e The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order at 4 seconds intervals the first time and second time around 2 seconds intervals the third time around and on EL c H ER HSRA HSRB SW SLA K SLB H SBL SBR 7 X When the surround back speaker setting is set to Ispkr for Speaker Configuration this is set to SB Example When the volume is set to 11 5 dB while the test tone is being produced from the Front L ch speaker est Tone GFL 11 5 Auto C 0 OB mm FR 0 OB SR A 0 0B See SR B 0 OB SBR 0 OB D SBL 0 D oO gp SL B 0 04 4488 SLA 0 08 L SW 0 08 X The volume can be adjusted between 12 0 dB and 12 0 dB in units of 0 5 dB 4 When Manual mode i
209. e 20072 20209 20278 Tedelex 20037 20209 20348 20642 World 20348 Teknika 20000 20035 20037 XR 1000 20000 20035 20072 Teleavia 20041 Yamaha 20038 20041 Telefunken 20041 20067 20209 20240 20278 20320 Yamishi 20072 20278 20642 Yokan 20072 Telestar 20037 Yoko 20037 20240 Teletech 20000 20072 20278 Yoshita 20072 Tenosal 20072 Zenith 20000 20033 20039 20209 20479 21479 Tensai 20000 20072 20278 ZT Group ZIL Tevion 20209 20348 20642 ZX 20209 20348 Texet 20278 Thomas 20000 TV Thomson 20041 20060 20067 20278 20320 888 10264 10412 Thorn 20037 20041 20104 A Mark 10003 Tivo 20618 20636 20739 21503 A R Systems 10374 10455 TMK 20240 Abex 10032 Tokai 20037 20072 Accent 10009 Topline 20348 Acura 10009 Toshiba 20041 20042 20043 20045 20067 20081 Addison 10092 10108 10653 20209 20432 20845 21008 21145 21289 Admiral 10087 10093 10163 10264 10363 10463 21323 21503 21972 Advent 10761 10783 10815 10817 10842 Totevision 20037 20240 Adventura 10046 Touch 21972 Adyson 10032 10216 10217 Towada 20072 AEA 10037 Tradex 20081 AEG 10606 Triad 20278 Agashi 10216 10217 Uher 20240 AGB 10516 Ultravox 20278 Agef 10087 Unitech 20240 Aiko 0009 10037 10092 10216 10217 10264 United 20348 Aim 0045 10208 10264 10339 10374 10412 Universal 20209 10455 10606 10706 10753 10805 Universum 20000 20037 20081 20104 20209 20240 Aiwa 10163 10701 10705 10848 20315 20348 Akai 0009 10030 10035 1003
210. e Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check EQ Parameter Check KS Restore Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Auto Setup Room EQ menu reappears 1 1 5 Parameter Check Speaker Config Check Delay Time Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check EQ Parameter Check Yes 4 Restore GExit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears 1 Auto Setup Room EQ Auto Setup Room EQ Setup Direct Mode Setup Mic Input Select Parameter Check arwn CG Exit Advanced Setup System setup items and default values set upon shipment from the factory Part 2 1 Auto Setup Room EO Auto Setup Room EO Default settings Page This unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and Auto Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to 20 26 permit an appropriate automatic setting Room EQ Set the Room EO setting with All or Assign for each All Room EQ OFF 149 Setup surround mode Direct Mode Set the ON OFF setting of Room EQ in the case of the ae S r OFF 150 Setup surround mode is in Direct or Pure Direct Mic Input Set
211. e by preset Up Down L opp FM105 50MH TW r TUNING BAND CT CURSOR lt gt wi f RDS SEARCH E gt 4 CHANNEL gt TUNER AMP mode RT Radio Text e RT appears on the display when radio text data is received Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION O 3 E gt Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode 2 Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER EN mode Remote control unit 3 Press the RDS SEARCH button until RT ON appears on the display Xx The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display x While receiving an RDS broadcast station the text data broadcast from the station is displayed X To turn the display off press the CURSOR lt or gt button Xx If no text data is being broadcast NO TEXT DATA is displayed 4 RDS New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search RS RDS station PY Program category P Traffic into SmE Radio Text dor CHBS FM105 50MH Basic Operation KM Satellite Radio E ABOUT XM SATELLITE RADIO Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial free
212. e different input sources 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Component In Assign at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Component In Assign screen appears 4 Video Setup 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 4 2 Component In Assign 62 Component In Assign 4p gt VCRA E 3 Video Convert Mode Fpp SS VCRA None 4 HDMI Component Out W 3 RCA Val NONE 5 Audio Delay DBS 4 RCA 6 On Screen Display WRI 5 RCA VCR2 6 BNC Exit Default Yesi4 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the component video input terminal X Select from among 1 RCA to 5 RCA and 6 BNC If the same component video input terminal is selected the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to NONE x When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears Setting the Video Convert Mode e This sets whether or not to use the video conversion function 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Video Convert Mode at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Video Convert Mode screen appears 4 Video Setup 4 3 Video Co
213. e output Use a compatible player to play DVD Audio discs that are copyright protected by CPPM Among the devices that support HDMI some devices can control other devices via the HDMI cable however the AVR 5805CI cannot be controlled by another device via the HDMI cable The audio signals from the HDMI terminal including the sampling frequency and bit length may be limited by the equipment that is connected The video signals are not output properly if a device not compatible with HDCP is used When Through is set at Resolution under Setting the HDMI Component Out Setup use a monitor compatible with input resolutions of 480i 576i The video signals input from the HDMI or DVI D input terminals are output to the HDMI monitor with their original resolution so the image will not be displayed if the resolutions of the input signal and the monitor being used are not matched In this case change the setting of the resolution on the source device player to one which the monitor can handle The sound may be interrupted if the monitor s power is turned off when the HDMI audio signal s playback method is set to AMP at Setting the HDMI DVI In Assignment I page 111 112 Use a cable including the HDMI logo HDMI certified product for connection of the HDMI terminal Normal playback may not be possible if a cable that does not include the HDMI logo non HDM l certified product is used 36 Connecting Other S
214. easurement points 8 measurement points provides the best room correction effect After measuring at the number of points according to your listening environment press the CURSOR A or V button to select Calculate then press the CURSOR lt button e The speaker system is analyzed 1 1 Auto Setup 1 1 Aut t D Please place microphont uto Setup at ear height at Calculating 7th listening position Calculated OK Next 4 Retry4 Cancel UL A The amount of time required for the analysis depends on the number of speakers and the number of measuring points The greater the number of speakers and measuring points the longer the time required For example for ten speaker systems and 6 measuring points the calculations require approximately 6 minutes Xx Measurements can be ended when there are 5 or less measurement locations however to obtain better results measurements at 6 or more locations is recommended Xx Once the calculations are completed a screen for confirming the results of the measurements appears Check of the measurement result e The results of the measured items can be checked 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select items then press the ENTER button e Switch to the verification screen Example Speaker Config Check 1 1 Auto Setup Speaker Config Check GSpeaker Config Check Delay T
215. ect when two surround back channels SBL and SBR are connected Advanced Setup Part 1 Surr B Select according to the specifications of the player being used Also refer to the player s operating instructions e NOT USED Select when Surround B is not terminals The Surround A input signal is output to the Surround B output terminals e USED Select when Surround B is connected The playback in the MULTI CH DIRECT and MULTI CH IN is only possible when Mode is set to DSP Surr Sp Set when Mode is set to ANALOG Select according to the specifications of the player being used Also refer to the player s operating instructions e Surr A Select when using surround speakers A e Surr B Select when using surround speakers B e Surr A B Select when using both surround speakers A and B SW Level Select according to the specifications of the player being used Also refer to the player s operating instructions Set the level of playback of the analog input signal connected to the EXT IN Subwoofer 15dB default recommended 0 5 10 and 15 can be selected INPUT ATT Set when Mode is set to DSP If OVER LOAD appears on the display select 6 dB 4 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The EXT IN Setup menu reappears 5 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the Exit then press the ENTER button e The Audio Input Setup menu
216. ector e When connecting the AVR 5805CI and DVD player using an HDMI cable also connect the AVR 5805Cl and monitor or TV using an HDMI cable IS page 36 19 Easy Setup and Operation Auto Setup Room EO The Auto Setup and Room EO function of this unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate automatic setting The AVR 5805Cl s Audyssey MultEQ XT function has the feature that it provides the optimum listening environment at all listening positions in the home theater where there are often multiple listeners viewing programs together To achieve this it is first necessary to use a microphone to measure test tones generated from the different speakers at the various listening positions All this measured data is analyzed with a unique method to comprehensively improve acoustic characteristics in the listening area For optimum effectiveness measurements should be performed at six or more points Move the microphone successively within the listening area surrounded by the speakers as shown on the diagram below to measure the test tones When listening to music or viewing movies with the whole family move the microphone successively to the different positions in which the members of the family sit on the diagram indicates the points of installation and measure repeatedly Example Even if the number of people using the home theater is
217. ed according to the combination of speakers actually being used 2 1 Speaker Config 2 1 Speaker Config 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select mFront Sp e j arge mal Speaker Setup at the System Setup Menu aap Center Sp ZS ae ung then press the ENTER button S suevo IA Zi None e The Speaker Setup menu appears a on No d Sp B wm no o E ae e 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 2 Speaker Setup 1spkr 2 Speaker Setup GI Speaker Config Wiel Setup 2 Subwoofer Setup Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the 3 Delay Ti 5 Advanced Playback 4 CA Aa evel speaker then press the CURSOR lt or gt button EONS e CUD 5 Crossover Frequency 7 Option Setup BA eee to select the parameter x 7 THX Audio Setup Exit J Center Sp py 1 kel Front Sp Subwoofer b Surround Sp A o bei p Surround back Sp me E ai gi Surround Sp B Be Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears 140 I e Select Large or Small not according to the actual size of the speaker but according to the speaker s capacity for playing low frequency bass sound below the frequency set for the Crossover Frequency signals If you do not kn
218. el mode including Dolby Surround and Dolby Digital 5 1 channel sources Effects simulating the multi surround speakers of movie theaters are added to the surround channels 1 WIDE SCREEN SUPER Select this when watching baseball or soccer programs to achieve a sound as if you were actually at STADIUM the stadium This mode provides the longest reverberation signals Use this mode to achieve the feeling of a live concert in an arena with reflected sounds coming from 3 ROCK ARENA all directions This mode creates the sound field of a live house with a low ceiling and hard walls This mode gives 4 JAZZ CLUB jazz a very vivid realism 5 SE Select this for the sound of a concert hall rich in reverberations 6 Gg MOVIE Select this when watching monaural movies for a greater sense of expansion 7 VIDEO GAME Use this to enjoy video game sources Select this to emphasize the sense of expansion for music sources recorded in stereo Signals 8 MATRIX consisting of the difference component of the input signals the component that provides the sense of expansion processed for delay are output from the surround channel Select this mode to enjoy a virtual sound field produced from the front 2 channel speakers 9 VIRTUAL X This mode can be selected when surround playback is being performed in ZONE2 The front left channel signals are output to the surround and surround back signal left channels the front right
219. el to the walls at a position 2 to 3 feet 60 to 90 centimeters above ear level at the prime listening position 161 Additional Information e When using two surround back speakers set them at the back facing front and with both speakers at the same distance from the listening point When using one surround back speaker place it at the rear center facing the front at a slightly higher position 0 to 0 7 feet than the surround speakers e We recommend installing the surround back speaker s at a slightly downward facing angle This effectively prevents the surround back channel signals from reflecting off the monitor or screen at the front center resulting in interference and making the sense of movement from the front to the back less sharp e Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 5805Cl and set settings on the setup menu to A This is the factory default setting ES page 153 2 Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types or dipolar THX types provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker monopolar Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position mounted above ear level Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position Surround
220. elect Network Setup at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Network Setup screen appears 7 Option Setup N Channel Setup 7 7 Network Setup 1 2 Power Amp Assign 3 Volume Control 4 Trigger Out 5 AC Outlet Assign 6 Setup Memory Lock E7 Network Setup Exit FIP Address Proxy Network Option Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select IP Address then press the ENTER button e The IP Address screen appears 7 7 IP Address S DHCP IN gt fo 7 IP Address IP 192 168 000 0 900 000 000 2099 Address Primary 000 000 000 000 Subnet 255 255 255 04 PNS Mask Second 000 000 000 000 DNS x The IP address etc is not displayed when DHCP is set to ON and the unit is not connected to a network Press the CURSOR lt I or button to select OFF e The DHCP function is disabled 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired setting item then press the CURSOR gt button and CURSOR A or V button to input the address IP Address Set the IP address within the ranges shown below The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set CLASS A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 CEAS JE 212 un 22 et ee CLASS C 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 Subnet Mask When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVR 5805Cl input the subnet mask
221. elect the TUNER EN mode Remote control unit Press the RDS SEARCH button until TP SEARCH appears on the display ya RDS New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search RDS RDS station PTY Program category Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset CHB5 FM105 50MH Down Up X The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display Basic Operation FUNCTION STATUS CURSOR lt gt BAND TUNING Press the CHANNEL button e Automatically begin the TP search operation RDS Search New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search RDS RDS station PTY Program category hl Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tune by preset Upj Down x If no TP station is found with above operation all the reception bands are searched x The station name is displayed on the display after searching stops 5 To continue searching repeat step 3 x If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies are searched NO PROGRAMME is displayed 4 RDS BR New tuning system for your convenience 1 Push RDS Search SN RDS I RDS station PTY Program category TP Traffic info RT Radio Text 2 Tun
222. els either according to the playback sources or to suit your tastes as described below Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press the CH SEL ENTER button e The Channel Vol screen appears Channel Vol 0 0B SBR 0 0B SBL 0 0B SL Fader FRONT 4 gt REAR Press the CURSOR A V or CH SEL ENTER button to select the speaker X The channel switches as shown below each time the CH SEL ENTER button is pressed ELH c HFR HIswH SR SL RASI HS U _FADER ry Xx ZONE2 surround back speakers are only displayed when 7 1ch is selected for the ZONE2 channel output setting at Channel Setup ES page 126 128 x When the ZONE2 surround back speaker setting is set to 1spkr for Speaker Configuration this is set to SB 4 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the level Xx The adjustment range for the different channels is 12 0 dB to 12 0 dB Xx The sound from the subwoofer can be completely cut by lowering the SW subwoofer setting one additional step from 12 0 dB setting it to OFF Advanced Operation Xx ZONE2 surround back speakers are only displayed AMP ds when 7 1ch is selected for the ZONE2 channel output setting at Channel Setup x When the ZONE2 surround back speaker setting is set USER MODE 2222 5 to 1spkr for Speaker Configuration
223. en place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position and parallel to the walls at a position 2 to 3 feet 60 to 90 centimeters above ear level at the prime listening position e Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 5805CI and set settings on the setup menu to A This is the factory default setting I page 153 e The surround speakers can be switched freely during playback with the surround parameter adjustment I page 45 Additional Information Surround The AVR 5805CI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater Dolby Surround 1 Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is the multi channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories A total of 5 1 channels are played 3 front channels FL ER and C 2 surround channels SL and SR and the LEET channel for low frequencies Because of this there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a three dimensional feeling sense of distance movement and positioning is achieved A real overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well 2 Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic Il is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories Regular music such as that on CDs is
224. en press the ENTER button distance of the speakers This option is not available when e The System Setup Menu reappears 1spkr is selected e This setting is necessary to achieve the optimum effect in the THX Surround EX THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode It is recommended that SBL SBR speakers are placed together as close as possible 2 Speaker Setup 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Setup 3 Delay Time 4 Channel Level 5 Crossover Frequency 6 Surround Sp Setup 7 THX Audio Setup GExit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Surround Back Speaker Position at the THX Audio Setup screen then press the ENTER button 2 7 THX Audio Setup Boundary Gain Compensation Surround Back Speaker Position Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the settings according to the distances of the two surround back speakers 127 page 142 L11 then press the ENTER button e The THX Audio Setup screen reappears 2 7 THX Audio Setup Set The distance Between SBL SBR 4 Oft to 1ft gt Om to 0 3m A Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Speaker Setup menu reappears 2 7 THX Audio Setup Boundary Gain Compensation Surround Back Speaker Position WExit 148 Advanced Setup Part 2 Others Setup Setting the Room EQ Setup Press the
225. encoded into 5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater to create a three dimensional sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources 3 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic H matrix decoding technology Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7 1 channels There are three modes Music suited for playing music Cinema suited for playing movies and Game which is optimum for playing games 4 Dolby Headphone This is a three dimensional sound technology developed jointly by Dolby Laboratories and Lake Technology Ltd of Australia for achieving surround sound using regular headphones Previously when using headphones all the sounds resonated inside the head and it was uncomfortable to listen with headphones for long periods of time Dolby Headphone simulates speaker playback in a room and places the sound at the front or the sides outside the head to achieve a powerful sound like the sound of movie or home theaters This technology is mainly for multichannel audio video equipment with Dolby Digital or Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoding functions and works with a high performance digital signal processing DSP chip Dolby Headphone is effective not o
226. er is automatically set to Yes and when Subwoofer is set to No Front is automatically set to Large Advanced Setup Part 2 Setting the low frequency distribution e This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Subwoofer Setup at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Subwoofer Setup screen appears 2 Speaker Setup 2 f t Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Setup Subwoofer Setup Delay Time Channel Level m G Subwoofer Mode Crossover Frequenc FE M 4 LFE Main Surround Sp Setup Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting LFE THX For any channel s that are set to LARGE low frequencies in that channel s corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only Low frequencies that are directed to the subwoofer s are from the program source LFE channel and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL THX recommends this mode so that bass interference is less likely to occur in the room LFE Main Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer s Depending upon the characteristics of the LARGE main speakers this mode may provide a more even low frequency response throughout the listen
227. ervals the first time and second time around 2 seconds intervals the third time around and on Kg C HER D SsWwHHSLHH SRH Example When the volume is set to 11 5 dB while the test tone is being produced from the Front L ch speaker est ToneAuto Zone 2 GFL 4 11 54 G 0 OB ae eB FR 0 Ob SR 0 OB D SL 0 Ob SW 0 08 X The volume can be adjusted between 12 0 dB and 12 0 dB in units of 0 5 dB 4 When Manual mode is selected Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the 2 speaker used in ZONE2 then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume Example Manual mode is selected est Tone Manual Zone 2 mm GFL 4 11 54 C 0 Ob kl Wl E FR 0 Ob SR 0 OB D SL 0 OB n sw 0 048 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Channel Level screen reappears e To cancel the settings press the CURSOR lt button to select Level Clear and Yes on the Channel Level screen then make the settings again 6 4 Channel Level Zone 2 Test Tone 04 Manual Test Tone Start Yes 4 Level Clear Ri 122 e When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system you may also need to adjust the subwoofer
228. ess the ZONE3 4 REC SELECT button to display the ZONE3 ZONE4 SOURCE on the display e f the ZONE3 SOURCE is selected the MULTI indicator light The display switches as follows each time the button is pressed ZONE3 ZONE4 REC OUT Turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source you want to output appears on the display Start playing the source to be output 3 For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the respective components I e The signals of the source selected in the ZONE3 mode are also output from the VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VCR 4 and CDR TAPE recording output terminals e Digital signals are not output from the ZONE3 and ZONE4 audio output terminals e About the MULTI ZONE connections ES page 88 92 Advanced Operation Multi zone power indicators Remote control unit operations during multi source playback 1 I Select the zone which you want to operate pressing the AMP buttons Press the ON button to turn on the Zone power e The multi zone power indicator light Press the OFF button to turn off the zone power The multi zone power indicator on main unit is off Press the FUNCTION button to select the input function you wish to operate Select the input mode only ZONE2 mode Press the INPUT MODE button to switch to the input AUTO ANALOG The volume of the Ae of the different zones can be adjusted with the VOLUME button on the re
229. etting is set AVR 5805Cl to 9 1 channels Please set under Extra Setup only when A you want to change this arrangement fp ee re ee oe ee ye OTE Eet a Eet I Connect the AVR 5805Cl s Extra Setup gt monitor output terminal to he TV s vi i inal AA input termina E Setuc i i 2 Power Amplifier Assignment p I l Perform the preliminary measurements 1 Measuring the background noise noise in the room 2 Determining whether or not speakers are connected 3 Checking the polarities of the speakers The measurement of the speakers in the main listening position Speaker Configuration Delay Time speaker distance Channel Level AUN Crossover Frequency 5 Room EQ in the 2nd to 8th listening position Y Play a DVD Check of the measurement result The measurement of the speakers Store the measurement result in the memory SS P e Do not plug in the power supply cord until all connections have been completed 14 Easy Setup and Operation Speaker system layout E Basic system layout For a THX Ultra2 system e The following is an example of the basic layout for a system consisting of eight speaker systems and a television monitor Subwoofer Center speaker system Surround back speaker systems Front speaker systems Set these at the sides of the TV or screen with their front surfa
230. evious file x During playback press the ENTER button once to pause playback then press the ENTER button again to resume playback x If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than 2 seconds when in the play or pause mode playback stops and the previous menu screen reappears Basic Operation E Playing music files that have been preset or E Examples of web control operation screens registered in your favorites The settings of the setup items are the same as with normal operations Refer to System Setup e The same operations as for Internet radio stations can be Below are some examples of operation screens used to preset music files or register them in your favorites Function selection screen and play them NOTE Input Function e Registered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten e When the operations describe below are performed the music server database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play the music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites When the music server is stopped and restarted When music files are deleted from or added to the music server e When using an ESCIENT server place ESCIENT before the server name Surround mode selection screen Surround Mode Stereo oleren Hama THY Gneme Operating the AVR 5805CI using a browser e Internet Explorer can be used on the computer connected to the AVR 5805C
231. f router that can be used differs for different ISPs For details contact your ISP or a computer store E Ethernet cable CAT 5 The AVR 5805Cl does not come with an Ethernet cable Purchase one of the required length Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise We recommend using a normal type cable If the sound is broken in an environment with the electric products subject to much power noise or a noisy network environment use a shielded type Ethernet cable This could improve the sound E Personal Computer Install Windows Media Connect on your computer The required system for forming a music server is as described below 1 OS Operating System Windows XP Service pack2 2 Processor Intel PentiumII or AMD processor etc We recommend 1 GHz or greater 3 RAM Min 128 MB we recommend 256 MB or greater 4 Software NET Framework 1 1 5 Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 01 or later e LAN port required e 300 MB or greater free hard disc space required Xx Extra free space is necessary to store music files The following table gives an approximate estimate of the required free space F Per one Format Bit rate inate Per one hour 128 kbps 1 MB 60 MB 192 kbps 1 5 MB 90 MB MP3 WMA 256 kbps 2 MB 120 MB 392 kbps 3 MB 180 MB WAV LPCM 1400 kbps 10 MB 600 MB E Others e When the contract with your provider is of the type by which the
232. formed with the Cinema mode of the SE Sue PLIIx decoder and the surround back channel is ae LEE 4 0B reproduced TONE 1 PLIIx Music E Bad NET Processing is performed with the Music mode of the a aB P LII x CINEMAT PLIIx decoder and the surround back channel is L Defaut Yes 4 reproduced 2 2ch source 2 When you would like to play back with the Dolby Digital OFF EK mode set AFDM to OFF and select MTRX ON Playback is conducted without using the surround back with SB CH OUT speaker Dolby Digital EK ON CINEMAIE Q 4 OFF gt Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker D GOMP Tee Xx This operation can be performed directly pressing the e e E LEE 404 SURROUND BACK button TONE D AFDM d tt og SB CH OUT A ABE 4MTRX ON gt a Yes 4 x Some discs recorded in Dolby Digital EX do not include EX flag If the playing mode does not switch automatically when the AFDM turns ON during playback manually set SB CH OUT to PLIIx Cinema or MTRX ON 53 Basic Operation STANDARD SURROUND PARAMETER CURSOR ENTER SURROUND BACK Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround only with digital input 1 Press the STANDARD button to select STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround mode 2 Play a program source with the Dias PPA mark e The Dolby Digital indicator lights ee when playing Dolby Digital Sai sources lights e The DTS indic
233. g an IEEE1394 cable For instructions on playing Super Audio CDs CS page 99 e Assign the IEEE1394 input the input source For details see Setting the IEEE1394 Assignment IG page 107 g DVD player Bil IEEE1394 D Gm JEEE 1394 400 B ug AUDIO m E IEEE1394 network O Up to 17 devices can be connected using daisy chain type connections 2 Up to 63 devices can be connected using tree type connections Do not loop the connections 3 LINK CHECK is displayed when an input source to which an IEEE1394 is assigned is selected and connection to the IEEE1394 device is being checked 4 If the connection is looped LOOP CONNECT is displayed Check the connections and undo the loop NOTE e Do not use an IEEE1394 cable to connect the AVR 5805Cl with a computer e The AVR 5805C will not operate when connected to equipment other than that conforming to IEEE1394 AUDIO A amp M protocol standards or when connected to computer peripherals Also please note that operation is not guaranteed even when connected to IEEE1394 compatible equipment Whether or not data and control signals can be sent and received between interconnected IEEE1394 compatible equipment depends on the functions of the different equipment Please read the operating instructions of the equipment to be connected e Use an S400 compatible 4 pin IEEE1394 cable to connect e Video signals are not transferred
234. h power amplifier can be assigned to any desired channel to best suit the application For details refer to Setting the Channel Setup and Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment ES page 129 133 e When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the other components Example 9 1 channel connections Front Sibwoofer Center Front right speaker speaker left speaker Connection terminal for LZ Surround subwoofer with ye Surround ight k built in amplifier left speaker rig wi er subwoofer etc tA Surround Surround right speaker left speaker B B We Surround back Surround back right speaker left speaker e Precautions when connecting speakers If a speaker is placed near a TV or video monitor the colors on the screen may be disturbed by the speaker s magnetism If this should happen move the speaker away to a position where it does not have this effect NOTE e Route the connection cables etc in such a way that they do not obstruct the ventilation holes e When using only one surround back speaker connect it to left channel L5 17 Easy Setup and Operation Connecting a DVD player and TV Monitor e T
235. he FUNCTION knob or press the AUX button to select NetAudio AMP mode e The Network Audio menu appears FUNCTION Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Network Audio Favorites Internet Radio Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Internet Radio then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e The initial screen when not connected to the Internet is displayed Internet Radio not available Update Press Enter 76 MEMORY BLOCK ENTER AUX AMP mode Connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e The update screen appears Manual Update Start Update Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button once again e The latest list of radio stations is downloaded from the vTuner site Several minutes are required for this download Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired setting item then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button Internet Radio Genres Countries New Stations Popular Stations Help 1 5 x Finally the list of Internet radio stations is displayed and those that can be played are indicated by the 3x mark in front of them Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the desired radio station then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e Connection starts and the station starts playing once the buffer reaches 100 x During playback press the ENTER
236. he IR segment blinks twice Resetting all the settings 1 2 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 8 1 button 9 gt 8 gt 1 in that order e The IR segment blinks 4 times and the learning function resetting mode is set e Clear the entire system memory which will restore the remote control unit to the factory default settings Advanced Operation Multi zone music entertainment system e When the outputs of the ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 OUT terminals are wired and connected to power amplifiers installed in other rooms different sources can be played in rooms other than the MAIN ZONE in which this unit and the playback devices are installed Refer to ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 on the diagram below e Settings can be made at Power Amp Assign in the System Setup Menu so that the same source as the ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 pre out terminals can be played from the speakers connected to the ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE4 speaker terminals IF page 129 133 x To control playback devices other than the ones above either use that device s remote control unit or preset a separately sold programmable remote control unit e For the AUDIO output use high quality pin plug cords and wire in such a way that there is no humming or noise e For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices refer to the devices operating instruct
237. hms 5 Hz 100 MHz 0 3 dB 174 Specifications E Tuner section FM note uV at 75 Q ohms 0 dBf 1 x 10718 W AM Receiving Range 87 5 MHz 107 9 MHz 520 kHz 1710 kHz Usable Sensitivity 1 0 uV 11 2 dBf 18 uV 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity MONO 1 6 uV 15 3 dBf STEREO 23 uV 38 5 dBf S N IHF A MONO 77 dB 50 dB STEREO 72 dB Total Harmonic Distortion at 1 kHz MONO 0 15 STEREO 0 3 Yo E General Power supply AC 120 V 60 Hz Power consumption 13A 1 W Max Standby Maximum external dimensions 434 VV x 280 H x 505 D mm 17 3 32 x 11 1 32 x 19 7 8 Mass 44 0 kg 97 Ibs E Remote control unit RC 1036 Batteries LR6 AA Type two batteries External dimensions 63 W x 238 H x 31 D mm 2 31 64 x 9 3 8 x 1 7 32 Mass 190 g Approx 6 7 oz including batteries For purposes of improvement specifications and design are subject to change without notice 175 List of preset codes Liste de codes preregles DVD 3D Lab Acoustic Solutions Advent AEG AFK Afreey Aim Airis Aiwa Akai Akira Akura Alba Alco Allegro Amitech 40539 40713 41016 40770 41051 40698 40699 41250 40533 40690 41089 40699 41051 40539 40730 40790 40869 40770 Amphion Media Works Amstrad AMW Ansonic Aper Apex Digital Arianet Aspire Digital Audiosonic Audiovox Awa Axion B amp K Basic Line Baze Bellagio Black Diamond Blaupunkt Blue
238. ht or speakers with bipolar or dipolar properties are used SL Surround L channel SR Surround R channel SB Surround B back channel 159 Additional Information Surround back speakers The THX Surround EX format adds new Surround Back SB channels to the conventional 5 1 channel system This makes it easy to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener something that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventional multi surround speakers In addition the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position Change of positioning and acoustic image with 5 1 channel systems ns SERIE Py Oooodaa Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL Change of positioning and acoustic image with THX Surround EX system Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL Speaker s for one or two channels are required in order to achieve a THX Surround EX system with the AVR 5805CI Adding these however allows you to achieve stronger surround effects not only with sources recorded in THX Surround EX but also with conventional 2 to 5 1 channel sources The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for achieving surround sound with up to 7 1 channels using surround back speakers for so
239. i 1g page 108 4 Video Setup 71 HDMI DVI In Assign 11 Component In Assign 12 Video Convert Mode 12 HDMI Component Out 13 Audio Delay On Screen Display 14 115 Exit 5 Advanced Playback GI 2ch Direct Stereo t 1237 page 116 2 Dolby Digital Setup pe page 117 3 Auto Surround Mode Te page 117 4 Manual EQ Setup Lagos page 118 gt 6 Zone Setup 1 Speaker Conf i gm IG Page 120 2 Subwoofer Moden Le Page 20 3 Delay Time 2 2 tee page 21 4 Channel Level 2222 22 22 P 22 5 Crossover Frequency Aen 1 Page 6 Video Setup mmea Le Page 123 7 Zone3 4 Tone Ch Ley page 123 Exit Lu page 124 Getting Started Using the Network Audio Function OMEN He ina TI aleet ees 74 IMIWIETS Se re E DEE 74 System reguirements 74 76 ema e ia ma ara AA AAA AAA 16 77 Presetting registering Internet radio StatiONS lt 77 Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites Ui VS Character search function searching by first letter Wpdatingstherlistotiragiorstall mS sesaorang Playing music files stored on the computer MUSIC Se NE Th ee EE 79 80 Operating the AVR 5805CI using a browser s sssassieseeeeeeeeeeee 80 Advanced Operation Remote control unit Operating DENON audio Gomponemts 81 Setting the preset Memory Tupneton 82 Operating a component stored in the preset memory 82 83
240. ic Conrac Conrowa Contec Continental Edison Cosmel Craig Crosley Crown Crown Mustang CS Electronics CTC Curtis Mathes CXC Cybertron PRESET CODE 10056 10009 10037 10320 10370 10754 10821 10032 10808 10009 10145 10698 10753 10009 10036 10216 10264 10109 10287 10037 10337 10180 10054 10087 10009 10037 10389 1 0359 10486 10487 10714 10715 10672 10216 10218 10247 10016 10030 10056 10060 10451 10466 10180 10218 10092 10009 10108 10046 10337 10102 10370 10714 10163 10411 10156 11156 10037 10698 10487 10247 10039 10370 110579 10247 10039 10093 10702 10179 10092 10179 10180 10180 10056 10060 10092 10217 10218 10247 10371 10556 10579 10247 10264 10282 10418 10264 10412 10696 11170 10157 10180 10185 10053 10180 10208 10412 10418 10421 10606 10672 10712 10047 10051 10054 10145 10154 10166 11147 11347 D Vision 10037 D Boss 10037 Daewoo 10003 10039 10178 10451 10661 11661 Dainichi 10216 Dansai 10009 10216 Dansette 10412 Dantax 10606 Datsura 10208 Dawa 10009 Daytek 10037 Dayton 10009 Daytron 10019 Dayu 10374 De Graaf 10208 DEC 10418 Decca 10037 Deitron 10037 Dell 11080 Denko 10264 Denon 10145 Denstar 10628 Denver 10037 DER 10193 Desmet 10009 Diamant 10037 Diamond 10009 10698 Dick Smith Electro
241. ic Mudan ultibroadcast Multitec ultitech Murphy usikland Myryad AD Naiko anbao Nansheng aonis NAT ational NEC Neckermann NEI eovia Nesco etsat NetTV etwork Neufunk ew Tech Newave icam zZz icamagic ikkai Z ikko Nikon 10216 10516 10009 10700 10037 10055 10019 6 102 10032 107 10009 10817 10193 10037 10009 10247 10039 10037 10556 10156 10037 10009 10264 10363 10226 10051 10009 10051 10170 10374 10508 10882 10037 10320 10556 10037 10865 10179 10037 UNE 10032 10037 10217 10009 10544 10216 10009 10216 10030 10848 10217 10609 10843 10093 10030 10361 10051 10486 10037 10264 10163 10218 10178 10606 10264 10412 10055 10011 10053 10178 10381 10603 11170 10087 10363 10163 10247 10337 10218 10092 10032 10217 10092 10290 10056 10370 10208 10668 10102 10363 10216 10247 10361 10412 10817 10208 10019 10056 10186 10412 10661 11270 10163 0370 10287 10556 10093 10035 10218 10178 IN 10060 10512 10226 MINI SA 10180 10486 10866 10848 11704 10191 z 10337 10610 s OTS 10036 10264 10226 10030 10154 10217 10455 10704 10200 0411 10292 10370 10163 10185
242. ic Polytron Praxis Predki Preisner Premier Premiere Prima Primacom PRESET CODE 00243 01232 00114 01283 00879 01334 00351 00114 01099 00497 00345 01205 00515 00200 00791 00887 00834 01111 00710 00299 00243 00157 01159 00615 00152 01304 00173 01011 00132 00724 00099 00571 00749 00887 01442 01273 00592 01339 01334 00292 00396 00442 00396 Oils 00421 00132 00292 00292 00795 01111 00331 01412 00136 01143 00157 01100 00668 00241 00795 01175 00587 00396 00501 00879 00247 01320 00455 01159 00515 00133 00613 00750 00898 01749 00863 00329 00871 00396 00592 00723 00442 00417 00421 00329 00847 01323 01161 00421 00455 01404 00607 00668 00173 00668 00805 01076 01017 00352 00794 00873 00668 00592 00501 00455 00853 01356 00501 00500 01508 00834 00710 00200 00710 00818 01114 01200 00853 01101 01429 00834 00548 00497 00867 01423 00571 00701 01526 00292 00722 00853 01118 01308 01113 01043 00834 00720 00879 01623 00847 00455 00724 00856 01142 Pro Visat Prod Profile Promax Prosat Proscan Protek Proton ProVision Pye Pyxis ONS Ouadral Quelle Radiola RadioShack Radix
243. ie soundtrack in a normal home environment 164 Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theater there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you In a home theater only two speakers located to the side of your head are used The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers Adaptive Decorrelation In a movie theater a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience while in a home theater there are usually only two speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same Spacious Surround experience as in a movie theater THX Ultra2 Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2 certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of q
244. iemens Siera Silva Silver Singer Sinudyne Smaragd Sonic Blue Soniko Sonitron Sonneclair Sonolor Sontec Sonwa Sony Soundwave Ssangyong Stack 9 Starlite Stern SIIS Sunkai Sunstar Suntronic Sunwood Supra Sylvania Symphonic Systemax T A Tagar Systems Taisho Tandberg Tandy Tashiko Tatung Tchibo TCM PRESET CODE 20081 20037 20045 20072 20037 20037 20000 20072 20037 20240 20037 20081 20037 20278 20045 20081 20348 20614 20072 20104 20072 20046 20037 20642 20000 D235 20037 20072 21972 20037 20278 20042 20209 20000 20000 20072 20037 20000 20000 21972 20162 21972 20209 20278 20000 20000 20000 20081 20348 20348 20041 20048 20104 20046 20072 20209 20616 20032 21972 20209 20278 20240 20035 20104 20037 20041 20209 20209 20807 20081 20104 20320 20347 20348 20033 20035 20636 21232 20348 20348 20278 20348 20043 20081 21781 20048 20081 20240 20043 20045 20048 20067 20348 Teac 20000 20037 20041 20072 20278 20642 Wards 20000 20033 20035 20038 20039 20042 Tec 20072 20045 20046 20047 20048 20060 20072 Tech Line 20072 20081 20149 20240 Technics 20035 20081 20162 20226 Watson 20081 20642 TechniSat 20209 Wharfedale 20642 Teco 20035 20037 20038 20041 20048 White Westinghous
245. ime Check Channel Level Check SE deg Crossover Freg Check gees Center Sp Sie None Store D Subwoofer a No Cancel4 a fa irst screen Press the ENTER button e Switch to the second screen Example Speaker Config Check Speaker Config Check m Surround Sp A Kl F E Bo None Sp B D SHA None n Sp Back Aa Sill None Ispkr Second screen If the check ends press the ENTER button again Press the CURSOR A or V button to select whether or not to save the data you have checked Store Set with the checked measurement value All parameters are stored up Cancel Cancel the auto setup settings 1 1 Auto Setup Speaker Config Check Delay Time Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check Stored Cancel 25 Easy Setup and Operation Press the CURSOR lt button e After the data is stored the Auto Setup Room EQ menu appears automatically e Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers and the interaction with the room THX recommends setting the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually Sometimes due to interaction with the room you may notice irregular results when setting the level and or distance of the main speakers If this happens THX recommends setting them manually Please note that any TH
246. in Dolby Surround THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX MUSIC MODE THX Games Mode PLIIx C THX IE page 52 53 e These modes are suited for playing 5 1 channel sources in 7 1 channels Select the desired surround mode for the movie and music sources Sources recorded in stereo Sources recorded in monaural PURE DIRECT IS page 50 e By suspending all circuits and processes not required analog input music playback can be played with optimum quality DIRECT STEREO e Effective for achieving pure playback e f there is no need for tone control or distribution of the low frequencies in function of the speaker configuration select the DIRECT mode to achieve the best sound quality 1S page 50 DENON Original Surround Modes IGP page 61 62 e Select these for 7 1 channel playback with sources recorded in stereo or monaural e The effects are different for each of the surround modes Select the one most suited for the source being used DTS NEO 6 IGE page 58 e This is a surround mode for playing 6 1 or 7 1 channel stereo sources developed by Digital Theater Systems One of two playing modes MUSIC for music sources or CINEMA for movie sources can be selected according to your preferences DOLBY PRO LOGIC IIx 2 IGS page 56 57 e Developed by Dolby Laboratories this surround mode provides 7 1 channel surround sound with conventional stereo 2 channel sources
247. ing room Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Speaker Setup menu reappears 141 Advanced Setup Part 2 I E Assignment of low frequency signal range e The only signals produced from the subwoofer channel are LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS signals and the low frequency signal range of channels set to Small in the setup menu The low frequency signal range of channels set to Large are produced from those channels E Subwoofer Setup e The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when and Yes is set for the subwoofer in the Speaker Configuration settings ES page 140 141 e When the input signal is analog or a PCM signal not including LFE signals if LFE THX is selected the low frequency component Is not output from the subwoofer To output the subwoofer channel select LFE Main Setting the Delay Time e This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the audio signals are produced from the speakers and subwoofer according to the listening position e Two surround back speakers are required to use the THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music mode and THX Games mode Set the surround back speakers so that the distance to the istening position is the same for both the left and right speakers t is also recommended that the deviations of the distance from the listening position to L and R channel speakers front eft FL and front
248. ion Choose Dolby Digital DTS without THX and Surround Speakers B the direct radiating speakers mounted at the rear corners of the listening room Then by simply activating the THX function used during movie playback the Surround A speakers are automatically activated For multi channel music listening Dolby Digital or DTS music programs turn off the THX enhancements by touching the THX button on the remote control and the Surround B speakers will be automatically activated Example Movie sources Dolby DTS Surround etc THX or THX 5 1 mode Speakers A Music sources DVD video DTS CD etc Dolby DTS Surround Speakers B X The speakers can be switched at the touch of a button by turning HOME THX CINEMA on when playing movies and off when playing multi channel music 2 When not using surround back speakers Front speakers Center speaker Monitor Subwoofer Surround speakers As seen from above Surround speaker Front speaker Ng Wa 2 to 3 feet As seen from the side e Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the TV or monitor screen as possible Set the center speaker between the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening position than the front speakers e Consult the operating instructions for your subwoofer for advice on placing the subwoofer within the listening room e f the surround speakers are direct radiating monopolar th
249. ions e Video signals are output from the ZONES video output terminals even when the power of ZONES is turned off ZONE2 playback e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with pre out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals composite S Video and component as the ZONE2 output terminals e A separately sold power amplifier or premain amplifier can be connected to enjoy ZONE2 playback e The AVR 5805C ZONE2 monitor output is equipped with a video conversion function so connect the ZONE2 monitor output terminal with a video S Video or component video cable For details see The video conversion function ES page 28 87 Advanced Operation E ZONE2 5 1 channel system e 5 1 channel playback is possible in ZONE2 if 5 1CH is selected for the ZONE2 playback channel setting at Channel Setup IS page 126 128 in the System Setup Menu EE Default setting of ZONE2 channel is 5 1CH ZONE2 VIDEO signal cable MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable MAIN ZONE 9 1 channel system ZONE2 5 1 channel system C C H FL FL D Power amplifier lt 7 AUDIO OUT sl VARIABLE OUT fc DVD player AVR 5805Cl ZONE2 TTT E SYSTEM REMOTE EE NI RC 1036 TV Monitor J COMPONENT VIDEO IN q r rs PR D oO 7 CH CA VIDEO IN Ne J Power amplifier D 5 1ch AUDIO IN oO 1
250. iumb EFFECT 4105 q p D TONE 4 n SB CH OUT AB g bo q Default Yes4 jJ Xx The screen selected surround mode appears Press the CURSOR or V button to select TONE ROCK ARENA D ROOM SIZE 2 4med ium EFFECT410 p D aon SB CH OUT AA ON lt gt OFF Default Yes4 98 Press the CURSOR lt button e Switch to the Tone Control screen e N Tone Control FTone Defeat Ri FF Press the CURSOR gt button to select Tone Defeat OFF A N Tone Control Tone Defeat ON viii Bass 4 68 Treble 4 48 gt x A x If you do not want to the tone to be adjusted set Tone Defeat to ON Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Bass or Treble Press the CURSOR lt 1 or gt button to set the level Press the ENTER button e The surround parameter menu reappears Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting Advanced Operation Other function FUNCTION DIRECT STEREO Playing Super Audio CDs with an IEEE1394 cable Select the input source to which IEEE1394 was assigned at the IEEE1394 Assign 127 page 107 in the system setup 1 Example CD FUNCTION ICH Main unit e The IEEE1394 indicator lights Remote control unit Ae a
251. ived automatically and stored in the memory 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Tuner Presets at the Audio Input Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Tuner Presets screen appears Audio Input Setup 3 7 Tuner Presets Digital EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename 1 In Assign 2 3 4 5 EEE1394 Assign 6 7 E Auto Preset Memory Preset Skip EEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets Kit Preset Name Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Auto Preset Memory then press the ENTER button e Switch to the Auto Preset Memory screen 3 7 Auto Preset Memory Auto Tuning amp Preset Station Memory Storing Preset Memory Start Yes 4 Press the CURSOR lt button to select Yes e Search flashes on the screen and searching begins e Completed appears once searching is completed e The display automatically switches to the Tuner Presets screen P e f an FM station cannot be preset automatically due to poor reception use the Manual tuning operation ES page 66 to tune in the station then preset it using the manual Preset memory operation IS page 66 108 E Preset Skip e Preset channels that are not used often can be skipped 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Preset Skip at the Tuner Presets screen then press the ENTER b
252. ividual surround modes When All is selected can be stored in the memory Press the ENTER button x Whenever the ROOM EQ button is pressed the display 1 e The Select the EQ Curve screen appears swiiies as dionn bao 1 2 Room EQ Setup OFF Audyssey Front gt Select The EQ Curve Manual lt Flat Room EQ tAudysseyt Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Auto Setup Room EO menu reappears n e The Equalizer setting of Audyssey Front and Flat can be selected after performing the Auto Setup e When the speaker set as None with the Auto Setup is changed to on manually the equalizer of Audyssey Front and Flat cannot be used e The Equalizer setting can be selected directly by ROOM EQ button e When headphones are connected the Room EQ cannot be used 149 Advanced Setup Part 2 Setting the Direct Mode Setup e Set the ON OFF setting of Room EQ in the case of the surround mode is in DIRECT or PURE DIRECT Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Direct Mode Setup at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button e The Direct Mode Setup screen appears 1 Auto Setup Room EQ N kito Setup 1 3 Direct Mode Setup Room EQ Setup Direct Mode Setup Mic Input Select Parameter Check DIRECT PURE DIRECT Room EQ ON HRS E
253. just the tone for the bass The bass sound can be adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in steps of 2 0 dB Treble Adjust the tone for the treble The treble sound can be adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in steps of 2 0 dB HPF Set this to ON if your speakers do not have a very strong capacity for producing low bass Using the high pass filter makes it possible to reduce distortion of the bass sound Channel Level Set so that the playback level is the same for the left and right channels The volume can adjusted between 12 dB and 12 dB in steps of 1 0 dB Press the ENTER button e The Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev screen reappears x Use the same procedure to make the settings for ZONE4 124 Advanced Setup Part 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Zone Setup menu reappears 6 7 Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev Zone3 Tone Ch Lev Zone4 Tone Ch Lev GExit J Press the CURSOR or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears E Zone Setup setting when ZONEZ is set to STEREO or MONO e The Zone Setup screen shown below is displayed when STEREO or MONO is selected for the ZONE2 channel setting at Channel Setup 6 Zone Setup GI Zone Tone Ch Lev 2 Zone3 Tone Ch Lev 3 Zone4 Tone Ch Lev 4 Video Setup e ZONE2 Tone Ch Le
254. kers and different surround modes for the two types of sources Front speakers Center speaker Surround speakers A Surround back speakers N ofl Surround speakers B As seen from above Surround Surround back speakers A ut Point slightly Front speaker Se downwards 2 to 3 Surround speakers B As seen from the side 162 e Set the front speakers slightly wider apart than the setup for watching movies only and point them toward the listening position in order assure clear positioning of the sound Set the center speaker in the same positions as in example O Set surround speakers A for watching movies in the positions described in example or depending on the types of speakers used Set surround speakers B for playing multi channel music at the same height as the front speakers and slightly at an angle to the rear of the listening position and point them toward the listening position Connect the surround speakers for watching movies to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR 5805Cl the surround speakers for playing multi channel music to the surround speaker B terminals Set the surround speaker selection on the setup menu For instructions ES page 146 147 e To activate the appropriate speakers for movies and music we suggest that during setup choose Dolby Digital DTS with THX and Surround Speakers A the bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening posit
255. l or DTS Press the HOME THX CINEMA button to select Home THX Cinema mode Dees DIGITALI dis Play a program source with the mark e The Dolby Digital indicator lights when playing Dolby Digital sources anr ie DODIGITAL Sy iS lights e The DTS indicator lights when playing DTS sources ll er SE x For operating instructions refer to lights the manuals of the respective components Xx The channel status information during playback of Dolby Digital and DTS sources can be checked pressing the STATUS button on the main unit Press the SURROUND BACK button Lights when the Surround Back channel is on eile NEI EZ Wl Set to 1spkr SS Set to 2spkrs a NA TNS ATIN lights lights Basic Operation E Surround parameters 7 DECODER Select the decoder to be used when playing 2 channel sources in the Home THX Cinema mode e PLIIx C The signals are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing PLII C The signals are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic II Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing PL The signals are decoded in the Dolby Pro Logic mode before undergoing THX processing NEO 6 C The signals are decoded in the NEO 6 Cinema mode before undergoing THX processing MODE SB CH OUT Select the surround back channel playback method or mode e ON This is the recommended play mode for using the surround back channel when DTS NEO lt 6 i
256. l over the network to operate the AVR 5805Cl e Check the AVR 5805Cl s IP address KS page 138 beforehand and input this IP address in Internet Explorer to display the AVR 5805CI s control panel Glassk Gompert e Operate in the same way as with normal Internet browsing s ch Heite to control the AVR 5805Cl1 ira Volume control screen Molume e U 0 20 AR 28 28 MI H 2 26 2 tet 7 Hamm F Linn Ap Siap FMB TO NOTE e To use this function set Standby Mode Power Saving at Network Option under Network Setup to OFF IS page 139 80 Advanced Operation Remote control unit e With the attached remote control unit the display changes according to the mode being operated est MODE VCR A ce Sech SELECTOR HOME 81 Operating DENON audio components 7 Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be operated e The indicator of the device to be operated blinks 3 aMP ZONE2 ZONE3 CD CDR ZONE4 SYSTEM CALL se eae TUNER 5o 3 DIGITAL TUNER yan ee rere DI SAU SATELLITE CABLE w x This function switches as shown below each time one of the AMP button is pressed gt AMP gt ZONE2 gt ZONE3 SYSTEM CALL ZONE4 2 Operate the DENON audio component CD TAPE TUNER x For details refer to the component s operating instructions I e t may not be possible
257. l the Press the RDS SEARCH button until RDS frequencies are searched NO RDS is displayed SEARCH appears on the display a RDS D New tuning system for g RDS D your convenience New tuning system for 1 Push RDS Search B isetze your convenience RDS RDS station 1 Push RDS Search PlY Program category RDS station TP Traffic info PTY Program category RT Radio Text TP Traffic info 2 Tune by preset Up Down RT Radio Text CCHB5 F105 50MH J 2 Tune by preset Up Down HB5 FM105 50OMHz jJ The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display 68 PTY search e Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a designated program type PTY e For a description of each program type refer to Program Type PTY Set the input source to TUNER FUNCTION ICH e Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER EN mode Remote control unit Press the RDS SEARCH button until PTY SEARCH appears on the display Xx The main unit s display switches as follows each time the RDS SEARCH button is pressed Display
258. layback 6 7 E Subwoofer Mode Delay Time Fl 2 3 Zone Setup of Channel Level 6 7 E Option Setup xit Crossover Frequency Video Setup Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev xit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Speaker Config then press the ENTER button e The Speaker Config screen appears 6 1 Speaker Conf ig Zone 2 6 1 Speaker Conf ig Zone 2 Front Sp e Large 4 RAA m Surround aes Center Sp Sp Small RE gt None al Di HN D Subwoofer Yes No Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the speaker then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the parameter ZONE2 Center Sp ZONE2 Front Sp ZONE2 Subwoofer Si ZONE2 Surround Sp ZONE2 Surround back Sp x This is only displayed when 7 1ch is selected for the ZONE2 channel output setting at Channel Setup ES page 126 128 X For a description of the different parameters ES page 141 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Zone Setup menu reappears Setting the low frequency distribution for ZONE2 e This selects the subwoofer used in ZONE2 for playing the low base sound 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Subwoofer Mode at the Zone Setup menu then press
259. le e You can connect the turntable MM cartridge to the PHONO terminals NOTE e The phono input can accept signals from moving magnet MM and high output moving coil MC phono cartridges If your turntable is equipped with a low output MC cartridge you will need to use a separate MC head amplifier or step up MC transformer e f humming or other noise is generated when the ground wire is connected to the SIGNAL GND terminal disconnect the ground wire Turntable MM cartridge AUDIO OUT Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder e f you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital source such as a CD or MD recorder to an analog recorder such as a cassette deck you will need to connect analog inputs and outputs as shown below in addition to the digital audio connections CD recorder MD recorder A AUDIO OUT gt ceo R A AUDIO IN ell R OPTICAL D D A GI our D i COR TAPE E D OPTICAL mm OPTICAL IN NOTE e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 5 OUT terminal on the AVR 5805Cl s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 5 IN terminal Connecting Other Sources Connecting a tape deck Tape deck D AUDIO OUT o gt 1 ce O Holl ef CH Won Uz e Oo d Ka G AUDIO IN D keeeeeeehk 0
260. listening to sound select the input source to which the video signal is connected then set this mode e f the subwoofer output level seems too high set the SW ATT surround parameter to ON Playback using the external input treminals EXT IN 1 and EXT IN 2 e When the ANALOG mode is selected at EXT IN Setup at the System Setup The surround mode buttons are not operated e When the DSP mode is selected at EXT IN Setup at the System Setup The surround mode buttons are operated NOTE e When the input mode is set to EXT IN 1 or 2 playback in the DIRECT STEREO STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND HOME THX CINEMA 9CH STEREO and DSP SIMULATION modes are only possible when DSP mode is selected for the Setting the EXT IN Setup IGS page 105 e In play modes other than the external input mode the signals connected to these terminals cannot be played In addition signals cannot be output from channels not connected to the input terminals E Selecting the analog mode Press the ANALOG button on the main unit or INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit to switch to the analog input ANALOG exclusive analog audio signal playback mode The signals input to the analog input terminals are decoded and played NOTE e Input mode when playing DTS sources Noise will be output if DTS compatible CDs or LDs are played in the ANALOG or PCM mode When playing
261. ll ees Lights 2 Select the surround mode Example DIRECT DIRECT STEREO Main unit D S Remote control unit Start playback on the selected component e The DSD indicator lights as ll d Lights x For operating instructions refer to the component s manual x DSD DIRECT is shown on the display when playing DSD 2 channel signals in the DIRECT mode DSD MULTI DIRECT is displayed when playing DSD multi channel signals in the DIRECT mode SB CH OUT LORE 99 DIRECT STEREO FUNCTION C3 c gt Sorire When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode the DSD signals are converted into analog signals When playing in other surround modes the DSD signals are first converted into PCM signals The input signal and playing status can be checked by pressing the ON SCREEN button on the remote control unit Example When DSD multi channel signals are played in the DIRECT mode Mode DSD MULTI DRCT RoomEQ 0FF SIGNAL DSD FORMAT 3 2 1 Example When DSD multi channel signals are played in the 9CH STEREO mode 9CH STEREO RoomEQ OFF SIGNAL DSD gt PCM FORMAT 3 2 1 d Advanced Operation FUNCTION PHONES DIRECT STEREO Multi source recording playback E Playing one source while recording another REC OUT mode 7 Press the ZONE3 4 REC SELECT button until
262. lor Space setting e To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor set Analog to HDMI Convert at HDMI Component Out to ONT default e Set the resolution of the video output to one that is compatible with the resolution of your monitor e When Scaler is set to Component and the video input signal includes copyright protection data the signal is output from the component video output terminal with a resolution of 480p 576p even if Resolution is set to 1080i or 720p 114 Setting the Audio Delay e Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and video 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Audio Delay at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Audio Delay screen appears 4 Video Setup fe in Assien 4 5 Audio Delay Component In Assisi Video Convert Mode 1 HDMI DVI 2 3 4 HDMI Component Out F5 6 Input Source DVD 4 Oms gt Audio Delay On Screen Display Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to set the delay time 0 ms 200 ms x With a movie source for example adjust so that the movement of the actors lips is synchronized with the sound Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears E e The audio delay setting does not apply when playing in the EXT IN mode or in the analog input DIRECT m
263. ls into HDMI signals You can do this by either a component or a video or a S Video connection e Audio signals are not output from the HDMI monitor output terminal so also make analog or digital audio connections To play sound using digital audio connections assign the digital terminal coaxial or optical at Setting the Digital In Assignment IS page 104 7 TV Monitor UI D I L or DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 8 4 f 6 3 UA UA AA UA kz Pe S e ES ad gt r S S VIDEO o C29 OUT D VIDEO Em Sir D D EE D AUDIO OUT 0 gt Ja R d NOTE e When Through is set at Resolution under Setting the HDMI Component Out Setup use a monitor compatible with input resolutions of 480i 576i e If your monitor is not equipped with an HDMI terminal connect the AVR 5805ClI to the monitor using the component video S Video or composite video terminals 29 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a TV tuner e For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your TV tuner S Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your TV tuner does not have component video inputs e To connect the digital audio output from the TV tuner you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the optical connection it needs to be assigned For more information abou
264. m rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada m NOTE ON USE OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L UTILISATION water and dust E lapoussi re e Avoid high temperatures P e Keep the apparatus free from moisture e Prot ger l appareil contre l humidit l eau et e Do not let foreign objects into the apparatus e Ne pas laisser des objets trangers dans l appareil Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack e Eviter des temp ratures lev es Tenir compte d une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l installation sur une e Handle the power cord carefully Hold the plug when unplugging the cord e Manipuler le cordon d alimentation avec pr caution Tenir la prise lors du d branchement du cordon z pE e Unplug the power cord when not using the apparatus for long periods of time e D brancher le cordon d alimentation lorsque e Do not let insecticides benzene and thinner come in contact with the apparatus e Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides du benz ne et un diluant avec l appareil l appareil n est pas utilis pendant de longues p riodes For apparatuses with ventilation holes e Do not obstruct the ventilation holes e Ne pas obstruer les trous d a ration e Never disassemble or modify the apparatus in any way e Ne jamais d monter ou modifier l appareil d une mani re ou d une autre
265. minals are connected Generally speaking analog video connections using the component video terminals offer the highest quality playback followed by connections using the S Video terminals then connections using the regular video terminals yellow The flow of the video signals gt HDMI DVI D HDMI DVI D terminals terminals Y Pit PR CR Y Pat Pain Oz zO Component vidga Ne ee 2 1 Component ime terminals au reese erminals se Kg ch MONITOR OUT ZONE2 o o o O_O S Video terminal A o daerf o oe o o S Video terminal 7 MONITOR OUT ZONE2 NOTE e t is not possible to down convert from HDMI and DVI D input signals to the component S Video or composite video monitor output terminals e Video down conversion to the MAIN ZONE s monitor output is only possible when the component video input resolution is 480i interlaced standard definition video NTSC format for North America or 576i interlaced standard definition video PAL format for Europe and other countries e It is not possible to down convert from the ZONE2 s component video signal to a S Video or composite signal so when not using the ZONE2 s component monitor output terminal use an S Video connection cable or composite connection cable to connect the AVR 5805C with the player e To set the video conversion function for the MAIN ZONE to OFF IGS page 112 e Set the
266. modes e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with three 2 channel playback modes exclusively for music e Select the mode to suit your tastes E PURE DIRECT mode This mode reproduces the sound with extremely high quality The audio signals do not pass through the tone circuits etc and the display and surrounding circuits that could affect the audio signals are turned OFF Press the PURE DIRECT button to select the PURE DIRECT mode DIRECT mode Use this mode to achieve good quality 2 channel sound In this mode the audio signals bypass such circuits as the tone circuit and are transmitted directly resulting in good quality sound Press the DIRECT STEREO button to select the DIRECT mode X The mode switches as shown below each time the DIRECT STEREO button on the main unit is pressed DIRECT STEREO x When press SURROUND PARAMETER The subwoofer output can be controlled directly 50 HOME THX CINEM PURE DIRECT IE c DIRECT STEREO PURE ENTER SURROUND a om PARAMETER CURSOR ON SCREEN E STEREO mode Use this mode to adjust the tone and achieve the desired sound Press the DIRECT STEREO button to select the STEREO mode P e The system setup function cannot be used when the PURE DIRECT mode is set To use the system setup function cancel the PURE DIRECT mode e f the HDMI input terminal is selected video outputs are output in the PURE DIRECT mode e The channel level and
267. mote control unit The output level can be controlled only if the zone volume level is set variable at Volume Control in the System Setup Menu I page 134 Default volume setting ZONE2 40 dB ZONES 40 dB ZONE4 40 dB The Zone volume can be adjusted within the range of 80 to 18 dB in steps of 1 dB However when using with ZONE2 set to multi channel 5 1 or 7 1 channel the ZONE2 volume can be adjusted in steps of 0 5 dB CS page 126 128 e The MUTE button can be operated in the same way as for the MAIN ZONE IEF page 45 e In the ZONE2 mode the VIDEO SELECT and ON SCREEN buttons can be operated in the same way as for the MAIN ZONE IGS page 45 46 ZONE2 AMP INPUT MODE ono r TEST TONE SYSTEM SETUP _2 2 J CURSOR CH SEL ENTER T SCREEN MUTE T Uet SES G QET FUNCTION Ss ZONE3 4 ON OFF oe ol E Beem FUNCTION System setup for multi zone e This makes possible to make the optimum setting for the speaker systems used in ZONE2 Select the ZONE2 mode using the AMP button Press the SYSTEM SETUP button e The ZONE2 system setup menu appears Xx The screen displayed depends on the settings made at Channel Setup ES page 126 128 Example When ZONE2 is set for a 5 1 or 7 1 channel system 6 Zone Setup 1 Speaker Config 2 Subwoofer Mode 3 Delay Time 4 Channel Level 5
268. mpatibility with the conventional CD format thus sound effects that seem to pass right over the listener s head expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution This system was developed jointly by THX and Dolby Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified Laboratories fusing THX s idea of improving spatial automatically to select the optimum digital processing expression and achieving a uniform 360 degree sound positioning with Dolby Laboratories matrix encoding existing system Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and the new surround back SB channel was added to achieve improvements over the conventional 5 1 channel system in terms of the positioning of the sound at the rear the acoustic image of sound moving from the two sides to the back as well as sound moving from the front to the center rear with the multi Surround speaker systems used in movie theaters thereby enabling various types of surround sound The surround back channel signal is a matrix encoded signal inserted into both the Dolby Digital SL surround left and SR surround right channels Upon playback the signals are decoded by a high precision digital matrix decoder technology Emphasis was placed on compatibility with the oO HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital and Microsoft are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Inc in the United States and or other countries HDCD system manufactured
269. music plus the best in sports news talk and entertainment XM is broadcast in superior digital audio 7 Set the input source to TUNER from coast to coast From rock to reggae from classical to See hip hop KM has something for every music fan KM s AA EN dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events talk radio up to the minute news stand up comedy children s Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode programming and much more For U S customers ee information about XM Satellite Radio is available online at Press the TU TUNER button to select the www xmradio com For Canadian customers information TUNER mode about XM Canada is online at www xmradio ca Watching the display press the BAND button E XM READY LEGAL to select the XM mode Hardware and required monthly subscription sold NNN separately Other fees and taxes including a one time Press the STATUS button on the main unit activation fee may apply Subscription fee is consumer until SIGNAL is displayed only All fees and programming subject to change e The display changes as shown below according to Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with the receiving condition an XL Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers Display EE by calling 1 800 XMRADIO US residents and 1 877 GET XMSR Canadian residents GOOD Signal strength is good For
270. n screen display turns off 5 seconds after it turns on 10sec The onscreen display turns off 10 seconds after it turns on OFF The on screen display is not displayed XM Set the time for which the on screen display is displayed when performing XM operations Always The on screen display is always on Default 5sec The on screen display turns off 5 seconds after it turns on 10sec The on screen display turns off 10 seconds after it turns on OFF The on screen display is not displayed Screensaver ON The screensaver is launched if no operation is performed for approximately 3 minutes OFF The screensaver is not launched Advanced Setup Part 1 Display Mode e Mode 1 Flickering is not prevented e Mode 2 Prevents flickering of the on screen display when there is no video signal Use this mode if the on screen display does not appear in the Mode 1 as may happen according to the TV being used Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The System Setup Menu reappears 4 Video Setup HDMI DVI In Assign Component In Assign Video Convert Mode HDMI Component Out Audio Delay On Screen Display GExit P e The screensaver is launched while in the Internet radio Music server or XM mode if the on screen display s display time i
271. ne TMK TML TNCi Tobishi Tobo Tokai Tokaido Tokyo Tomashi Tongguang Tongtel Tophouse Toshiba Tosonic Totevision Towada Toyoda Trakton Trans Continens TRANS continents Transonic Triad Trical Trident Tristar Triumph Tsoschi Tuntex TVS TVTEXT 95 Uher Ultravox Unic PRESET CODE 10009 10887 10037 11447 10035 10109 10361 10073 10093 10056 11756 10017 10218 10009 10009 11037 11037 10035 10218 10264 10587 10180 10009 10102 10195 10556 10821 11356 10185 10039 10102 10009 10009 10037 10621 10009 10587 10037 10157 10516 10193 10177 10282 10009 10463 10556 10037 10486 10037 10163 10216 10109 10036 10163 10499 2101937 10817 a IONA 7 10264 10037 10282 10412 10780 0035 10109 10217 10618 10832 11508 10217 10037 10217 a KOZI T0087 10698 10218 10218 10346 10030 10206 10087 10217 10218 10374 10287 10335 10560 10625 10037 10072 10073 10104 10193 10238 10335 10359 10512 10535 10238 10499 10178 10412 10748 10163 10337 10374 10668 10036 10060 10070 10093 10145 10154 10156 10191 10264 10381 10412 10508 10644 10650 10714 10718 10845 11156 11256 11265 11656 11704 10264 10264 10412 10264 10668 11037 10264 10418 10455 10512 10712 10780 10858 10556 10516 1
272. nect a commercially available video stabilizer etc with a TBC time base corrector function between the AVR 5805CI and the VCR or if your VCR has main unit or the ON SCREEN button on the remote control unit e The resolution of the signal output to the component monitor output terminal can be set on the AVR 5805Cl I e f you do not want to use the function for converting analog video signals to HDMI signals select OFF for Analog to HDMI Convert at Setting the HDMI I Component Out a TBC function turn it on Setup IS page 113 114 In this case the function for video up conversion to the component video terminal operates On screen display for component video outputs and HDMI output e When viewing component video signals or HDMI signals via the AVR 5805Cl the on screen display is displayed on the monitor when the System Setup operations are performed and when the remote control unit s ON SCREEN button is operated e To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor set Analog to HDMI Convert at HDMI Component Out to ON default e When only component video signals are input to the AVR 5805Cl the characters of the on screen display are not displayed over the picture Connecting Other Sources Connecting eguipment with HDMI terminals To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with a function for converting analog video signa
273. ned switches to OFF X The HDMI input terminal is displayed when it is assigned to the input source at HDMI DVI In Assign IE page 111 112 x If an input source is assigned to a device connected with an IEEE1394 cable at IEEE1394 Assign the digital input terminal s assignment setting switches to ORF Xx When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Audio Input Setup menu reappears P e The OPTICAL 3 4 and 5 terminals on the AVR 5805Cl s rear panel are equipped with an optical digital output terminal for recording digital audio signals to a CD recorder MD recorder or other digital audio recording deck Use this for digital recording between a digital audio source stereo 2 channel and a digital audio recorder e PHONO and TUNER cannot be selected on the Digital In Assign screen e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 3 to 5 OUT terminal on the AVR 5805Cl s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 3 to 5 IN terminal E Setting the DENON LINK e When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected be sure to make a setting to DENON LINK with the System Setup Digital In Assignment e When the input mode is AUTO and the signals are not be able to transferred by DENON LINK the unit automatically changes over the
274. nent video output terminal x When Analog to HDMI Convert is set to OFF the Scaler setting is automatically set to Component and fixed there Aspect e FULL The video is output while maintaining the aspect ratio of the input video Advanced Setup Part 1 Resolution e 480p 576p When the video signal being input is a video S Video or 480i 576i component video signal the resolution is converted to 480p 576p and the signal is output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal e 1080i When the video signal input is a video S Video or 480i 5761 480p 576p component video signal the resolution is converted to 1080i and the signal is output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal e 720p When the video signal input is a video S Video or 480i 576i 480p 576p component video signal the resolution is converted to 720p and the signal is output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal e 1080p The input video signal is converted to a resolution of 1080p for output This cannot be selected when Scaler is set to Component e Through The video signal input is output as such from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal without being converted Color Space e Y Cb Cr The Y Cb Cr format video signals is output via the HDMI output terminal e RGB The RGB format video signals is output via the HDMI output terminal RGB Mode Setup e Normal Signals are output via the HDMI output terminal with a digital RG
275. network settings are made manually you must make the Network Setup IGS page 138 139 e The AVR 5805Cl is not compatible with PPPoE If your contract is of the PPPoE setting type you need a PPPoE compatible router e For some ISPs Internet Service Providers you may have to make proxy server settings in order to use the Internet radio function If proxy server settings for connecting to the Internet have been made on the computer make the same settings on the AVR 5805CI e The AVR 5805Cl is designed to make the network settings automatically using the DHCP and Auto IP functions I e No signals are output to the digital output terminals when playing copyright protected music files e The AVR 5805Cl1 is compatible with MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MP3 files with sampling frequencies of 32 44 1 or 48 kHz It is not compatible with MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 MPEG 2 5 Audio Layer 3 MP1 or MP2 files e The AVR 5805Cl is compatible with bit rates of 32 to 320 kbps for MP3 files and 48 to 192 kbps for WMA files e The AVR 5805Cl is compatible with WMA files with sampling frequencies of 32 44 1 or 48 kHz e The AVR 5805CI is compatible with MP3 ID3 Tag Ver 2 e The AVR 5805CI is compatible with WMA meta tags e With the AVR 5805Cl the folder names file names etc can be displayed on the main unit s display and the OSD Up to 95 characters can be displayed A period is displayed in place of non
276. ng loss be careful not to raise the volume level excessively when using headphones Switching the surround speakers Press the SPEAKER button X The surround speakers switch as shown below each time the SPEAKER button is pressed m gt SURROUND A gt SURROUND B SURROUND A B _ Xx This operation is possible when the setting for using both surround speakers A and B is made at Speaker Configuration IS page 140 141 Switching between HDMI and DVI D monitor output The monitor out terminal switch as shown below each time the MONITOR SELECT button is pressed HDMI DVI 45 Selection of resolution setting SCALE Press the SCALE button X The resolution switches as follws each time the SCALE button is pressed e When HDMI is selected for the Scaler setting gt 480p 576p 10801 gt 720p Through SE 1080p lt e When Component is selected for the Scaler setting gt 480p 576p 10801 gt 720p Through Xx When the SCALE button is pressed the current setting is shown on the display If the SCALE button is pressed while the current setting is displayed the Resolution setting can be changed x For description of the each resolution settings see page 1S Ae Combining the currently playing sound with the desired image VIDEO SELECT Press the VIDE
277. nics 10698 Digatron 10037 Digiline 10105 Digital Life 10780 Digitex 10820 Digitor 10037 Digix 10880 Dik 10037 Dixi 10009 DL 10037 Domeos 10037 Domland 10394 Dongda 10009 Donghai 10009 Dream Vision 11704 DSE 10698 10556 10009 10056 10180 10499 10672 10218 10032 10714 10706 10374 10661 10363 10556 10072 10374 11178 10511 10587 10037 10037 10706 10668 10872 10499 10037 10780 10668 10019 10030 10092 10108 10217 10218 10556 10623 10700 10706 10035 10036 10715 10548 10698 10785 10217 10516 11264 11454 10576 10606 10087 10320 10216 10264 10825 10891 10698 11724 10087 10848 10872 11037 10032 10037 10154 10170 10264 10374 10628 10634 10865 10880 10037 10208 210795 10621 10371 10672 10891 13 Dual Dual Tec Dumont Dunai Durabrand DVX Dwin Dynatron E Elite Ecco ECE Edison Minerva Elbe be Sharp lectroband ectrograph lectrohome lektra in lite E E E E Elekta E E E E man Elta Emco Emerson Emperor Envision Enzer Epson Erres ESA ESC Ether Etron Eurofeel EuroLine Euroman Europa Europhon Evolution Expert Exquisit Fagor PRESET CODE 10037 Wiley 10217 10017 10544 10003 11463 10891 10720 10012 10218 10706 10037 10487 10217 10411 10516 10000 11755 10381 10009 10017 10009
278. nken eleka lelemaster lelesat elestar Telesystem eletech eleves elevisa ewire D Tempo Tevion Thomson Thorn Tioko 01847 00132 00879 01409 00210 00136 00123 01300 00369 00713 00132 01143 00887 00455 01225 00455 01143 01225 00592 00114 00548 01283 01143 01429 00132 0101 001 0024 010 0011 006 00421 Oo an WDB P N 00243 00750 00520 00605 00114 01334 00396 00114 00132 00887 00592 01143 00713 00115 00710 01012 00455 00132 01848 00369 01105 00417 00243 01283 01227 00157 00863 01206 00607 01284 00605 01043 00396 00834 00157 01251 00880 00455 01334 00292 00711 01046 00243 Tivo 00421 00520 00613 00853 Tokai 01147 01158 01159 01300 Tonna Topfield Toshiba TPS Triad Triasat 00369 00642 00794 00829 Triax Trio TT micro Turnsat Twinner 01251 01322 UEC Uher 00200 00396 00455 00501 UltimateTV 01099 01100 01195 01322 Uniden Unisat United Universum US Digital USDTV Van Hunen 00607 Variosat Vega Ventana 00501 00607 00613 00692 Vestel Victor Visionic Visiosat 00501 01099 01100 01251 Vivid Voom Vortec VTech 00501 01214 01300 Welltech Wetekom Wewa Wibo 01409 Wintel 00392 00455 00607 00668 Wisi 00713 00820 00847 00853 01175 01291 0
279. nks twice and the learning function resetting mode is set device to be reset Press the button to be reset twice e The IR segment blinks twice 3 Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the E Resetting for individual devices 7 Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice 2 Press the 9 7 6 button 9 7 gt 6 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the learning function resetting mode is set 3 Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be reset twice e The IR segment blinks twice 86 Resetting the system call function 1 AQ NO Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 8 button 9 gt 7 gt 8 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the system call resetting mode is set Press the SYSTEM CALL button 1 2 or 3 you want to reset Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Resetting the punch through function 1 A Q N Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be reset TV or SAT CBL Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 8 4 button 9 gt 8 4 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the punch through function resetting mode is set Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e T
280. nly for multichannel sources but also for stereo programs On the AVR 5805Cl it is possible to output signals encoded in the Dolby Headphone mode from the recording output terminal and record them on a separate recorder 163 Additional Information E Sources recorded in Dolby Surround Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following logo marks Dolby Surround support mark DM ousy surround Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a digital surround format developed by Digital Theater Systems of the United States The number of playback channels and the playing band is the same as for Dolby Digital 5 1 channels The compression rate of the audio data when it was recorded on the medium is lower than for Dolby Digital so there is more information when the data is decoded resulting in richer clearer sound quality MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE FROM DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS INC U S PAT NO S 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 AND OTHER U S AND WORLD WIDE PATENTS ISSUED AND PENDING DTS DTS ES Neo 6 AND DTS 96 24 ARE TRADEMARKS OF DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS INC 1996 2003 DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS INC ALL RIGHTS RESERVED DTS ES DTS ES is
281. nnel levels within each surround mode IS page 63 64 e You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND HOME THX CINEMA 9CH STEREO WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM ROCK ARENA JAZZ CLUB CLASSIC CONCERT MONO MOVIE VIDEO GAME and MATRIX e When using either surround speakers A or B or when using surround speakers A and B at the same time be sure to adjust the balance of playback levels between each channel for the various selections of A B and A B E Adjusting the test tone using the remote control unit e As described below this adjustment can be accomplished via the with remote control unit e Adjusting with the remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the Auto mode and only effective in the STANDARD DOLBY DTS SURROUND and HOME THX CINEMA modes The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory Press the TEST TONE button e Test tones are output from the different speakers Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the channel level so that the volume of the test tones is the same for all the speakers After completing the adjustment press the TEST TONE button again Advanced Setup Part 2 Setting the Crossover Frequency e Set the crossover frequency according to the low frequency response characteristics of the v
282. nt at ear height at main listening positio Extra Setup4 Channel 9 1CH Start Cancel L Cancel4 x The screen shown at the below appears once the preliminary measurements are completed g 1 1 Auto Setup D at ear height at main listening position Speaker Detect Check OK Start Retry 4 Cancel Dress the ENTER button e Switch to the Speaker Detect Check screen Speaker Detect Check mmm Front Sp No S Z Center Sp No D Subwoofer No 4488 VW A First screen Check the results of the speaker detection then press the ENTER button e Switch to the second screen Speaker Detect Check om Surround Sp A Ses KES No Sp B D Yes No Sp Back A ABE Yes No L Ispkr Second screen If the check ends press the ENTER button again 23 Easy Setup and Operation NOTE e f the results are not as expected or if an error message is displayed select Retry and perform the measurements again For details on the error messages ES page 26 If the results of remeasurement are still not as expected or if an error message is displayed turn off the power switch and check the speaker connections Then start the measurements again from the beginning e Measurement is can
283. nvert Mode 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 2 Component In Assigt cov d i VeR 3 JON 3 Video Convert Mode Tee on VRA ON 4 HDMI Component Out Tv ON YALI TON 5 Audio Delay pes ON j 6 On Screen Display veri ON ver 2 ON Exit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON When there are multiple input signals the input signals are detected and the input signal to be output from the video monitor output terminal is selected automatically in the following order component video S Video composite video OFF The convert function does not operate In such cases the input device s cable type must be the same as the type of cable connected to the AVR 5805Cl s monitor output terminal video S Video or component video Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Video Setup menu reappears a e Down converting from the component video signal to the S Video and composite video signal is possible only when the resolution of a component video signal is 480i 576i e When a non standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input the video conversion function might not operate If this happens please set the conversion mode to OFF e When the video conversion function has been used information su
284. o Logic IIx Pro Logic II mode e To play in the PLIIx mode set Spack at the Speaker Configuration setting to 1spkr or 2spkrs e To play in the PLIIx mode set Surround Back at the Power Amp Assign setting e This mode is optimal for playing program sources recorded in Dolby Surround 7 Press the STANDARD button to select Dolby Pro Logic Ix mode e The Dolby Pro Logic indicator lights mon ee DOPRO LOGIC Il X The mode switches as shown below each time the STANDARD button is pressed lights DOLBY PLIIx DTS NEO 6 2 Play a program source For operating instructions refer to the manuals of the respective components Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button e The surround parameter menu appears DOLBY PLIIx GMODE SS 4 PLIIx CINEMA gt CINEMAJE Q OFF gt aes D COMP ot TONE 4 CR aOR SB CH OUT 4488 ON gt OFF Default Yes4 56 Sr ENEE CINEMA lt MUSIC ENTER CSS i CURSOR SURROUND oO PARAMETER Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the play mode x When the SB CH OUT parameter is set to ON Set SP Back at the System Setup to 1spkr or 2spkrs Display Pro Logic IIx Cinema mode Pro Logic IIx Music mode Pro Logic IIx Game mode Xx When the SB C
285. o connect the video output from the DVD player to the AVR 5805Cl1 you only need to choose one connection type Component video connection offers the best quality and is required for progressive DVD playback followed by S Video while composite video offers the lowest picture quality of the three connection types For more information about the video up conversion function IS page 28 e The AVR 5805Cl is equipped with HDMI terminals so it can be connected to a DVD player or TV monitor using an HDMI cable To connect it to a DVD player using a DVI D cable IS page 37 e The AVR 5805CI is equipped with a BNC terminal so a DVD player or monitor can be connected using a BNC cable If you choose to use the BNC connecti ES page 112 e To connect the digital audio output from on it needs to be assigned For more information about Component Input Assignment he DVD player you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the optical connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment I page 104 e The AVR 5805Cl is equipped with another set of input terminals for a non DVD Video Disc Player such as laser disc VCD SVCD or future high definition disc player The above connection guidelines for DVD also apply to the VDP input Ce CR H ES SY SVIDEO Po ET L OUT H VIDEO vm ee ES EE An DVD player COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
286. o signal Kal On screen display superimposed on video signal and output 480p 720p 480p 576p 1080i 720p Fa Mideo oipnals are sot allot when the analog HEMI convert Rincon Veet to ON P E On ae display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP SURROUND PARAMETER e The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following format NTSC PAL SECAM NTSC4 43 PAL N PAL M and PAL 60 e When SECAM signals of video input are up converted the signals are output in PAL format from the S Video terminal eo When the input signal is set to component video 1080p the signals cannot be output to the HDMI monitor output terminal except the HDMI monitor out and ON SCREEN button When OFF is selected for the Analog to HDMI Convert setting no video signals other than the HDMI input signal are output Including the contents of and above e HDMI MONITOR OUT When there is no HDMI input signal and HDMI is selected for the Scaler setting the signal is output as set with the Resolution setting When Component is selected for the Scaler setting the signal is output with the same resolution as the input signal e COMPONENT MONITOR OUT When Component is selected for the Scaler setting the signal is output as set with the Resolution setting However the output resolution is limited to a maximum of 480p 576p if the input signal is copyright
287. o the main unit Operating instructions wwwwwmwwwmmawimiwwmwamwawi mw 1 5 Remote control unit RC 1036 oo cece cece eee 1 2 Warranty for North America model oni 1 LR6 AA alkaline batteres 2 D Service station Ust aain 1 DAM loop antennia vj csces der osndesdncs sinc a 1 4 Power supply cord 1 FM indoor amtenng 1 ER SC Before using Pay attention to the following before using this unit e Store these instructions in a safe place After reading store these instructions along with the e Moving the set warranty in a safe place To prevent short circuits or damaged wires in the connection cables always unplug the power supply cord and disconnect e Note that the illustrations in these instructions may the connection cables between all other audio components differ from the actual set for explanation purposes when moving the set e Before turning the Power operation button on Check once again that all connections are proper and that there are not problems with the connection cables Always set the power operation button to the standby position before connecting and disconnecting connection cables Cautions on installation Noise or disturbance of the picture may be generated if this Ya unit or any other electronic equipment using microprocessors is used near a tuner or TV If this happens take the following steps e Install this unit as far as possible from the tuner or
288. ocessing is performed even for pulsive music data and attack sounds All this makes it possible to recreate the delicate nuances of the music and such space information as the positions of the performers the width height and depth of the place of the performance stage and so on A copyright protected technology developed by Microsoft e The PlaysForSure logo Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device VWM DRM to protect the integrity of their content Secure Content so that their intellectual property including copyright in such content is not misappropriated This device uses WM DRM software to play Secure Content VWM DRM Software If the security of the WM DRM Software in this device has been compromised owners of Secure Content Secure Content Owners way request that Microsoft revoke the WM DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy display and or play Secure Content Revocation does not alter the WWM DRM Software s ability to play unprotected content A list of revoked WM DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from PC Microsoft may in conjunction with such license also download revocation list onto your device
289. ode function name or setting value etc Output signal channel indicator The audio channels that can be output light Speaker indicator This lights corresponding to the settings of the surround speakers of the various surround modes Q Decoder indicator This lights when each decoder is operating Master volume indicator This displays the volume level The Setup item number is displayed in System Setup IEEE1394 indicator This lights during playback in a IEEE1394 connection MULTI zone indicator ZONE3 mode is selected in ZONE3 REC SELECT 12 DENON LINK ge MULTI IEEE 1394 O Recording output source indicator REC OUT mode is selected in ZONE3 REC SELECT DENON LINK indicator d 6 d This lights during playback in a DENON LINK connection V OFF indicator This lights when the operation of the video circuit has been turned off AL24 indicator The AL24 indicator lights when the PURE DIRECT DIRECT STEREO MULTI CH PURE DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT MULTI CH IN mode is selected in the PCM input signal Input mode indicator This lights corresponding to the setting of the INPUT mode RDS indicator This lights when RDS broadcast has been received AUTO indicator This lights when the broadcast station is selected in the AUTO tuning mode TUNED indicator This lights when an FM AM broadcast has been received STEREO indicator This lights when an FM stereo broadc
290. ode or STEREO mode only when the crossover frequency is set to FIXED THX or front speaker is set to Large TONE DEFEAT ON Room EQ OFF Setting the On Screen Display OSD e Use this to turn the on screen display messages other than the menu screens on or off e Sets the on screen display s display mode 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select On Screen Display at the Video Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The On Screen Display screen appears 4 Video Setup fae F N 1 HDMI DVI In Assign 4 6 On Screen Display 2 Component In Assig 4 gt 3 Video Convert Model ee oN 4 HDMI Component Out jRadio mServer Always 5 Audio Delay XM Always G On Screen Display i Screensaver ON Exit Display Mode Model Press the CURSOR or V button to select the item to be set then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the parameter Function Mode Status Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the input source name and input mode when an input source is selected Master Volume Status Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the main volume level when the main volume is operated iRadio mServer Set the time for which the on screen display is displayed when performing Internet radio and Music server operations Always The on screen display is always on Default 5sec The o
291. ograms These stations are of all sizes an types some run by individuals others by ground wave broadcast stations While ground wave radio stations can only be listened to withi the range in which the waves reach Internet radio can be listened to anywhere in the world g d n The AVR 5805CI is equipped with the following Internet radi functions e Stations can be selected by genre and region e Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset e MP3 format Internet radio programs can be listened to O e Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing the exclusive DENON Internet radio URL using a computer browser The AV amplifier automatically downloads th Is e registration settings approximately once every other day This is managed separately for each unit so a MAC address or e mail address must be registered CS page 139 X Exclusive URL http Awww radiodenon com accessible after connection to an Internet radio station E vTuner The AVR 5805Cl s Internet radio station list uses vTuner a radio station database service This database service edited and prepared for the AVR 5805CI is Music server function The AVR 5805CI is equipped with a network audio playback function allowing music files stored on a computer to be played via a LAN Local Area Network The AVR 5805Cl s network audio playback function connects to servers using the following
292. onnect securely 16 17 A e FUNCTION knob position is not appropriate e Switch to the proper position 44 GE but souna not e Volume control set to minimum e Turn volume up to suitable level 44 P e Muting is on e Switch off Muting 45 e No digital signal is being input e Properly select a digital signal input source 104 e AVR 5805Cl s video output terminals and e Check that the connections are correct 16 17 monitor s input terminals are not properly 27 42 connected Nothing is displayed on monitor TV s input setting is wrong e Set the TV s input selector to the terminals to which video signals are connected e The PURE DIRECT mode is set e Set a surround mode other than the PURE 50 DIRECT mode e DVD player s audio output setting is not set to e Make the DVD player s initial settings bit stream NDIDTS saund is produced e DVD player is not DTS compatible e Use a DTS compatible player e AVR 5805Cl s input setting is set to analog e Set to AUTO or DTS 47 48 Ultra2 Cinema THX Music e Surround back speaker set to 1 e Connect two surround back speakers 16 17 Mode THX Games Mode 140 141 cannot be set 148 e Copying between a source such as DVD and ale Copying is not possible Copying from DVD to VCRis not VCRis not usually possible as DVDs are often possible encoded with copy protection signals that prevent VCR recording e Subwoofer s power is not on e Turn on the power Nie sound s
293. ording playback e Settings for using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer 147 e Playing one source while recording another e Surround Back Speaker Position Gettinge 48 REC OUT AA da erent on lets EE 00 Others Setup e Recording Dolby Digital and DTS multi channel sources 00 Serine he Foon EQ SEU eege 49 e Dolby Headphone coolia EE 101 Setting thelDinecti Mode Sen p MM 150 Last function memory SE 01 Setting the MIC Input Select 51 Initializationfonitinelim CihOPlOCCSSO lpssee sees eee eee ere ee 01 Gheckathefosrainctc eee eee 152 System setup items and default values 153 156 Advanced Setup Part 1 Navigating through the System Setup Menu 02 Troubleshooting ees 157 158 On screen display and front display 20100010020120 03 Audio Input Setup Additional information 0 0 00000010iceieieien 159 173 SettingtneDonalini Assignment see eerste eee eee O Seine WA DENGU se Specifications ee ee ee 174 175 Se tuingie Et IN Gerten eege Setting the Input Function Level Settingthek nctionikename ccecasacaneescoocanecuodonnesaeacadn canse List of preset AE Endaf this manual Settinmgtnel EE Ge E nt teeters eee 07 Seltingithe EE AutolEUCt EE 08 Tuner Presets Ota leet MI ma cers eciaconccerscsaeddecnecneenacr ancienaceseoeeeyneapcaneoncee 08 LEE 09 ae Name EE 109 110 Getting Started Accessories e Check that the following parts are included in addition t
294. ound decoder is selected automatically upon playback This mode can be selected for all input sources other than PHONO and TUNER The presence or absence of digital signals is detected the signals input to the digital input terminals are identified and decoding and playback are performed automatically in DTS Dolby Digital or PCM 2 channel stereo format If no digital signal is being input the analog input terminals are selected Use this mode to play Dolby Digital signals PCM exclusive PCM signal playback mode Decoding and playback are only performed when PCM signals are being input Note that noise may be generated when using this mode to play signals other than PCM signals DTS exclusive DTS signal playback mode Decoding and playback are only performed when DTS signals are being input E Selecting the EXT IN mode 1 Press the EXT IN button on the main unit or INPUT MODE button on the remote control unit to switch the external input When operating the main unit EXT IN EAEN 2 EXT IN 1 Once this is selected the input signals connected to the FRONT L FRONT R CENTER SURR L A B surround left A B SURR R A B surround right A B SBL surround back left and SBR surround back right channels of the EXT IN terminals are output directly to the front left and right center surround AVB left and right A B and surround back left and right speaker systems as well as the pre out terminals In
295. ources Connecting eguipment with DVI D terminals e Connection with equipment that has a DVI D Digital Visual Interface D terminal permits the transfer of digital images Make an analog or digital audio connection also e The HDMI and DVI D monitor output connectors on the AVR 5805CI can only be used one at a time not simultaneously M SG TV Monitor Uleies HS T p CS Tjen e DVI D HDCP a Too HEEN J L DVD player _ ovo DVI D Dt OUT P COAXIAL See m OUT AUDIO OUT A R k I e When connecting via a DVI D cable no digital audio will be output from the HDMI monitor out terminal NOTE e Commercially available DVI D cables are available in 24 pin and 29 pin types The AVR 58O5CI supports the 24 pin DVI D cable e The AVR 5805C1 supports HDCP Use an HDCP compatible HDMI monitor x Note on connecting a HDMI DVI D The table below indicates the compatibility of connections between the HDMI DVI D output terminal of the AVR 5805C1 and monitors that support HDMI DVI D Monitor with Monitor with DVI D Monitor with DVI D HDMI HDCP compatible HDCP incompatible HDMI output O O x terminal Video Audio Only Video DVI D output Oo O x terminal Only Video Only Video 37 Connecting Other Sources Connecting IEEE1394 devices e For the digital transfer of signals from Super Audio CDs and DVD Audio discs connect usin
296. ow try comparing the sound at both settings setting the volume to a level low enough so as not to damage the speakers to determine the proper setting E Parameters Large Select this when using speakers that can fully reproduce deep bass well below 80 Hz Small Select this when using speakers that are not capable of handling deep bass well below 80 Hz Most home theater main and surround speakers perform best when configured as SMALL Deep bass content in any channel with a SMALL speaker is routed to the subwoofer s None Select this when no speakers are installed Yes No Select Yes when a subwoofer is installed No when a subwoofer is not installed 2spkrs 1spkr Select the number of speakers to be used for the surround back channel x A subwoofer with sufficient low frequency playback capability can better handle deep bass than most main and surround speakers and the system s overall performance will be greatly enhanced when SMALL is set for the main front and surround speakers x To take full advantage of the performance of the Home THX certified speaker systems set the front center and surround speaker size parameters to Small and the subwoofer to Yes x For the majority of speaker system configurations using the SMALL setting for all main and surround speakers and connected subwoofer s set to ON will yield the best results x When Front is set to Small Subwoof
297. p xit Exit 147 Advanced Setup Part 2 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Boundary Gain Compensation then press the ENTER button Press the CURSOR lt or gt button when using a THX Ultra2 compatible subwoofer or subwoofer that frequency response extends to 20 Hz select Yes Otherwise select No 2 7 THX Audio Setup Do You Have FA THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Or Sub That Extends To 20Hz Yes 4 gt IXY lt When Yes is selected Boundary Gain Compensation can be selected and the compensation set to OFF If the bass sound seems too strong Set Boundary Gain Compensation to ON This activates a filter that gently reduces very deep bass below 55 Hz to provide the flattest overall deep bass response Select ON or OFF according to how strong you prefer the deep bass response to be 2 7 THX Audio Setup Do You Have FA THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Or Sub That Extends To 20Hz ESA No Boundary Gain Compensation N4 VF Press the ENTER button e The THX Audio Setup screen reappears Advanced Setup Part 2 E Surround Back Speaker Position Settings e When two surround back speakers have been set in Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the Speaker Configuration IS page 140 141 set the Exit th
298. p Room EQ m 22 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E To select a menu press the CURSOR or V button Zone Setup Option Setup xit J m ae Input Setup N SL Digital In Assign EXT IN Setup Input Function Lev Function Rename 1EEE1394 Assign EEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit F No Screen title Sub menu title MANOA wN 1 1 Auto Setup D Please place microphone at ear height at Press the CURSOR lt button main listening position to execute Extra Setup nnel 9 1CH Currently selected line Star KO L Cancel J 3 1 Digital In Assign Current setting SEA Tare OPTS DvD COAX2 Vau OPT6 VDP COAX3 TW COAX4 The settings are changed DBS COAX5 A Wl OPT1 with the CURSOR lt or gt Mae OPT button ver 3 OPT3 VCR 4 OPT4 De f au t Yes 4 Currently selected line 2 3 Delay Time Set The Distance To Each Speakers Do You Prefer In Meters In Feet Select either one pressing are PD SE the CURSOR lt or gt button pa W 3 4 Function Rename A 4DVD 5910 Press the CURSOR lt button to select Default VM Default Yes4 103 Advanced Setup
299. parameters Main unit Remote control unit downmixing from multi channel audio signals into two x To select the input source when ZONE2 SELECT chennels ete ZONE3 4 REC SELECT or TUNING PRESET is selected press the SOURCE button on the main unit then operate the FUNCTION konb E To choose the surround sound mode Start playback on the selected component Example HOME THX CINEMA Xx For operating instructions refer to the component s mandal Press the HOME THX CINEMA button Adjust the volume x For more information about the surround modes CS 3 O page 51 53 MASTER VOLUME Ji VOL E O E To select the Room EQ function Main unit Remote control unit Press the ROOM EO button x For more information about the Room EQ function LES page 48 The volume level is displayed on the master volume indicator 44 Basic Operation Turning the sound off temporarily MUTING e Use this to mute the audio output temporarily Press the MUTE button Xx You can adjust the muting level CS page 134 P e Cancelling MUTING mode Press the MUTE button again or press the MASTER VOLUME button on the remote control or adjust the volume up or down via the front panel MASTER VOLUME knob Listening over headphones Connect the headphone to the PHONES jack e The pre out output including the speaker output is automatically turned off when headphones are connected NOTE e To prevent heari
300. pearing in the main channels will be routed to the 80 Hz 123 a y ZONE2 subwoofer Video This sets whether or not to use the video Convert i ON Mode conversion function Video Setup 123 124 Audio Set the delay time the sound is synchronized ims Delay with the picture which are output in ZONE2 Zone3 4 Adjust the tone and channel level of the sound Zone Ge Tone tput from ZONES and ZONE4 Kate Ch Level PAPO an Zone4 Bass 0 dB Treble 0 dB HPF OFF L R 0 dB 155 Advanced Setup Part 2 7 Option Setup Option Setup Default settings Page q Channel The number of channels that you wish to play back in each Main Zone Zone2 Zone3 Zoned 126 128 Setup zone are assigned to each zone accordingly 9 1 CH 5 1 CH Stereo Stereo Normal 2 Power Amp Power Amplifiers can be assigned to the various channels E YA 3 la e RI R2 R3 R4 RS 129 133 Assignment according to your system s requirements FL c SLA SLB SBL FR SRA SRB SBR This sets the volume level of each zone output Volume Limit Main Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev FULL This sets the upper limit for the master volume Power On Level neo Zone2 Vol Lev VAR Vol Limit OFF P On Lev LAST Mute Lev
301. play the AVR 5805Cl Zone Setup Option Setup xit Exit TV Play the audio signals on a TV connected to the Press the CURSOR or V button to select AVR 5805CI HDMI DVI In Assign then press the ENTER 4 1 HDMI DVI In Assign button DVD HDMI1 Monitor HDMI e The HDMI DVI In Assign screen appears VDP HDMI2 HDMI TV HDMI3 GlAudioj lt AMP gt DBS HDMI 4 No Signal 4 Video Setup ee ver HDMI5 1 EXT 1 A 1 n Assign VCR 2 DVI D S G1 HDMI DVI In Assign troy NONE gt Monitor HDMI VR NONE A wee ER E NONE 1 ANALOG 4 HDMI Component Out faa NONE vAu NONE 5 ANALOG 5 Audio Delay VERT NONE 6 On Screen Display fice NONE Tae NONE Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the Exit 2 NONE input 1 to 5 then press the CURSOR lt or gt Vu NONE A button to select the analog input terminal IN or ANAL 3 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the EXT IN or ANALOG input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt 4 1 HDMI DVI In Assign DVD HDMI 1 Monitor HDMI VDP HDMI2 HDMI DI HDMI 3 Audio AMP DBS HDMI 4 No Signal VOR HDMI5 amp 1 4EXT 1 gt VCR 2 DVI D 2 EXT 2 button to select the input terminal X Select from among HDMI 1 to 5
302. preset channel name to the default value press the CURSOR lt or gt button to highlight the preset SAG a DBE Setup channel display then press the CURSOR V button When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default name 1 Digital In Assign 2 EXT IN Setup 3 Input Function Lev 4 Function Rename 5 EEE1394 Assign 351 Preset Name j 6 IEEE1394 Auto Func 7 TEX 3 7 Preset Name Tuner Presets it CEM ee WMI X FM CTR Aa WMJ X FM gt Default Yes4 Del Default Yes 5 Once all the characters have been input press the ENTER button e The Preset Name screen reappears X Use the same procedure to change other input station names as well Press the CURSOR YV button at the very bottom of the screen to select the next preset memory block e The screen for the next preset memory block appears 3 7 Preset Name Block B B TAM 5 20ktz B 2AM 600ktz B3AM 1000kkz B4AM 1400kkz B5AM 1500khkz B6AM 1710kkz B7FM 90 10Mbz D B8FM 90 10MHz X It is also possible to select the desired preset memory block by selecting Block then pressing the CURSOR lt or button Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Tuner Presets screen reappears Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Audio Input Setup men
303. produced from e Subwoofer s initial setting is set to NO e Set the setting to YES 140 141 H e Subwoofer s output is not connected e Connect properly 17 42 subwoofer f e The subwoofer s channel volume level is set Turn the subwoofer s channel volume level up 64 to OFF No testtones are Greased e Surround mode is set to a mode other than Set to STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround P STANDARD Dolby DTS Surround No sound is produced from e Surround mode is set to STEREO e Set to a mode other than STEREO surround speakers e Batteries dead e Replace with new batteries 9 This unit Ge notovsrate e Remote control unit too far from this unit e Move closer 9 p e Obstacle between this unit and remote control e Remove obstacle 9 properly when remote control unit unit is used e r e Different button is being pressed e Press the proper button e and ends of battery inserted in reverse e Insert batteries properly 9 157 Troubleshooting Symptom Cause Measures Page e AVR 5805Cl s HDMI output terminals and eCheck the HDMI connection 36 37 monitor s input terminals are not properly connected e No HDMI DVI signal is being input e Properly select HDMI or DVI signal input 111 112 S n source i GE with e The connected monitor equipment or other e The AVR 5BOBCI will not output video signal 36 37 equipments do not support H
304. put channel Zone2 3 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONE2 and 3 output channels Zone3 4 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONES and 4 output channels Zone2 4 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONE2 and 4 output channels Zone2 3 4 This mode is the setting of the status in which the power amplifier is assigned simultaneously to the ZONEZ2 3 and 4 output channels Bi Amp Front This mode is the setting for playing the front channel with bi amp connections Bi Amp This mode is the setting for playing the front center and surround channels with bi amp connections Xx When Advanced or Adv Front B is selected the power amplifiers can be assigned freely to the desired channels SHEARER SYSTEMS S D ki 7 2 Power Amp Assign Amp Assign Mode 4 Advanced gt OOOO 1 OOQOOO gt O00000 PL gt AER L2 4C k Riris L3 4SL A gt R3 4SR A L4 4SL Bt R4 4SR B L5 4SBL gt R5 4SBR When Advanced or Adv Front B is selected Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the power amplifier to be assigned then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select which channel to assigned the amplifier to Press the ENTER bu
305. r3 opra opts opts Inputs 1 2 3 4 5 EXT IN 1 Mode DSP Surr B NOT USED S Back NOT USED Setup SW Level 15 dB Input ATT OFF EXT IN Setup Set the EXT IN terminal playback method EXTIN2 105 zak ode DSP SW Level 15 dB Input ATT OFF Setup g E CDR GE The playback level is corrected individually for the different TUNER PHONO CD Tape DVD VDP TV DBS VCR 1 VCR 2 VCR 3 VCR 4 VAUX Aux ue input sources Level OdB OdB 0dB OdB 0dB OdB OdB 0dB OdB OdB OdB OaB OdB 0 dB Function The names of the different input function can be changed uner pun cp JOB l pvo vop tv pes ver 1 ver 2 ver 3 vera vaux Net 106 107 Rename as desired and displayed on the display TAPE Audio IEEE1394 The connected IEEE1394 device can be automatically 107 Assignment identified to assign the input source EEE Ieee Set the function for associating playback of the connected Auto Auto Function OFF 108 IEEE1394 device on or off Function A1 A8 87 5 89 1 98 1 107 9 90 1 90 1 90 1 90 1 MHz B1 B8 520 600 1000 1400 1500 1710 kHz 90 1 90 1 MHz Auto ji ji ji C1 C8 90 1 MHz Preset FM stations are received automatically and ere AMi 108 Memory stored in the memory E1 E8 90 1 MHz Tuner Presets F1 F8 90 1 MHz G1 G8 90 1 MHz Preset Preset channels that are not used often can be All preset channels ON 109 Skip skipped Preset The preset channels can be given the names 109 Name you want
306. rameter Check screen appears 1 5 Parameter Check Speaker Config Check Delay Time Check Channel Level Check Crossover Freq Check FEQ Parameter Check Restore Yes 4 L Exit XX 1 5 EQ Parameter Check Audyssey Front Flat Exit Advanced Setup Part 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the Equalizer curve then press the ENTER button e The EO Check screen appears EQ Check Audyssey GNext 4 gt Exit Front L Front R uana Sa x The display is only an approximate picture of the response and that correction is happening at all ee Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the speaker channel If the check ends press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The EO Parameter Check screen reappears EQ Check Next 4 gt GExit Audyssey Su 6 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Parameter Check screen reappears 1 5 EQ Parameter Check Audyssey Front Flat WExit S 1 152 The results of the Auto Setup procedure can be reset even if the settings have been changed after performing the Auto Setup procedure Press the CURSOR or V button to select Restore Yes then press the CURSOR lt button Pa 1 5 Parameter Check Speaker Config Check Delay Tim
307. rating instructions of the other components e Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly left with left right with right e Note that binding pin plug cables together with power supply cords or placing them near a power transformer will result in generating hum or other noise a oO 0 P Optical cable Optical fiber cable E DENON LINK connections a a E BNC 75 Q ohms cable DENON LINK cable DVI D connections EI IEEE1394 connections B T 24 pin DVI D cable 4 pin S400 IEEE1394 cable Audio and Video cable D Speaker connections M HDMI connections Zeck DA E Speaker cable 7 19 pin HDMI cable Signal direction Audio signal Video signal lt a NOTE NOTE e Connecting a LD laser disc player with a Dolby Digital RF Output The AVR 5805Cl does not have a DD RF demodulator function Therefore you need to use a commercially available outboard DD RF demodulator and connect its digital output to one of the AVR 5805CI available digital inputs Refer to the demodulator s operating instruction for further information 27 Connecting Other Sources The video conversion function e The AVR 5805Cl1 is equipped with a function for up and down converting video signals Because of this the AVR 5805Cl s MONITOR OUT terminal can be connected to the monitor TV with a set of cables offering a higher quality connection regardless of how the player and the AVR 5805Cl s video input ter
308. resolution of the video output to one that is compatible with the resolution of your monitor e When Component is set at Scaler under HDMI Component Out the signals are output to the HDMI DVI D monitor output terminal with their original resolution Use a monitor compatible with a resolution of 4801 5761 The analog video to HDMI conversion function Video terminal Video terminal MONITOR OUT ZONE2 AVR 5805Cl s input terminals AVR 5805Cl s output terminals Cautions on the ZONE2 video conversion function e There is no TBC Time Base Collector for ZONE2 The AVR 5805CI s video up conversion function lets you output analog video input signals component 480i 576i 480p 576p 10801 or 720p S Video and composite video 4801 5761 to the HDMI monitor output terminal With the AVR 5805CI the resolution of the signal output to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal can be selected 157 page 113 114 The resolutions with which the monitor is compatible can be checked using the STATUS button on the When the component video terminals are used to connect the AVR 5805C with a TV or monitor projector etc and the video yellow or S Video terminals are used to connect the AVR 5805ClI with a VCR depending on the combination of the TV and VCR the picture may flicker in the horizontal direction be distorted be out of sync or not display at all when playing video tapes If this happens con
309. right FR surround left SL and surround right SR surround back left SBL and surround back right SBR is less than 2 ft 60 cm Preparations Measure the distances between the listening position and the speakers L1 to L11 on the diagram at the below FL c FR A A t 1 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Delay Time at the Speaker Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Delay Time screen appears 2 Speaker Setup lee g S 1 Speaker Config aaah Time a Sa AA Set The Distance To 4 Channel Level Each Speakers 5 Crossover Frequenc Do You Prefer 6 Surround Sp Setup H D 7 THX Audio Setup In Meters In Feet Exit Meters 4 gt Feet X A 142 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the desired unit Meters or Feet e The Delay Time screen appears automatically Example When Feet is selected 2 3 Delay Time Set The Distance To Each Speakers Do You Prefer In Meters In Feet Meters 4 gt ay Time Step 4 Default GFL 12 Dn cesses LI FR 12 Oft o L2 D c 12 oft E L3 n SW 12 Oft E L4 eco 7223 Delay Time D imma t GSL A4 10 Dn a L5 a 7p SR A 10 Oft ie L SL B 10 Oft L7 D SR B 10 oni L n SBL 10 oft L9 sa
310. rol unit may differ for some brands Check beforehand 3 The CD VCR or DVD buttons can be assigned to a TV or satellite tuner or cable TV 127 page 85 83 Advanced Operation IR segment SYSTEM CALL X CHANNEL TO derer NUMBER gt em EE Setting the learning function f your AV device is a brand other than DENON or if operation is not possible using the preset memory function the signals of a remote control unit of that device can be stored in the AVR 5805Cl s remote control unit For some remote control units it may not be possible to earn the signals or the device may not operate properly after the signals are learnt In this case use the remote control unit of that device Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice Press the 9 7 5 button 9 gt 7 5 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the learning mode is set Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be operated x Learning is not possible for the AMP ZONE2 ZONES ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes Press the button to be set e The display will go off and the unit will enter the learning standby mode x If a button that cannot be learnt is pressed the IR segment lights and the setting is canceled x Cannot be set at the HOME button 84 Point the remote control units straight at each other and press and hold in the button on the other remote control
311. round mode other than DOLBY DTS STEE EN SURROUND or HOME THX CINEMA mode SURROUND or HOME THX CINEMA CHECK ANTENNA is displayed e AVR 5805CI s XM terminal and the XM Mini e Check that the connection are correct 40 in the XM mode Tuner and Home Dock is not properly connected NO SIGNAL is displayed in the The signal cannot be received e Reposition your XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock 71 XM mode OFF AIR is displayed in the XM e The selected channel is not currently Select the another channel 72 73 mode broadcasting Receiving only XM channels 0 e The XM Tuner is not activated e Contact XM Satellite Radio 71 and 1 158 Additional Information Optimum surround sound for different sources There are currently various types of multi channel signals signals or formats with more than two channels E Types of multi channel signals Dolby Digital including Surround EX DTS including Surround ES DVD Audio and Super Audio CD Note on the above MUSE 3 1 and MPEG multi channel audio are not available to North American consumers same is true for Dolby s AAC Source here does not refer to the type of signal format but the recorded content Sources can be divided into two major categories E Types of sources e Movie audio Signals created to be played in movie theaters In general sound is recorded to be played in movie theaters equipped with multiple s
312. ructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation e If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way and f When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance this indicates a need for service Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire electric shock or other hazards Safety Check Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition Wall or Ceiling Mounting The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer Heat The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other products including amplifiers that produce heat Getting Started Thank you for choosing the DENON AVR 5805C AV Surround Receiver This remarkable component has been engineered to provide superb surround sound listening with home theater sources such as DVD as well as providing outstanding high fidelity
313. ry and press the CURSOR A or V button to select the channel within the selected category Direct access of channels 7 Press the SEARCH button in the XM mode Press the NUMBER buttons to enter the desired channel x For example if you want to access channel 123 ex XM123 press the NUMBER buttons as shown below Remote control unit Once all number have been input press the ENTER button to change the channel x If the next NUMBER button is not pressed within several seconds the channel automatically switches to the channel number that was input e LOADING is displayed while receiving the channel or information e When the selected channel is not available XM is displayed e Information on the artist name song title category and signal level can be checked using the STATUS button on the main unit e The XM Satellite Radio channels can be preset in the same way as AM FM band Please refer to Preset memory and Recalling preset stations ES page 66 67 73 Basic Operation Basic Operation Using the Network Audio Function e The AVR 5BOBCI can be connected to a network by cable to listen to Internet radio or music files stored on computers Internet radio function Internet radio refers to radio programs broadcast over th Internet There are many stations throughout the world broadcastin Internet radio pr
314. s selected Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the 2 speaker then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume Example Manual mode is selected r a l est Tone Manual NANNANHNMHTNOTN Srrwwwayw KEE EE Ee Dress the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Channel Level screen reappears e To cancel the settings press the CURSOR lt button to select Level Clear and Yes on the Channel Level screen then make the settings again 2 4 Channel Level Test Tone 08 gt Manual Test Tone Start Yes 4 Level Clear Ri 144 e When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system you may also need to adjust the subwoofer s own volume control e When you adjust the channel levels while in the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL mode the channel level adjustments made will affect all surround modes Consider this mode a Master Channel Level adjustment mode e After you have completed the SYSTEM SETUP CHANNEL LEVEL adjustments you can then activate the individual surround modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes Then whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled Check the instructions for adjusting cha
315. s selected e OFF This is the recommended play mode when Dolby Pro Logic II is selected The surround back channel is not played E Checking the input signal e The input signal can be checked by pressing the remote control unit s ON SCREEN button SIGNAL Displays the type of signal DTS DOLBY DIGITAL PCM etc fs Displays th FORMAT Displays the input signal s number of channels Number of front channels Number of channels LFE on off SURROUND is displayed for 2 channel signal sources recorded in Dolby Surround OFFSET Displays the dialog normalization offset value 127 page 55 FLAG Displays the special identification signal recorded in the input signal MATRIX is displayed if the input signal has undergone matrix processing DISCRETE is displayed if the input signal has undergone discrete processing Not displayed when no identification signal is recorded e input signal s sampling frequency surround 52 e In addition screen information is displayed in the following order when the ON SCREEN button is pressed repeatedly OSD 1 Audio input signal OSD 2 Monitor information OSD 3 Input output OSD 4 Auto surround mode OSD 5 USER MODE 1 OSD 6 USER MODE 2 OSD 7 USER MODE 3 OSD 8 14 Tuner preset stations Mode Dolby Digital EX Mode DTS ES DSCRT6 1 RoomEQ OFF RoomEQ OFF SIGNAL DOLBY DIGITAL SIGNAL DTS
316. s set to Always 115 Advanced Setup Part 1 Advanced Playback e Makes more detailed audio playback settings Setting the 2ch Direct Stereo e The speaker settings can be changed specifically for playing in the 2 channel DIRECT or STEREO mode 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Advanced Playback at the System Setup Menu then press the ENTER button e The Advanced Playback menu appears System Setup Menu e Auto Setup Room EQ 5 Advanced Playback Speaker Setup Audio Input Setup Video Setup 1 HI 2ch Direct Stereo 4 F5 Advanced Playback 6 e E 2 Dolby Digital Setup 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup Zone Setup Option Setup xit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select 2ch Direct Stereo then press ENTER button e The 2ch Direct Stereo screen appears Example This screen is displayed in function of the settings made at Speaker Configuration Subwoofer Setup Delay Time and Crossover Frequency 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo GSetting 4 Basic j Crossover THX Front Small Subwoofer Yes SE Ge e Subwoofer Mode LFEK THX Press the CURSOR lt or button to select Custom 5 1 2ch Direct Stereo Setting 4Custom gt Front Sma Subwoofer 4 Yes
317. se Measures 1 1 Auto Setup The speakers required for producing suitable reproduction have not been detected e The front L speaker was detected but the front R speaker was not detected e Check that the pertinent speakers are properly connected e Only one channel of the surround A and eT h surround B speakers was detected ae e Sound was output from the R channel when Se only one surround back speaker was ga D BI Retry 4 connected AABB Cancel 4 e The surround back or the surround B speaker was detected but the surround A speaker was not detected X If multiple errors occur press the CURSOR lt or gt button to check the contents 11 Auto Setup na The speaker polarity is connected in reverse Check the polarity of the pertinent speakers ec EE X If multiple errors occur press the CURSOR lt or For some speakers the screen gp gt button to check the contents below may be displayed even though the speakers are properly connected a el Ber If so select Skip lt 2258 Cancel4 1 Skip J IESSE There is too much ambient noise in the room Either turn off the power of the and the measurements cannot be made device that generated the noise Farbe EN accurately during the measurements Or move Too High or the device away Level is Too Low Try again at a time when it is quieter 4 The sound level that is outp
318. search Manual search Manual search Se Manual search 8 7 forward reverse forward reverse forward reverse forward reverse H Pause Pause Pause Pause a Stop Stop Stop Stop SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on Power on SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off Power off A G Preset memory block AY Tuning BAND EE switching MODE A E Auto Manual _ 8 switching MEMO SS Preset memory Buttons SETUP Setup 8 Setup Setup Setup ENTER Enter Enter Enter Enter AV Ab Cursor operation Cursor operation Cursor operation Cursor operation CH Station selection Preset channel Station selection Station selection Station selection selection 8 8 8 RDS search E 7 SRCH XM direct search MENU z Menu Menu Menu Menu DISP Guide Display selection Guide SFT 2 _ Preset memory block 8 8 selection Preset station 0 9 10 Track selection Station selection Track selection selection 0 8 Number input station Station selection Station selection XM channel selection selection 0 9 Tv VCR Input mode selection Default setting DENON CD HITACHI VCR 8 zi DENON DVD HITACHI TV RCA SAT preset code 31867 20000 41470 11145 00392 Special remarks 0 00 Special remarks Itis only possible to set the preset memory for one device per mode Note that the function names of the DVD buttons on the remote cont
319. set to ON is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on OFF If OFF is selected when an input source set to ON is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns off a donk THX DOLBY DTS CINEMA op MUSIC ON GAME o WIDE SCREEN 0N 9CH STEREO ON DSP SIMULATION 0N MULTI CH MODE ON Press the ENTER button e The Trigger Out screen reappears x Use the same procedure to make the settings for Trigger Out 2 3 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Option Setup menu reappears 7 4 Trigger Out D Trigger Out 1 Trigger Out 2 Trigger Out 3 Trigger Out 4 De fau t Yesj4 L GExit Xx When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the AC Outlet Assignment e This sets the AC outlet to on or off for the different input sources 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select AC Outlet Assign at the Option Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The AC Outlet Assign screen appears Option Setup e 1 Channel Setup FE SAE et 2 Power Amp Assign FAC Outlet 1 3 Volume Control AC Outlet 2 4 Trigger Out AC Outlet 3 5 AC Ou
320. sign Trigger Out Setup Memory Lock Network Setup Kit De fau een Exit J 2 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the trigger out terminal you want to set then press the ENTER button e Switch to the setting screen Example When Trigger Out 1 is selected 7 4 Trigger Out 1 D EZONE lt 4MAIN gt Tuner OFF DBS ON Phono OFF VCR 1 ON CD OFF VCR 2 ON Tape OFF VCR 3 ON DVD ON VCR 4 ON VDP ON V Aux ON TV ON Aux ON L Gurt Mode jJ Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the zone MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3 and ZONE4 The power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on and off when the power for the set zone is turned on and off Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON When that input source is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on OFF When that input source is selected the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns off 135 Advanced Setup Part 1 If MAIN was selected at step 3 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the surround mode then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON If ON is selected when an input source
321. stration mode is set Press the SYSTEM CALL button 1 2 or 3 for which you want to register the operations Press the buttons you want to register in the order of the operations to be performed Example Press the ON button d Press the CD button of the MODE SELECTOR button d Press the gt button x The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR button Repeat steps 3 4 to register the desired buttons Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice and the setting is completed E Operating Press the AMP button to select SYSTEM CALL Press the SYSTEM CALL button 1 2 or 3 at which the operation are registered e The stored signals are transmitted successively Setting the punch through function e CD DVD or VCR mode buttons can be assigned to unused TV and SAT CBL mode buttons e For example when DVD mode operations are assigned to TV mode buttons the DVD mode can be operated while in the TV mode Press and hold the RC SETUP button for at least 3 seconds e The IR segment blinks twice 85 Advanced Operation Press the 9 8 4 button 9 8 4 in that order e The IR segment blinks twice and the punch through setting mode Is set Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the device to be punched through CD DVD or VCR Press the button to be punched through gt H lt lt kk L a PPI or ID Press the MODE S
322. system This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits When installing an outside antenna system extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal Overloading Do not overload wall outlets extension cords or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product Servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Damage Requiring Service Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged b If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the product c If the product has been exposed to rain or water d If the product does not operate normally by following the operating inst
323. t Digital Input Assignment IGS page 109 TV tuner _ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y ey Le Sa J p Pe Pr S VIDEO vm EN SVIDEO i gt _ E our n Aa es SG AUDIO OUT G EC COAXIAL OUT Connecting a DBS tuner e For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DBS tuner S Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your DBS tuner does not have component video inputs e To connect the digital audio output from the DBS tuner you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections If you choose to use the optical connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment IG page 104 DBS BS Tuner COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y n cz ar dooow CT ja We Ge T 1 zm e EY SVIDEO o gt _ lt a r D AUDIO OUT L G Ae dr Ne J 30 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the external inputs EXT IN terminals e AVR 5805CI is equipped with two analog external input terminals for 9 1 channels and 5 1 channels e These terminals are for inputting multi channel audio signals from an outboard decoder or a component with a different type of multi channel decoder such as a DVD Audio player or a multi channel Super Audio CD player or other future multi channel so
324. t source to TUNER CH Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode 2 Press the TU TUNER button to select the TUNER EN Remote control unit Press the MEMORY button mode Remote control unit to select the desired band AM FM or XM Xx The memory block can also be selected by pressing A he SHIFT x When listening to the XM satellite Radio CS page thos purton k Press the CHANNEL button or NUMBER 1 to Press the MODE button to set the manual tuning 8 button to select the desired preset channel mode Press the MEMORY button again e Store the station in the preset memory Watching the display press the BAND button 4 Press the MEMORY BLOCK A to G button Check that the display s AUTO indicator turns off Press the TUNING button to tune in the desired P station e To preset other channels repeat steps 2 to 5 A total of 56 broadcast stations can be preset 8 stations channels 1 to 8 in each of blocks A to G The frequency changes continuously when the button is held in e When the manual tuning mode is set FM stereo broadcasts are received in monaural and the STEREO indicator turns off 66 Basic Operation Checking the preset stations RDS Radio Data System e The preset broadcast stations can be checked on the on screen display Press the ON SCREEN button in the AMP mode repeatedly until the Tuner Preset Stations
325. te cables for the picture and sound and making it possible to make connectors smaller HDMI is also compatible with HDCP High bandwidth Digital Contents Protection a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI Homi e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC Windows Media Connect This is a media server provided free of charge by Microsoft since October 2004 It operates with all types of music jukebox programs but is optimum with Windows Media Player Ver 10 Windows Media Connect can be used to play playlists created on jukebox software such as Windows Media Player Ver 10 as well as WMA DRM WMA MP3 and WAV files E Explanation for installing Windows Media Connect 1 If installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 is not yet complete either download free of charge from Microsoft or via the Windows Update installer 2 Download the latest version of Windows Media Player Ver 10 either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows Update installer 3 Download Windows Media Connect usable since October 12 2004 either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows Update installer vTuner DENON LINK DENON LINK is a DENON exclusive digital link for transmitting high speed high sound quality digital audio signals with no loss in of signal High q
326. ted resetting when the power is switched on e The unit is also equipped with a back up memory This function provides approximately one week of memory storage from when the main unit s power switch is off and with the power supply cord disconnected 101 Advanced Operation Initialization of the Microprocessor e In very rare instances the AVR 5805CI internal microprocessor might lock up or otherwise cause mis operation This might be caused due to an AC line surge or line spike noise or by static electric discharge on or nearby the unit or to connected components If the condition cannot be corrected by powering off the unit including disconnection of the power supply cord for a period of ten minutes and subsequent re connection then the unit may have to be re initialized Doing so will restore the microprocessor to Its original out of the box state with all custom memories and settings erased and the original factory default settings restored Only use this procedure if you are sure that the microprocessor requires re initialization Switch off the unit using the main unit s POWER switch Hold the following STANDARD button and HOME THX CINEMA button and turn the main unit s POWER switch on Check that the entire display is flashing with an interval of about 1 second and release your fingers from the 2 buttons e The microprocessor will be initialized P e f step 3 does not work start over
327. ter of the item you want to search for e After several seconds the menu screen is displayed with the cursor set to the item starting with the letter selected in step 2 x If there is more than one item starting with the letter selected in step 2 the items are displayed in alphabetical order Basic Operation Updating the list of radio stations Press the MODE button to select the configuration mode then press the ENTER or CURSOR button e The settings screen appears gt Internet Radio Radio List Version Automatic Update Manual Update Finternet Radio Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Automatic Update or Manual Update then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button e The update screen appears Select Radio List Version to display the current version 1 When Manual Update is selected Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button IA The list of radio stations is updated this one time When Automatic Update is selected Press the ENTER or CURSOR P button to select Yes e The list of radio stations is updated approximately once every other day P e When Yes is set for Automatic Update set Power Saving in the Network Setup to OFF I page 139 When used with Power Saving set to ON we recommend performing the Manual Update procedure periodically about once a week 79 Playing m
328. terminals 31 Connecting a video camera or video game eeeieeeeee Sil Connecting a DVD recorder 32 Connecting a VCR Connectingia CD player a a 38 Connecting a turntable n aee a 34 Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder 34 Connecting a tape deck EE 35 DENON LINK connection AA ANENE 35 Connecting equipment with HDMI terminals 36 Connecting equipment with DVI D terminals em Connecting IEEE1394 devices Connecting the antenna terminals Connecting the XM terminal Connecting the CONTROL terminal Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals 41 Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals REH 41 Connecting the pre out terminals eee 42 Connecting the power supply cord snssinsiasiarrieieeeieeeen 42 Playback Operating Fine Te mie Ya eet WI t EE EE Turning the sound off temporarily MUTING KIS mine ONE nia ad 8 hones aan ceocoecennoecarchocneadennabnoeasenarasarcher lee Oe EE Switching between HDMI and DVI D monitor output Selechonioi reso Eer Klee EE Combining the currently playing sound with the desired image MID SIO STEIN SC Be mT Vide ET Ee Checking the currently playing program source etc leren ee Room E OFU HE Surround kloyimolmodesrordiiterentsouice S an 49 Playing audio sources CDs and DVDs Ze ha mine Nipo ay aere mode oe E 50 THX Surround EX Home THX Cinema mode e Playing sources re
329. th O Mismatching of polarities will result in weak central sound unclear orientation of the various instruments and the sense of direction of the stereo being impaired NOTE e NEVER touch the speaker terminals when the power is on Doing so could result in electric shocks e When making connections take care that none of the individual conductors of the speaker cable come in contact with adjacent terminals with other speaker cable conductors or with the rear panel and screws E Speaker Impedance e Speakers with an impedance of from 6 to 16 Q ohms can be connected Connecting the speaker cables 1 Loosen by turning counterclockwise 2 Insert the cable 3 Tighten by turning clockwise Connecting banana plugs Turn clockwise to tighten then insert the banana plug S Oe 16 Protector circuit This unit is equipped with a high speed protection circuit The purpose of this circuit is to protect the speakers under circumstances such as when the output of the power amplifier is inadvertently short circuited and a large current flows when the temperature surrounding the unit becomes unusually high or when the unit is used at high output over a long period which results in an extreme temperature rise When the protection circuit is activated the speaker output is cut off and the power supply indicator flashes Should this occur please follow these steps be sure to swit
330. the Advanced Playback menu then press the ENTER button e The Auto Surround Mode screen appears 5 Advanced Playback TE i 2ch Direct Stereo 5 3 Auto Surround Mode 2 Dolby Digital Setu 3 Auto Surround Mode 4 Manual EQ Setup Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON if you want to use the auto surround mode OFF if you do not want to use it Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Advanced Playback menu reappears e The various settings applied in the auto surround mode can be checked via the on screen display Simply press the ON SCREEN button 1257 page 52 Auto Surround Mode cD ANALOG PCM 2ch STEREO Multith MULTI CH IN DIGITAL 2ch DOLBY PLIIx cinema 5 Ich DOLBY DTS SURROUND L pen 117 Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Manual EO Setup e Allows you to adjust the tonal quality of the various speakers except the subwoofer while listening to a music source 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Manual EQ Setup at the Advanced Playback menu then press the ENTER button e The Manual EQ screen appears 5 Advanced Playback 6 4 Manual EQ D 1 2ch Direct Stereo 2 Dolby Digital Setu 3 Auto Surround Mode GA Manual EQ Setup Default Yes4 Base Curve Copy4 FAdjust CH L R CH gt Exit
331. the ENTER button e The Subwoofer Mode screen appears 6 Zone Setup 6 2 Subwoofer Mode me Speaker Config Subwoofer Mode Delay Time 1 F2 3 ge Level EI gt LFE 6 7 E Crossover Frequenc Main Video Setup Zone3 4 Tone Ch Le xit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the setting LFE For any channel s that are set to LARGE low frequencies in that channel s corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only Low frequencies that are directed to the subwoofer s are from the program source LFE channel and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL LFE Main Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to LARGE are reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer s Depending upon the characteristics of the LARGE main speakers this mode may provide a more even low frequency response throughout the listening room Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Zone Setup menu reappears I e The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when Large is set for the ZONE2 front speakers and Yes is set for the 120 subwoofer in the Setting the type of speaker for ZONE2 Setting the Delay Time for ZONE2 e This parameter is for optimizing the timing of the sound produced from the various speakers and subwoofer according to the listening position in ZONE2 1 Press the CURSOR
332. then press a NUMBER 1 8 button to register the station at the desired preset channel e This completes registration If no button is operated for approximately ten seconds the regular display reappears x Registered presettings can be checked on the on screen display The presettings can only be displayed with the on screen display when the NetAudio function is selected NOTE eRegistered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten E Listening to preset Internet radio stations When the NetAudio function is selected press a MEMORY BLOCK A G button then press a NUMBER 1 8 button e The connection is made automatically and playback starts 77 Basic Operation Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites e Your favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen so registered stations can be tuned in easily Press the MEMORY button while playing the Internet radio station you want to register e The registration menu appears Favorites Preset Favorites Preset Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Favorites then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e The favorites registration screen appears Favorites Is it registered lt Add Cancel gt Press the CURSOR lt button to register the station x To cancel without registering press the CURSOR gt button Basic Operation FUNCTION MODE MEMORY CURSOR
333. this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic or Mic 150 151 Select V AUX L channel input jack Speaker Setup Speaker Setup Default settings Page Input the combination of speakers in your system and their Surround Sp corresponding sizes SMALL for regular speakers LARGE Front Sp Center Sp Eiere A B Surround Back Sp Speaker S S d a 5 for full size full range to automatically set the composition 140 141 Configuration c the signals output from th kers and the f of the signals output from the speakers and the frequency Small Small Yes Small Small 2spkrs response Ge This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals LFE THX 141 142 This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the fFrontL amp R Center Subwoofer Surround Surround Surround Delay Time audio signals are produced from the speakers and L amp R A L amp R B Back 142 143 subwoofer according to the listening position 12 0 ft 3 6 m 12 0 ft 3 6m 12 0 ft 3 6 m 10 0 ft 3 0m 10 0 ft 3 0 m 10 0 ft 3 0 m This adjusts the volume of the signals output from the Front Front R Center Surround Surround Surround Surround Surround Surround Subwoofer Channel speakers and subwoofer for the different channels in order LIA RIA L B RIB BackL Back R 143 145 o obtain optimum effects 0dB 0dB 048 0aB dB od oda 0a8 0dB WER Crossover Set the frequency Hz below which the bass sound of the A FIKED THK 145 146
334. tlet Assign 6 Setup Memory Lock 7 Network Setup De fau l tlves Exit Exit Press the CURSOR or V button to select the AC outlet you want to set then press the ENTER button e Switch to the setting screen Example When AC Outlet 1 is selected 7 5 AC Outlet 1 ZONE 4MAIND Tuner ON DBS ON Phono ON VCR 1 ON CD ON VCR 2 ON Tape ON VCR 3 ON DVD ON VCR 4 ON VDP ON V Aux ON TV ON Aux _ ON J 3 Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the zone MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3 and ZONE4 x The power of the AC outlet turns on and off when the power for the set zone is turned on and off 4 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the input source then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select ON or OFF ON The power of the AC outlet turns on when that input source is selected OFF The power of the AC outlet turns off when that input source is selected 136 Press the ENTER button e The AC Outlet Assign screen reappears Xx Use the same procedure to make the settings for AC Outlet 2 3 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Exit then press the ENTER button e The Option Setup menu reappears 7 5 AC Outlet AC Outlet 1 AC Outlet 2 AC Outlet 3 De fau ee FExit x When Default Yes
335. to the standby mode After checking the above check the connections of the external controller Operation is possible 40 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals Turn the DC 12 V voltage on and off for the individual functions and surround modes For details see Setting the Trigger Out ES page 135 TRIGGER OUT DC IN 250mA MAX e Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals x For instructions on operations using the MULTI ZONE functions 1257 page 87 98 ZONE2 connections e t is possible to connect a separate amplifier to the AVR 5805Cl and simultaneously listen to a different program source than that in the MAIN ZONE in a different room ZONE2 3 4 IGE page 88 92 e The ZONE2 video out is only for the ZONE2 x The diagram below shows an example of connections for performing surround playback in ZONE2 For 2 channel connections in ZONE2 and for ZONE3 and ZONE4 connection examples see pages 87 92 TV Monitor ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO IN ZONE2 CRB P Pa Z J LE CH S VIDEO o 9 IN VIDEO ra ui IN 2 L J iT si wa BRE MONITOR OUT ZONE2 S VIDEO vipeo REMOTE CONTROL iRoom TO ROOM a Power amplifier ZONE2 D 5 1ch AUDIO IN Ore A gt A R El O El gt T woorer INPUT OUTPUT T CENTER
336. to your DVD recorder S Video and composite video outputs are also provided If you choose to use the component video or BNC connection it needs to be assign For more information about Component Input Assignment IG page 112 e f you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital sources such as a DVD recorder to an analog recorder such as a cassette deck you will needs connect analog inputs and outputs as shown below in addition to the digital audio connections e To connect the digital audio output from the DVD recorder you can choose from either the coaxial or the optical connections If you choose to use the coaxial connection it needs to be assigned For more information about Digital Input Assignment I page 104 DVD recorder VIDEO OUT E CH SEH COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y PB PR T S VIDEO O a IN COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO vm EN we D AUDIO IN SAMI Al R OPTICAL 3 Aal D ol SE zt OPTICAL D Ol out D AUDIO OUT CH KR E Cas r NOTE e When recording to DVD recorder it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR 5805CI VCR 1 to 4 OUT terminal Example TV IN S Video cable VCR 1 to 4 OUT S Video cable TV IN Video cable VCR 1 to 4 OUT Video cable e Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OP
337. tpl gO SW 12 Oft D x The distance changes in units of 1 foot or 0 1 foot each time the button is pressed Select the value closest to the measured distance x When Step is selected you can select the unit of 1 ft 0 1 m or 0 1 ft 0 01 mi When Default Yes is selected then press the CURSOR lt button to reset to the default values x The difference of the distances set for the various speakers must be 20 0 ft 6 0 m or under If an inappropriate distance is set RELOCATE BLINKING SP is displayed In this case move the relevant speaker to the proper position as indicated by the displayed value RELOCATE BLINKING SP Step 4 Int mmm Default Yes 4 Sg Si E FL 12 Oft FR 12 Oft gt C 10 Oft 6 COE L U J Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Zone Setup menu reappears The AVR 5805CI automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the ZONEZ2 listening room Advanced Setup Part 1 Setting the Channel Level for ZONE2 e Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels of ZONE2 is equal e From the ZONE2 listening position listen to the test tones produced from the speakers used in ZONE2 to adjust the level e The level can also be adjusted directly from the remote control unit I page 95 7 Press the CURSOR A
338. tsuri General PRESET CODE 10009 10163 10235 10443 10579 10051 10587 10264 10773 11755 10009 10012 10037 10808 10700 10610 10003 10185 10264 10009 10195 10374 10661 10009 10178 10337 10001 10706 10037 10163 10625 10037 10447 10019 10374 10037 10808 10706 10017 10037 10070 10359 10021 10193 10019 10093 10180 10535 11250 10163 10011 OI 2 A085 10455 MEI 10250 10037 a WO 10880 10145 11037 10412 10037 10216 10411 10714 10016 10179 10009 10070 10535 10030 10630 10032 10108 10412 10030 10108 10208 10556 10035 10036 NOM ONS 10355 10363 10487 10516 10714 11037 10650 10556 10668 MOST MSI 10178 10817 10848 10056 10060 10250 10463 10060 10264 10087 10275 10587 10668 10037 10150 10668 10808 10039 10047 10487 10516 10036 10037 10150 10154 10236 10250 10817 10836 10104 10105 10217 10247 10480 10492 10037 10208 10371 10544 10698 11437 1037 10746 11037 10535 10163 0346 0512 10150 10473 10367 10178 10051 10056 10178 10381 10868 10072 a IZ 10433 10556 10714 10191 10361 10634 10154 10556 10388 10218 10135 10087 1 1 79 10512 11037 Mivar onaco Monivision organ s Motorola IEG MTEC Tlog
339. tton to enter the setting e The Option Setup menu reappears P e The amplifier assignment modes that can be selected differ according to the channel settings made at Channel Setup IF page 126 128 The status in which power amplifiers are assigned to output channels in the different amplifier assignment modes differs according to the channel settings for the different zones I page 131 132 e f the Advanced or Adv Front B amplifier assignment mode is selected the channels to which power amplifiers can be assigned differ according to the channel settings for the different zones ES page 133 130 Advanced Setup Part 1 Bi Amp connections Certain loudspeakers are equipped with two sets of input AVR 5805Cl terminals for bi amplification The AVR 5805CIl Amp w DVI D HDCP SPEAKER SYSTEMS Assign mode allows you to power bi amp capable GE speakers with two amplifier channels up to a total of 5 bi amplified speakers in a system using all 10 of the AVR 5805Cl amplifier channels Be sure to consult the SPEAKER operating instructions of your bi amp capable speakers for further information before proceeding NOTE e When making bi amp connections be sure to remove the short circuiting bar included with the speaker E Table of power amplifier assignment modes with respect to the channel settings for the different zones
340. tton to set the level To increase the bass or treble The bass or treble sound can be increased to up to 6 dB in steps of 1 dB To decrease the bass or treble The bass or treble sound can be decreased up to 6 dB in steps of 1 dB Press the ENTER button e The surround parameter menu reappears Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting 63 Basic Operation E Adjusting the tone from the main unit 7 Press the TONE CONTROL button Xx The tone switches as follows each time the button is pressed gt BASS ALL gt TREBLE ALL F BASS need Ee center C BASS center F TREBLE front SA BASS SA TREBLE S B BASS S B TREBLE surround A surround A surround B surround B SW BASS SB TREBLE subwoofer Surround back SB BASS surround back Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to set the level X To increase the bass or treble The bass or treble sound can be increased to up to 6 dB in steps of 1 dB x To decrease the bass or treble The bass or treble sound can be decreased up to 6 dB in steps of 1 dB E Tone defeat mode e f you do not want the bass and treble to be adjusted turn on the tone defeat mode Press the TONE DEFEAT button to turn on the Tone Defeat mode X The signals do not pass through the bass and treble adjustment circuits providing higher quality sound Basic Operation FUNCTI
341. u reappears 110 Advanced Setup Part 1 Video Setup e Make the video related settings Setting the HDMI DVI In Assignment 4 1 HDMI DVI In Assign DVD HDMI 1 Monitor HDMI gt VDP HDMI2 HDMI TJ HDMI3 Audio AMP DBS HDMI 4 No Signal VCR 1 HDMI5 Ve Et e The HDMI or DVI D input terminals are assigned for the different input sources Select HDMI or DVI D for the monitor output terminal Select the HDMI audio signal playback method YR DVI D 2 EXT 2 veR3 NONE 3 ANALOG CS NONE 4 ANALOG vaxl NONE 5 ANALOG Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Video Setup at the System Setup Menu X This setting can be switched directly using the then press the ENTER button MONITOR SELECT button on the main unit e The Video Setup menu appears System Setup Menu Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Audio then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to select the method for playing the audio HDMI DVI In Assign signals included in the HDMI input signal Fl 2 Component In Assign 3 Video Convert Mode 4 5 6 4 Vid Set D Auto Setup Room EQ feet RRE 1 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E D HDMI Component Out AMP SE Audio Delay Play the audio signals on speakers connected to On Screen Dis
342. uality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier performance pre amplifier performance and operation as well as hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain In addition to improvements to the power amplifier with respect to previous THX Ultra standards three surround modes have been added the THX Ultra2 Cinema mode THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra Cinema mode plays 5 1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience In this mode new THX processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds DTS ES Matrix and 6 1 Discrete and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply processing to provide optimum replay Additional Information THX Music
343. uality sound playback is possible by connecting to a DENON DVD player with a DENON LINK terminal This is an Internet radio free online contents server Note that usage fess are included in upgrade costs For inquiries about this service visit the vluner site below vTuner website http Awww radiodenon com This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary Windows Media DRM Advanced AL24 Processing E Equipped with Advanced AL24 Processing time base area data quantity extension In addition to AL24 Processing Plus the conventional bit extension technology the PCM signal CD digital playback system also includes the newly developed Advanced AL24 Processing a unique high speed signal detection and processing technology that greatly improves the amount of data in the time base area In addition to extension of the original 16 bit data into 24 bits Advanced AL24 Processing conducts data interpolation on the time axis in other words up convert sampling to achieve natural interpolation processing without harming the original data In addition the digital filter offers expanded flexibility including pulse response with no ringing Optimum filtering pr
344. und format decoder e The method of video signal connection is the same as that for DVD player ES page 18 e For instructions on playback using the external input EXT IN terminals CS page 47 and Setting the EXT IN Setup 127 page 105 External decoder 1 DVD Audio Video Super Audio CD Player D 9 1ch AUDIO OUT FRONT OJP L R d CENTER 1 or Gett ehr e SURROUND Gi SI Se i omm 6 D Am om oro u gt Cao D q Ip Woored J XX P e The EXT IN 2 terminal can be connected for 5 1 channels FL FR C SL SR and SW in the same way as the EXT IN 1 terminal e With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken however the digital signals may not be output from the DVD player In this case connect the DVD player s analog multi channel output to the AVR 5805Cl s EXT IN terminals for playback Also refer to your DVD player s operating instructions Connecting a video camera or video game Video camera Video game D VIDEO ui OUT D AUDIO OUT Ge Or OPTICAL D Io OUT YA S VIDEO gt wa OUT 31 Connecting Other Sources Connecting a DVD recorder e For best picture quality choose the component video connection
345. under US and National Patent Applications 20030235318 and 10 700 220 Additional U S and Foreign Patents pending MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories Inc All rights reserved 166 In order to play the sound of DVD Audio discs Super Audio CDs or DVDs aside from freely copiable discs using IEEE1394 connections both the player and receiver must be compatible with the DTCP Digital Transmission Content Protection system DTCP is a copy protection technology that involves data encryption and authentication of the other device Refer to your player s operating instructions Additional Information The AVR 5805Cl s IEEE1394 device interface is designed based on the standards below 1 IEEE Std 1394a 2000 Standard for High Performance Serial Bus 2 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2 0 It is compatible with IEC60958 bit stream DVD Audio and Super Audio CD within AM824 sequence adaptation layers within these standards About HDMI HDMI is the abbreviation of High Definition Multimedia Interface This is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs developed based on the DVI Digital Visual Interface used for computer displays etc and optimized for use in non professional equipment With it non compressed digital video and multi channel audio signals can be transferred with a single connector eliminating the need to use separa
346. up TV DVD Combination x2 x3 Advent Apex Digital Audiovox Axion PRESET CODE 20739 20739 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 21972 DEI 21972 20616 20618 20739 20880 20614 20616 20614 20616 20636 21972 DEI 21972 20618 20636 20739 21008 21972 20972 41016 40830 41071 41121 41122 41071 Broksonic 40695 Optimus 20162 Bush 40516 40713 40884 Orion 20002 20479 21479 Denver 41353 41359 Panasonic 20162 21035 21308 Emerson 41268 Penney 20240 21035 21237 Go Vision 41071 Philco 20479 Grundig 40695 Quasar 20162 21035 Hitachi 41247 RadioShack 20000 Jensen 41016 RCA 20240 20807 21035 21060 Konka 40719 40720 Samsung 20432 21014 Panasonic 41490 Sansui 20000 20479 21479 Philips 40854 41260 Sanyo 20240 21330 Prima 41016 Sears 20000 21237 RCA 41022 Sharp 20807 Samsung 40899 Sony 20000 21232 21295 Sansui 40695 Sylvania 21781 Sova 41122 Symphonic 20000 Sylvania 40675 41268 Teac 20000 Toshiba 40695 Thomas 20000 Bush X3 10698 11037 Toshiba 20845 21145 21323 Denver X3 10587 Zenith 20000 20479 21479 Sylvania X3 10171 TV VCR DVD Combination 2 4 TV VCR Combination 3 x4 Akai 40899 America Action 3 10180 Broksonic 40868 Audiovox 3 10180 Emerson 40821 Emerson X3 10236 Funai 41334 Funai X3 JINS WA Magnavox 40821 Panasonic 41362 41462 X4 RCA 41132 Aiwa 20000 20479 Sharp 40630 America Action 20278 Superscan 40821 Audiovox 20278 Sylvania 40821 Broksonic 20002 204
347. up 7 Option Setup Exit 3 Audio Input Setup fl Digital In Assign 2 EXT IN Setup 3 Input Function Lev 4 Function Rename 5 6 7 E EEE1394 Assign EEE1394 Auto Func Tuner Presets xit P Digital In Assign uo Tae OPT5 DVD COAX2 VAux OPT6 VDP COAX3 H S DIr COAX4 DBS COAK5 WO OPT1 VCR 2 OPT VcR 3 OPT3 VCR 4 OPT4 De f au t Yes 4 7 System Setup Menu 1 Auto Setup Room EQ 2 Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 7 E co m mo Zone Setup Option Setup xit 102 Advanced Setup Part 1 On screen display and front display e The AVR 5805Cl is equipped with an intuitive and easy to understand on screen display and is equipped with an alpha numeric front panel display tube that can also be used to check and adjust settings We recommend that you use the on screen display when you make system adjustments Some representative front panel and on screen display examples are shown below On screen display l Front display mF No BL Auto Setup Room EQ Speaker Setup 3 Audio Input Setup 4 Video Setup 5 Advanced Playback 6 Zone Setup 7 E Screen title Sub menu title Option Setup Exit J EDOR N 1 Auto Setu
348. urces recorded in conventional Dolby Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5 1 channel and DTS Surround 5 1 channel sources Furthermore all the Denon original surround modes ES page 61 63 are compatible with 7 1 channel playback so you can enjoy 7 1 channel sound with any signal source E Numbers and types of surround back speakers With THX Surround EX the surround back channel consists of one channel of playback signals but we recommend using two speakers The modes that use the new ASA technology from THX IS page 165 are most effective when using two monopole type surround back speakers placed close together Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back channel when listening from a position other than the center E Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the sound at the rear Because of this the surround left and right channels play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back As shown on the diagram above in a movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the listeners creating an acoustic image as if the sound were floating in space To achieve these effects we recommend placing the speakers for the surround left and right channels slightl
349. urround speakers regardless of the format e Other types of audio These signals are designed to recreate a 360 sound field using three to five speakers In this case the speakers should surround the listener from all sides to create a uniform sound field from 360 Ideally the surround speakers should function as point sound sources in the same way as the front speakers These two types of sources thus have different properties and different speaker settings particularly for the surround Dolby Digital DTS etc speakers are required in order to achieve the ideal sound Movie theater sound field Listening room sound field OP oO The AVR 5805Cl s surround speaker selection function makes it possible to change the settings according to the combination of surround speakers being used and the surrounding environment in order to achieve the ideal surround sound for all sources This means that you can connect a pair of bipolar or dipolar surround speakers mounted on either side of the prime listening position as well as a separate pair of direct radiating monopolar speakers placed at the rear corners of the listening room Cor D Ze Dose HS DH Multiple surround speakers In this case it is important to achieve the same sense of expansion as in a movie theater with the surround channels To do so in some cases the number of surround speakers is increased to four or eig
350. usic files stored on the computer music server e The necessary system connections and settings must be made in order to play music files e This procedure is used to play music files in WMA MP3 and WAV format stored on computers music servers connected to the AVR 5805CI via the network e The computer s server program must be launched before using this function For details refer to the server program s operating instructions Either turn the FUNCTION knob or press the AUX button to select NetAudio AMP mode e The Network Audio menu appears FUNCTION ICH Main unit Remote control unit in the AMP mode Network Audio Favorites Internet Radio x The host names of the computer s server s on the network are displayed music Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the host name of the computer music server on which the music file you want to play is located then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the search item or the desired folder then press the ENTER or CURSOR P button x Playable music files are indicated by the x mark in front of them Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the music file then press the ENTER or CURSOR gt button e Connection starts and playback starts once the buffer reaches 100 x Press the CURSOR V button to select the next file the CURSOR A button to select the pr
351. ut from the Check the placement and orientation Retry speakers and or subwoofer is too low of the loudspeakers d Cancel J Adjust the subwoofer s output level mMicrophone None or Speaker None Retry4d L Cancel SA EE 1 1 Auto Setup 5 The measurement microphone is not connected or all of speakers have not been detected 6 The front L speaker was not detected Connect the measurement microphone to the SETUP MIC jack Check the speaker connection 26 Connecting Other Sources Cable indications e The hookup diagrams on the subsequent pages assume the use of the following optional connection cables not supplied Audio cable A Analog connections Stereo o eh Pin plug cable White Red B Analog connections Monaural for subwoofer 1r Pin plug cable Cc Digital connections Coaxial Orange Dm Coaxial cable 75 Q ohms pin plug cable DI Digital connections Optical Video cable H Video connections Yellow alle Video cable 75 Q ohms video pin plug cable i S Video connections ib gt S Video cable Component video connections Green Y Blue PB CB Red PR CR Component video cable K Component video connections e Do not plug in the power supply cord until all connections have been completed e When making connections also refer to the ope
352. utton e Switch to the Preset Skip screen 3 7 Tuner Presets Auto Preset Memory EE AA oe CNET lt gt Preset Skip A3 89 10MM ON AZA 98 10MHz ON Preset Name A4107 gou ON A5 90 10MHz ON A A6FM 90 10MHz ON Exit A7m 90 10MHz ON aan 90 10M ON J Press the CURSOR or V button to select the preset channel you want to skip then press the CURSOR lt or button to select ON or OFF 3 7 Preset Skip Block 4 A gt AAE gt A2Fu 89 TOM ON A3FM 98 TOM ON A4FU107 90MHz ON Ab 90 TOM ON A6F 90 TOM ON ATF 90 TOM ON ann 90 1 0MHz ON J Press the CURSOR V button at the very bottom of the screen to select the next preset memory block e The screen for the next preset memory block appears X It is also possible to select the desired preset memory block by selecting Block then pressing the CURSOR lt or gt button 3 7 Preset Skip Block 4 B gt B TAM 520kkz ON B 2AM 600kHz ON B3AM 1 000kHz ON BA 1 400 kHz ON BR 1 500 kHz ON Bou 1710kkz ON B7FM 90 TOM ON d Ban 90 TOM ON J 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 Press the ENTER button e The Tuner Presets screen reappears 109 Advanced Setup Part 1 E Preset Name e The preset
353. v can be set in the same way as ZONE3 ZONE4 Tone Ch Lev e For instructions on the Video Setup item 4 IS page 123 124 125 Advanced Setup Part 1 Option Setup e Make other expert settings Setting the Channel Setup e With this setting it is possible to change the number of channels played in the different zones according to the purpose The AVR 5805CI is equipped with pre out terminals for a total of 22 channels 16 channel of these pre out terminals can be assigned between the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 Theater In addition up to three channels of subwoofers can be added to the MAIN ZONE so subwoofers can be set in the front and back or at the sides The number of channels output from the pre out terminals exclusively for ZONE2 3 and 4 can be set to MONO or STEREO according to the method of playback in the various multi zones E Channel setup flow Set the number of channels for the MAIN ZONE s main channel 7 Set the number of subwoofer channels for the MAIN ZONE 7 The number of channels that can be set for ZONE2 depends of the number of channels in the MAIN ZONE See the table on page 127 7 Set the number of channels for the ZONE2 Y Set the number of channels for the ZONES 7 Set the number of channels for the ZONE4 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Option Setup at
354. x Aux 36 Assignment different input sources 1 3 TAPE ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON User This stores the current user settings in the 8 37 A Setup Memory memory Memory Lock Setup This sets whether or not to lock the system Setup Lock OFF 37 Lock setup settings so that they cannot be changed V The IP address related settings are made here DHCP ON 38 Address Proxy The proxy related settings can be changed OFF 39 here Network 7 Setup Standby Set whether or not to accept Mode Power control from the network in the ON 39 Network Saving standby mode Option PC Select the language of the A eng 39 Language computer s OS 156 Troubleshooting If a problem should arise first check the following 1 Are the connections correct 2 Have you operated the receiver according to the Operating Instructions 3 Are the speakers and other connected components operating properly If this unit is not operating properly check the items listed in the table below Should the problem persist there may be a malfunction Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase Symptom Cause Measures Page Display not lit and sound not e Power supply cord not plugged in securely e Check the insertion of the power supply cord 42 produced when power switch plug set to on e Speaker cables not securely connected e C
355. xit Press the CURSOR lt 1 or button to select ON or OFF Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Auto Setup Room EQ menu reappears Setting the MIC Input Select e Set this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic jack or V AUX L channel input terminal 7 Press the CURSOR A or V button to select Mic Input Select at the Auto Setup Room EQ menu then press the ENTER button e The Mic Input Select screen appears Auto Setup Room EQ 1 4 Mic Input Select 1 Auto Setup 2 Room EQ Setup 3 Direct Mode Setup 4 5 Mic Input Select Parameter Check Mic lt gt Vaux L Exit Press the CURSOR lt 1 or button to select Mic or V AUX L Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Auto Setup Room EO menu reappears E Specifications and Setup Procedure for Non DENON Microphone Required Microphone for DENON Auto Setup Room EQ Product name Countryman B3 Required Microphone Amplifier Specification for DENON Auto Setup Room EQ e Gain e Frequency Response 29 dB 10 30 kHz Full Flat Ex Rane MS1b Microphone Placement e Set the microphone using microphone stand or other method at the prime listening position e Point the top of the microphone toward the ceiling e Adjust the height so that the top of microphone to matches
356. y Zone 2 Video Convert Mode DVD 4 Input Source Oms gt Audio Delay Exit Press the CURSOR lt or gt button to set the delay time 0 ms 200 ms x With a movie source for example adjust so that the movement of the actors lips is synchronized with the sound Press the ENTER button to enter the setting e The Zone Setup menu reappears Setting the ZONE3 and ZONE4 tone control and channel level e Adjust the tone and channel level of the sound output from ZONES and ZONE4 1 Press the CURSOR or V button to select Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev at the Zone Setup menu then press the ENTER button e The Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev screen appears 6 Zone Setup Speaker eege 6 7 Zone3 4 Tone Ch Lev Subwoofer Mode Delay Time Channel Level 1 2 3 EZone3 Tone Ch Lev 5 Crossover Frequenc 6 Gr E Video Setup Zone4 Tone Ch Lev Zone3 4 Tone Ch Le xit Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the zone whose sound you want to adjust ZONE3 ZONE4 then press the ENTER button e Switch to the setting screen Example When Zone3 is selected 6 7 Zone3 Tone Ch Lev Bass 4 OdB gt Treble 4 OdB gt HPF d OFF gt Lch Lev 4 OdB gt Rch Lev 4 OdB gt Press the CURSOR A or V button to select the item to be set then press the CURSOR lt or gt button to adjust the parameter Bass Ad
357. y more towards the front than with conventional surround systems Doing so sometimes increases the surround effect when playing conventional 5 1 channel sources in the THX Surround EX mode Check the surround effects of the various modes before selecting the surround mode 160 Speaker setting examples Here we describe a number of speaker settings for different purposes Use these examples as guides to set up your system according to the type of speakers used and the main usage purpose 1 For THX Surround EX systems using surround back speakers Basic setting for primarily watching movies This is recommended when mainly playing movies and using regular single way or 2 way speakers for the surround speakers Front speakers Center speaker Surround back speakers As seen from above Surround speaker Surround back speaker Front speaker WI Point slightly downwards 2to3feet 7 As seen from the side e Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the TV or monitor screen as possible Set the center speaker between the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening position than the front speakers e Consult the operating instructions for your subwoofer for advice on placing the subwoofer within the listening room e f the surround speakers are direct radiating monopolar then place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position and parall
358. y sound sampling frequency 96 kHz quantization 24 bits Home THX Cinema Surround THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world renowned film production company Lucasfilm Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in both movie theaters and in your home theater as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theaters called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theaters with similar equipment and conditions The soundtrack created for movie theaters is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theater environment THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theater environment into the home correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On the AVR 5805Cl when the Home THX Cinema mode is on THX post processing is automatically added after the Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Digital or DTS decoder Re EQ Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks are designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for listening to a mov
359. yB 00847 01175 DigiQuest 00863 BT 00515 00668 00710 DigitAll World 01227 Bubu Sat 00713 Digiturk 01076 Bush 01284 01471 DirecTV 00099 00247 00392 00566 00639 00724 BVV 00692 00749 00819 01076 01108 01109 01142 Cambridge 00501 00515 01377 01392 01414 01442 01443 01444 Canal Digital 00853 01609 01639 01640 01749 01856 Canal Satellite 00853 01339 Discoverer 00605 Canal 00853 Discovery 00668 00710 01480 CanalSatellite 00853 01339 Dish Network 00775 26 PRESET CODE iw shpro stratel strisat MT R DNT Dream Multimedia BSI Dune DX Antenna Echostar sl RI E EIF Einhell Elap Elsat Elta Emanon Emme Esse eMTech Engel Eurieult Euro Eurocrypt EuroLine Europa European Europhon Eurosat Eu osky Eurostar Eutelsat Exator Expressvu Fagor Fenner Ferguson Fidelity Finlandia Finlux Flair Mate Force Fortec Star ish Network System 00775 00775 00084 00200 01075 00692 00200 01237 00421 00369 01530 00159 00610 01005 01467 00417 00132 00794 00587 00713 00200 00421 00369 01214 00713 00084 01278 00455 01251 00501 00794 00132 00243 00114 00501 00115 00713 00421 00775 00592 00157 00455 00501 00455 00397 00713 01101 01017 01005 01005 00885 00396 01437 00167 00668 01086 01477 00243 00668 00369 00871 01017 00136 00607 00299 00115 00607
360. yer AVR 5805Cl ZONE2 VIDEO OUT ZONE2 AUDIO OUT VARIABLE OUT Y SYSTEM REMOTE SNe a RC 1036 SR B 7 TV Monitor J COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y Pe Ca i 7 CH CA HI oO CH Ke X A Power amplifier OR lt or IL WC 90 Advanced Operation ZONE3 playback e The AVR 58O5CI is equipped with pre out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals composite and S Video as the ZONES output terminals e When using a monitor in ZONE3 the input device s cable type must be the same as the type of cable connected to the AVR 5805Cl s ZONE3 monitor output terminal video or S Video E ZONE3 STEREO MONO system e Stereo and monaural sound can be enjoyed in ZONES By default STEREO is selected e When only one speaker is being used in ZONE select MONO for the ZONE3 channel setting at Channel Setup in the System Setup Menu MAIN ZONE 9 1 channel system AN SYSTEM REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RC 1036 SB SB SR L R B ZONE ee 2 0 ZONE 3 ZONE3 VIDEO signal cable MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable ZONE3 STEREO MONO system Monitor FL P FR D ZONE3 Power amplifier VIDEO OUT ZONE AUDIO OUT VARIABLE OUT TV Monitor I T0 S es D
361. ystem of the building as close to the point of metal parts of the panel cable entry as practical 39 Connecting Other Sources Connecting the KM terminal e AVR 5805Cl is the KM Ready receiver You can receive XM Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock includes home antenna sold separately and subscribing to the XM service e Plug the XM Mini Tuner Home Dock into XM terminal on the rear panel e Position the Home Dock antenna near a south facing window to receive the best signal For details see XM Satellite Radio CS page 71 When making connections also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock NOTE e Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock connection has been completed e The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved e XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc All rights reserved Connecting the CONTROL terminal This terminal is used for an external controller Perform the following operation before using an external controller connected to the RS 232C terminal 1 Press the ON STANDBY button on the main unit and set the unit to the operating mode 2 Perform the operation to turn off the power from the external control 3 Check that the product has been set
362. ze the surround sound field ASA is used in three new modes THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode Boundary Gain Compensation If your chosen listening room layout for practical or aesthetic reasons results in the most of the listeners being close to the rear wall the resulting bass level can be sufficiently reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound quality becomes boomy THX Ultra2 receivers and controllers contain the BGC Boundary Gain Compensation feature to provide an improved bass balance BGC can be selected by choosing THX Ultra2 Subwoofer Yes from the Boundary Gain Compensation section of the THX Audio setup menu THX and Re EQ THX Timbre Matching THX Adaptive Decorrelation and THX Advanced Speaker Array are trademarks of THX Ltd THX may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved 165 Additional Information E THX Surround EX In 1999 a new surround system was launched simultaneously with the release of the movie Star Wars HDCD High Definition Compatible Digital Episode Dolby Digital Surround EK is a new movie sound track that greatly enhances the sense of spatial HDCD is an encoding decoding technology that greatly reduces expression and the positioning of the surround channel the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while sound The result is 360 degrees of movement and moving maintaining co

Denon AVR-5805CI User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents